Compact NSX, Compact Ins Inv and Masterpact NW - DC - DC PV Catalogue

Low Voltage
Direct Current Network

Catalogue2015
Compact NSX
Compact INS/INV
Masterpact NW
DC - DC PV
Power circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
direct current from 16 to 4000 A
Compact NSX, Compact INS/INV and
Masterpact NW direct current
A complete DC offer
from 16 to 4000 A
Compact NSX, Compact INS/INV and Masterpact NW direct current (DC) circuit
breakers are used to protect and control low-voltage distribution systems.
They are installed in main low-voltage switchboards (MLVS) and in distribution

switchboards (as incomers and outgoers). They can use all the accessories and
auxiliaries for the AC ranges and are thus suitable for most DC systems and
applications.
I
A complete DC offer
Compact NSX DC from 16 to 1200 A
V
/ 750
3 6 kA 50 V
4 P F

1 0 0 kA / 7 1200
3P /
S 00 V NSX 00 A)
6 kA / 5 V 12 0 0 12
F
3
/ 500 0 NSX 00 A) (
0 kA 1 2 0 1 0
S
1 0
/ 600
V NSX A) (
5 0 kA X 1200 (800
N 00 V N S
630 630 A
)
3 6 kA / 5 V NSX 0 A) (
F / 500 63 0 60
2P 8 5 k A
00 V NSX ) (
M kA / 5 S X 400 (500 A
1 0 0 N 0A)
50 V 50 0
S
kA / 2 N SX2 A) (4
3 6 6 0 5 0
F 50 V 1
NSX 0 A) ( 2
5 0 kA / 2 100 16
N 50 V NSX 0 A) (
8 5 kA / 2 (10
M

The Compact NSX range is designed for DC - 85 kA in a 2 poles version, for systems
voltages from 24 to 750 V and offers: y 500 V
b a wide selection of models suited to many v S
applications: - 100 kA in a 2 poles version, for systems
v 1, 2, 3 and 4 poles up to 160 A y 500 V
v 3 and 4 poles from 250 to 630 A - 100 kA in a 3 or 4 poles version, for systems
v 2 poles from 630 to 1200 A y 750 V
b high breaking capacities, with four b fewer frame sizes: just two poles pitches (35
performance levels F, N, M and S: and 45 mm) for easy integration in installation
v F systems (enclosures, machines, etc.)
- 36 kA in a 1 pole version, for systems y 250 V b accessories for insulation and series or
- 36 kA in a 2 poles version, for systems parallel connection of poles, suited to the
y 500 V particularities of DC applications
- 36 kA in a 3 or 4 poles version, for systems b fixed and withdrawable versions (3 and 4
y 750 V poles, DC type).
v N Breaking capacity Icu for 250 V per pole and
- 50 kA in a 1 pole version, for systems y 250 V L/R = 15 ms (1)
- 50 kA in a 2 poles version, for systems (1P: 250 V, 2P: 500 V, 3P: 750 V)
y 600 V (1) L/R = time constant of the distribution system
v M (see page A-11).
- 85 kA in a 1 pole version, for systems y 250 V
NSX160 DC -1P. NSX160 DC - 2P. NSX250 DC - 3P. NSX630 DC - 3P. NSX1200 DC - 2P.
II
from 16 to 4000 A
Masterpact NW DC from 1000 to 4000 A
40 A)
NW 4000
0V 20 A)
(
/ 90 V NW 2000
kA 750
35 / (
H kA 0V 10 A)
50 / 50 NW 1000
H 5k
A 0V (
8 / 50
H kA
35
N

The Masterpact NW range is designed for DC voltages from 24 to 900 V and offers:
b 2 versions : C/D (3 poles)
E (4 poles)
b three current ratings: 1000, 2000 and 4000 A
b two high breaking-capacity levels N and H.
Breaking capacity Icu for L/R = 15 ms (1) for 500, 750 or 900 V system voltages:
v N
- 35 kA for systems y 500 V
v H
- 35kA for systems y 900 V
b two models:
v circuit breaker for the protection of power circuits and loads
v switch-disconnector for circuit control and disconnection
b fixed and drawout versions for the entire range.
(1) L/R = time constant of the distribution system (see page A-11).
NW10 DC - C/D Version. NW10 DC - E Version.
III
IV
Compact NSX DC PV,
Compact INS PV and
Masterpact NW DC PV
A complete DC offer
for solar application
from 80 to 4000 A
V
Compact NSX DC PV
circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
Ensuring the reliability and

the efficiency of your photovoltaic
installation
Schneider Electric photovoltaic packages give you dependable, clean, and affordable solar power. High
quality, highly efficient, and available everywhere, our systems are safe, simple-to-install, giving you a
competitive edge. The Compact NSX DC PV range of molded case circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
with operational voltage up to 1000 V DC includes the switchgears and the protection components you need
to guarantee the safety and operation efficiency of your photovoltaic installation in commercial buildings and
power plants.
With heatsinks supplied as standard, the circuit breaker or

switch-disconnector rating is optimized, avoiding the need
to oversize protection components and saving space in the
enclosure. As part of the Compact NSX range, all existing
auxiliaries and accessories are compatible.
The terminal shields and phase barriers are available for
insulation. The shunt trip auxiliary is available for remote
disconnection.
VI
Optimising the management of your electrical
installation
Schneider Electrics Compact NSX DC PV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are used to control a circuit and
achieve isolation.
With the COM option, they can be integrated into an energy management system, which provides information on:
the state of the device (O/C)
remote Opening/Closing control
number of operations.
@
Firewall
bus
Mod
Ethernet (TPC / IP/ Internet

Modbus)
FDM
ULP
BCM
Module BCM ULP

iRIO RTU
Modbus
Modbus IFM
interface
iRIO RTU
The iRIO RTU (remote terminal unit) can both be used as
Ethernet coupler for the PowerLogic System devices and for
any other communicating devices operating under Modbus
RS485 protocol. Data is viewable via a standard web
FDM switchboard browser.
display unit
Compact NSX630b Compact NSX100 to 630

to 1600
Power Monitoring Expert (PME)

Power Monitoring Expert software is a complete power
management solution for your facility or plant operations.
It can be connected to the circuit breaker through Ethernet/
Modbus protocol.
VII
Compact INS PV
switch-disconnectors
No matter the size or scale of the project, Schneider Electric, has a

photovoltaic solution to fit your needs. Fast ROI, high efficiency its
all a part of our offer as the world leader in energy management.
The INS PV-1 is a direct current switch disconnector dedicated

to array isolation and control with Voc until 600 V DC.
Photovoltaic applications
VIII
Masterpact NW HADCD-PV
Schneider Electrics Masterpact NW HADCD-PV switch-disconnectors are used for circuit control and disconnection.
Safer photovoltaic energy generation
IX
Energy management
has never been simpler
Simple-to-install Smart Panels connect your building to real savings
in 3 steps
Measure
Embedded and stand-
alone metering & control
capabilities
Connect Save
> Integrated communication > Data-driven energy efficiency
interfaces actions
> Ready to connect to > Real time monitoring and control
energy management > Access to energy and site
platforms information through on-line
services
Smart Panels connect you to energy savings
X
Measure
"Smart Panels" mean
visible information
Grouping most of the electrical protection,
command and metering components, the
switchboards are now significant sources
of data locally displayed and sent via
CLOUD communication networks.
connect
and ready to be linked
to expertise
Smart Panels use reliable, simple to install
and use displays, and Ethernet and Modbus
interfaces on the EnerlinX communication
system.
Information is safely transmitted through the
most efficient networks:
Modbus SL inside switchboards, between
components
Ethernet, on cable or WiFi, inside the
building and connecting switchboards,
computers,
Ethernet on DSL or GPRS, for access to
on-line services by Schneider Electric.
Energy experts, wherever they are, are
now able to provide advises based on
permanently updated data of the building.
Save
CLOUD
On-site real time

monitoring and control
On a touch screen display connected
to Ethernet
s hows essential electrical information and
On-line Energy
alarms concerning the electrical network, Management services
a llows control (open, close, reset) of
StruXureWare Energy Operation
various equipments.
automates data collection via an open,
This touch screen is well appreciated for real scalable, and secure energy management
time value checking and control, directly on information system.
the front panel of the main switchboard.
With the help of the Schneider Electric energy
On a PC display with common browser
management services team, data is then
s hows monitoring web pages hosted into turned into actionable information to enable
the local Ethernet interface, customers to understand their facilities
a larm events generate automatic email performance on an ongoing basis.
notifications,
Energy Operation leverages companies
a llows control (open, close, reset) of current investments in their existing systems,
various equipments. and can be used to communicate advanced
Data displayed on graphics or recorded into results and performance to a broad audience
files are of a great interest for optimizing for a shared understanding throughout an
the use of energy in the building. organization.
As an example, they definitely help validating
the change of temperature settings, time
scheduling in a Building Management System
or other automated devices.
XI
TOOLS
Ecodial
Ecodial software is dedicated to LV electrical installation

calculation in accordance with the IEC60364
international standard or national standards.
This 4th generation, "Ecodial Advance Calculation 4",

offers a new ergonomic and new features:
ppoperating mode that allows easy calculation in case
of installation with different type of sources
(parallel transformers, back-up generators)
ppdiscrimination analysis associating curves checking
and discrimination tables
ppdirect access to protection settings including residual
current protections
ppeasy selection of alternate solutions or manual
selection of a product.
Compact NSX DC - DC PV General contents
Compact INS/INV DC - DC PV
Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Presentation 2
Functions and characteristics A-1
Installation recommendations B-1
Dimensions and connection C-1
Electrical diagrams D-1
Additional characteristics E-1
Catalogue numbers and order form F-1
1
Presentation The benefits of a comprehensive
and optimised range design
Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC - DC PV A wide, complete and high-performance range

circuit breakers constitute a flexible and cost- Schneider Electric DC - DC PV circuit breakers and switches provide a
effective means to meet the various needs of DC comprehensive solution for the many applications met in DC systems.
systems. The Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC ranges offer, a wide selection of current
ratings (16 to 4000 A) and breaking capacities (up to 100 kA) for the common
voltages up to 900 V DC.
The Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC - DC PV ranges are designed for use
DB403581.eps
DB416526.eps
under 1000 V for photovoltaic application.

The Compact INS/INV offers a wide selection of current ratings (40 to 2500 A) for the
common voltage up to 250 V DC.
Flexible and optimised design
The Compact NSX, Compact INS/INV and Masterpact NW DC ranges use all the
standard accessories and auxiliaries of the AC ranges.
The modular design and many possibilities offered by these systems provide a high
degree of flexibility in customizing products, while benefiting from dependable and
optimised industrial design.
Safe and simple operation
Even though they use the accessories of the corresponding AC ranges,
the Compact NSX, Compact INS/INV and Masterpact NW DC ranges have been
specially designed for DC systems.
NSX250 DC rating plate. NSX200 DC PV rating plate.
Specific accessories have been developed to meet the needs of series or parallel
connection of poles by users in a simple and dependable manner (see page
opposite). Compact NSX, Compact INS/INV and Masterpact NW DC devices can be
installed in class II switchboards with a degree of protection up to IP54.
Compliance with standards
DB416527.eps
Compact Compact NSX, Compact INS/INV and Masterpact DC circuit breaker ranges
NSX1250 NA DC PV comply with:
b the main international standards and in particular IEC 60947-1/2/3
Ui 1000 V Uimp 8 kV b European (EN 60947-1 and EN 60947-2) and the corresponding national
Ue (max) 1000V standards: France NF, Germany VDE, UK BS, Australia AS, Italy CEI
Icw 20kA/1s
Icm 20kA Compact b the specifications of the marine classification companies (Veritas, Lloyds Register
DB418157.eps
Ie 40C 1250A INS 250 of Shipping, Det Norske Veritas, etc.)

DC22B b French standard NF C 79-130 and the recommendations issued by the CNOMO
organisation for the protection of machine tools. For United States UL, Canadian
CSA, Mexican NOM and Japanese JIS standards, please consult us.
AC22A AC23A DC23A Compact NSX, Compact INS/INV and Masterpact NW DC - DC PV switches and
auxiliaries comply with the following:
Ui 800V Ue (V) 690 690 250 (4P)
Uimp 8kV Ie (A) 250 250 250
Ith 250A/60C
IEC / EN 60947-3 50/60 Hz
IEC / EN 60947-3
b the main international standards and in particular IEC 60947-2 (circuit breaker),
IEC 60947-3 (switch-disconnectors)
NSX1250 NA DC PV rating INS 250 rating plate. bb European (EN 60947-1, EN 60947-2 and EN 60947-3) and the corresponding
plate. national standards: France NF, Germany VDE, United Kingdom BS, Australia AS,
Italy CEI.
Open communication
Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC devices can be equipped with
Masterpact communication options for integration in a supervision system via Modbus.
DB104462.eps
DB416572.eps
NW20 HADCD-PV
Ui 1000V Uimp 12kV Pollution degree
Ue 1000 V c 3P in series
Icw 85kA/1s Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers are certified for operation
Icm 85kA
under pollution conditions in industrial environments, as per standard IEC 60947,
corresponding to:
IEC 60947-3
b pollution degree 3 (Compact NSX, Compact INS/INV)
Ith 2000A 55C
b pollution degree 4 (Masterpact NW).
Ue (V) Ie (A) Tropicalisation
DC22A 1000 2000
Compact NSX, Compact INS/INV and Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers have
successfully passed
the tests prescribed by the following standards for extreme atmospheric conditions:
NW20 HDC-D rating plate. NW20 HADCD-PV rating b IEC 60068-2-1 - dry cold (-40 C)
plate.
b IEC 60068-2-1 - dry heat (+85 C)
b IEC 60068-2-30 - damp heat (95 % relative humidity at +55 C)
b IEC 68-2-52 (level 2) - salt mist.
Environmental protection
Schneider Electric circuit breaker ranges benefit from Eco-design:
b use of materials not representing a danger to the environment
b non-polluting production units complying with ISO 14001 standards
b filtered breaking for high current ratings to avoid pollution in the switchboard
b low dissipated energy per pole, making energy losses insignificant
b marking of products in view of sorting recyclable materials at the end of the service
life.
2
specifically for DC - DC PV
applications
Compact NSX DC and Masterpact NW DC Designed for direct current

circuit breakers offer optimised pole-connection
possibilities. Performance levels and quality signed Schneider Electric
The creation of a dependable and high-performance DC range requires a large
amount of specific design and development work in addition to that invested in the
original AC range.
Schneider Electric called on its proven industrial experience in the AC field and its
recognised know-how in current interruption to develop a high-performance DC
range.
Schneider Electric decided to use the cases and accessories of its Compact NSX
and Masterpact NW ranges with:
b a high-performance design for the breaking chambers or the poles intended
specifically for DC applications (e.g. 100 kA at 250 V per pole for Compact NSX
and 85 kA at 900 V for two poles for Masterpact NW)
b fast trip units developed for DC applications
b optimised pole-connection and isolation possibilities that are both simple and
dependable.
Optimised solutions for the many types of DC systems

The many types of DC systems make it necessary, for cost and technical-
optimisation reasons, to connect the poles of two, three or four-pole circuit breakers
in series or in parallel.
b The Compact NSX and Masterpact NW ranges enable series connection of poles,
thereby optimising breaking capacity for high voltages.
Series connection reduces the voltage across the terminals of each pole (the total
voltage is divided by two, three or four depending on the circuit breaker) and the
operation of all poles provides the breaking capacity of the overall device.
This makes it possible to break short-circuit currents at high voltages while optimising
solutions (e.g. a Compact NSX 100 kA 250 V per pole can be used on a 750 V
system with three poles connected in series, thus reducing the cost compared to a
750 V solution).
b The Compact NSX range enables parallel connection of the poles, thereby
optimising the use of the rated currents.
Optimised and dependable series or parallel

DB402604.eps
connection of poles
Series connection - controlled temperature rise and
guaranteed performance
Schneider Electric DC circuit breakers comply with product standards
IEC 60947-1 and 2.
To that end, series connection of poles meets:
b temperature-rise conditions. Connections specifically designed to dissipate heat
mean the thermal model is equivalent to that for AC applications. The devices
dissipate the temperature rise produced by relatively short series connections
b optimum safety conditions. Connections are designed for extreme operating
conditions (insulation and safety clearances, ultimate breaking capacity, high
Compact NSX DC - safety and flexibility. pollution levels, etc.).
Parallel connection - optimisation

Certain DC systems require high power levels (hundreds to thousands of amperes)
DB402605.eps
at reduced voltages, most often y 250 V.

The configurations of DC systems and the exceptional performance levels of
Compact NSX circuit breakers mean the poles can be parallel connected.
This technique virtually doubles, triples or quadruples the current rating depending
on the type of circuit breaker and thus reduces the cost of solutions.
Masterpact NW DC - supplied ready for installation

(here with vertical rear connections).
3
Presentation Great flexibility in adapting
to DC applications
Overview of series connection of poles
for Compact NSX DC
With Compact NSX DC circuit breakers, it is easy to Compact NSX DC
create a large number of series pole arrangements
using prefabricated connections mounted on site Examples of series connection
during equipment installation. Two-pole devices
DB403286.eps
DB402976.eps
DB403287.eps
DB402977.eps
DB104468.eps
One type of connection per framesize, two Three-pole devices

catalogue numbers for all series connections.
DB403288.eps
DB402606.eps
DB403289.eps
DB402978.eps
Four-pole devices
DB403290.eps
DB402979.eps
DB403291.eps
DB402980.eps
b All connections are possible for the fixed and Great flexibility for connections
withdrawable versions.
DB104475.eps
DB402981.eps
b Indifferent connection of polarities, from left to

right or right to left.
b Indifferent connection of upstream and
downstream cables to top or bottom terminals.
b Series connection of poles is possible by
upstream/downstream connections. Creation of the
connections is the responsibility of the panel builder
or the installer.
All connections are possible for the fixed and Indifferent connection of polarities.
withdrawable versions.
DB402982.eps
DB402606.eps
Upstream/downstream connections to top or Series connection of poles is possible by upstream/

bottom connectors. downstream connections (user made).
4
for Compact INS/INV
With Compact INS/INV switch-disconnectors, it is Series connection of poles for direct current
easy to create a large number of series pole
arrangements using prefabricated connections applications
mounted on site during equipment installation.
Examples of series connection
Three-pole devices
DB104468_1.eps
DB414349.eps
DB414350.eps
One type of connection per frame size, two catalogue
numbers for all series connections.
Four-pole devices
DB414351.eps
DB414352.eps
b Indifferent connection of polarities, from left to right

or right to left.
Great flexibility for connections
b Indifferent connection of upstream and downstream
DB414353.eps
DB414354.eps
cables to top or bottom terminals.

b Series connection of poles is possible by upstream/
downstream connections. Creation of the connections
is the responsibility of the panel builder or the installer.
Indifferent connection of polarities. Upstream/downstream connections to top or

bottom connectors.
DB414355.eps
Series connection of poles is possible by

upstream/downstream connections (user made).
5
to DC applications
for Masterpact NW DC
Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers, with high Masterpact NW DC
ratings and installed as incoming devices, offer
three coupling versions C, D and E ready for Three versions supplied ready for connection
connection. Version C
The polarities Line -, Line + indicated on the rear
DB402988.eps
DB402252_55.eps
connections of the Masterpact NW DC
circuit breakers have to be respected in order to
ensure the magnetic threshold tolerances.
Front view: three-pole case - two poles in Rear view.

series.
The safe prefabricated series connections are Version D

factory made due to the power ratings. They also
DB402264_55.eps
DB402989.eps
dissipate heat.
DB104484.eps
Front view: three-pole case - three poles in Rear view with connections.
series.
Version E
DB402990.eps
DB402276_55.eps
Front view: four-pole case - four poles in Rear view with connections.
series.
6
Parallel connection of poles
The exceptional performance levels Examples of parallel connection

of Compact NSX DC and DC PV circuit breakers Two-pole devices
mean the poles can be parallel connected. This
DB403292.eps
DB402984.eps
technique virtually doubles, triples or quadruples
the current rating depending on the type of
circuit breaker and thus reduces the cost of
solutions.
DB104485.eps
Parallel pole connection accessories are identical to

those for series connections. The are equipped with Three-pole devices
heat sinks.
DB403293.eps
DB402985.eps
Customer connections are made directly
to the connection plates after removing the heat
sinks.
DB104486.eps
Specific connections are required for parallel

connection of three poles.
Four-pole devices (2 x 2 poles in parallel)
DB403294.eps
DB402986.eps
It is possible to mix series and parallel connections

DB403295.eps
DB402987.eps
Note: creation of the additional connection (1) is the responsibility of the panel builder or the
installer.
7
to DC PV applications
Overview of series connectors
for NSX DC PV
Compact NSX TM DC PV Compact NSX NA DC PV
2 Series connections
DB416077.eps
DB416273.eps
with heatsinks
2 Series connections
(dissipators)
with heatsinks
(dissipators)
4 interphase
barriers or
terminal shields
2 terminal shields
F1-
F1+
F1-
F2-
Photovoltaic panels
F1+
F2+
F2-
F3- Photovoltaic panels
F2+
F3+
F3-
F3+
8
Connection accessories
The exceptional performance levels of Compact INS/ Parallel connection of poles for direct current
INV switch-disconnectors mean the poles can be
parallel connected. This technique virtually doubles, applications
triples or quadruples the current rating depending on
the type of circuit breaker and thus reduces the cost of Examples of parallel connection
solutions. Three-pole devices
DB414356.eps
DB104485_1.eps

those for series connections. The are equipped with
Four-pole devices (2 x 2 poles in parallel)
heat sinks.
DB414357.eps
Customer connections are made directly

to the connection plates after removing the heat sinks.
DB104486_1.eps
Specific connections are required for parallel

connection of three poles.
It is possible to mix series and parallel connections

DB414358.eps
Note: creation of the additional connection (1) is the responsibility of the panel builder or the
installer.
Great flexibility for connections

bb Indifferent connection of polarities, from left to right or right to left.
bb Indifferent connection of upstream and downstream cables to top or bottom
terminals.
9
TOOLS
schneider-electric.com
This international site allows you

to access all the Schneider Electric
Solution and Product information via :
ppcomprehensive descriptions
pprange data sheets
ppa download area
ppproduct selectors
pp...
You can also access the information
dedicated to your business and get
in touch with your Schneider Electric
country support.
Compact NSX DC - DC PV Functions and characteristics
Presentation 2
Selection guide forDC circuit breakers

Types of DC distribution systems A-4
Solutions depending on the distribution system and the voltage A-5
Examples of circuit breaker selection A-8
Connection accessories A-9

Selection guide forDC circuit breakers
Examples of circuit breaker selection A-10
Calculation of DC distribution-system characteristics

Short-circuit currents L/R time constant A-11
General characteristics of Compact NSX DC and DC PV

Operating conditions A-12
Compact NSX DC and DC PV A-13
Circuit breaker characteristics

Compact NSX100 DC to NSX250 DC A-14
Compact NSX400 DC to NSX1200 DC A-16
Trip-unit characteristics
Types of trip units - Trip units for Compact NSX DC A-18
Characteristics and performance of Compact NSX switch-disconnectors
from 100 to 250 NA A-20
Switch-disconnectors characteristics
Compact NSX400/630 NA DC A-22
Accessories and auxiliaries

Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 DC fixed version A-24

Overview of Compact NSX1200 DC fixed version A-26
Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 DC plug-in and withdrawable versions A-28
Electrical and mechanical accessories

Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC A-30
Connection of fixed devices A-32
Connection of electrical auxiliaries A-34
Selection of auxiliaries for Compact NSX100/160/250 DC A-36
Selection of auxiliaries for Compact NSX400/630/1200 DC A-38
Indication contacts for Compact NSX DC A-39
Rotary handles A-40
Motor mechanism A-42
Remote tripping A-43
Locks A-44
Sealing accessories A-45
Escutcheons and protection collars A-46
Circuit breaker characteristics

Compact NSX80 TM DC PV to NSX500 TM DC PV A-48
Switch-disconnectors characteristics
Compact NSX100 NA DC PV to NSX500 NA DC PV A-50
Compact NSX630b NA DC PV to NSX1600 NA DC PV A-52
A-1
Compact NSX DC - DC PV Functions and characteristics

Overview of Compact NSX80 TM to NSX500 TM DC PV circuit breakers A-54
Overview of Compact NSX100 NA to NSX500 NA DC PV switch-disconnectors A-55
Overview of Compact NSX630b NA to NSX1600 NA DC PV
switch-disconnectors A-56
Compact INS DC PV A-57

Switch-disconnector selection
Compact INS40 to 160 DC A-58
Compact INS250-100 to 630 DC A-62
Compact INS630b to 2500 DC A-66
Compact INV100 to 630 DC A-70
Compact INV630b to 2500 DC A-74
Communication
EnerlinX communication system A-78
IFE Ethernet interface A-80
IFM Modbus communication interface A-82
COM option in Compact and Masterpact A-83
I/O application module A-84
Communications modules, IFM and IFE for Compact NSX A-86
Communication components and connections A-87
Connection of the IFE to a fixed or drawout Masterpact NW A-88
Connection of the IFM to a fixed or drawout Masterpact NW A-89
Electrical Asset Manager Configuration Engineering tool A-90
A-2
General characteristics ofMasterpact NW DC - DC PV
Operating conditions A-92
Masterpact NW DC and DC PV A-93
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC A-94
Trip-unit characteristics
Trip units for Masterpact NW DC A-96
Switch-disconnectors for PV application

Masterpact NW HADCD-PV A-98
Connections and safety clearances A-99
Panorama of electrical and mechanical accessories

Connection
Overview of solutions A-102
Electrical and mechanical accessories


Catalogue numbers andorderform F-1
A-3
Functions
and characteristics
Selection guide forDC
circuit breakers
Types of DC distribution systems
There are three types of DC distribution systems (see Selection of a circuit breaker depends essentially on the distribution-system
the table). parameters presented below which are used to determine the corresponding
The operational voltage in conjunction with one of the characteristics:
three systems determines the number of poles taking b type of system - determines the type of product and the number of poles
part in current interruption. connected in series for each polarity
b rated voltage - determines the number of series poles taking part in current
interruption
b nominal current - determines the rated current of the circuit-breaker
b maximum short-circuit current at the point of installation - determines the breaking
capacity.
Types of systems
Earthed systems Isolated systems
The source has one earthed polarity (1) The source has an earthed mid-point
Diagrams and different faults
DB116982.eps
DB116983.eps
DB116984.eps
Fault analysis (neglecting resistance of earth electrodes)
Fault A b maximum Isc at U b maximum Isc at U/2 b no consequences
b only protected polarity concerned b only positive polarity concerned b the fault must be indicated by an IMD
b all poles of protected polarity must have b all poles of positive polarity must have (insulation-monitoring device) and cleared
breaking capacity u Isc max. at U breaking capacity u Isc max. at U/2 (standard IEC/EN60364)
Fault B b maximum Isc at U b maximum Isc at U b maximum Isc at U
b if only one polarity (the positive here) is b both polarities are concerned b both polarities are concerned
protected, all poles of protected polarity must b all poles of the two polarities must have b all poles of the two polarities must have
have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U breaking capacity u Isc max. at U breaking capacity u Isc max. at U
b if both polarities are protected, to enable
disconnection, all poles of the two polarities
must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at U
Fault C No consequences b same as fault A b same as fault A with the same obligations
b all poles of the
negative polarity must have breaking capacity
u Isc max. at U/2
Double fault Double fault not possible, Double fault not possible, b maximum Isc at U
A and D or C and system trips on first fault system trips on first fault b only positive polarity (cases A and D) or
E negative (C and E) concerned
b all poles of each polarity must have breaking
capacity u Isc max. at U
Most unfavourable cases
Fault A and fault B (if only one polarity is Fault B Double fault A and D or C and E
protected)
Conclusion: selection of number of poles and breaking capacity
Layout of protection poles
b on only one polarity (1) b identical for each polarity b identical for each polarity
Number of series poles
Per polarity b all on same polarity b equal b equal
Total b 1, 2 or 3 without disconnection b 2 or 4 (2) b 2 or 4 (2)
b 2, 3 or 4 with disconnection
Breaking capacity
b all poles of the protected polarity u Isc max. b all poles of both polarities u Isc max. at U b all poles of each polarity u Isc max. at U
at U b all poles of each polarity u Isc max. at U/2
Disconnection of both polarities (3)
Possible by adding a pole to the non-protected b ensured b ensured
polarity
Implementation
See the selection table opposite
(1) Positive or negative, depending on the polarity connected to the exposed conductive parts.
(2) A 3P circuit breaker can be used if a 2P version does not exist. In this case, the central pole is not connected.
(3) Disconnection made possible by multi-pole breaking.
A-4
Solutions depending on the distribution
system and the voltage
Series connection of poles
Type of distribution system
Type Earthed Isolated
Source One polarity (negative here) connected to earth Mid-point connected to earth Isolated polarities
(or exposed conductive parts)
Protected polarities 1 (disconnection of 1P) 2 (disconnection of 2P) 2 2
Diagrams
DB116985.eps
DB116986.eps
DB116987.eps
DB116988.eps
(and types of faults)
Selection of circuit breaker and pole connection

Compact NSX DC
24 V y Un y 250 V
DB115851.eps
DB115851.eps
DB115850.eps
DB115851.eps
Single-pole. Two-pole (1). Two-pole (1). Two-pole (1).
NSX100-600
DB115852.eps
DB115853.eps
DB115851.eps
DB115854.eps
250 V < Un y 500 V
Two-pole (1). Three-pole. Two-pole (1). Four-pole.

NSX100-500 (2)
DB115855.eps
DB115854.eps
DB115856.eps
500 V < Un y 750 V
Three-pole. Four-pole. Four-pole.

Masterpact NW DC
Type N
24 V y Un y 500 V
DB115857.eps
DB115857.eps
DB115857.eps
Version C. Version C. Version C.
Type H
24 V y Un y 500 V
DB403137.eps
DB115857.eps
DB115859.eps
Version D. Version C. Version E.

500 V < Un y 750 V
DB403137.eps
DB115859.eps
DB115859.eps
Version D. Version E. Version E.

750 V < Un y 900 V
DB403137.eps
DB115859.eps
DB115859.eps
Version D. Version E. Version E.

(1) A 3P circuit breaker can be used if a 2P version does not exist. In this case, the central pole is not connected.
(2) Compact NSX DC circuit breakers (and switch disconnectors) are designed to break the rated current or fault current at the rated operational voltage (Ue) with all
poles. To break the current at voltage > 500 V, three poles in series are required. In double earth fault situations (A + D or C + E), the circuit breaker (and Switch
disconnectors) must break the current at full voltage with only half of the poles. Compact NSX DC circuit breakers (and Switch disconnectors) are not designed for
this purpose and could sustain irremediable damage if used to break the current in a double earth fault situation for voltage > 500 V.
A-5
Functions
and characteristics
Selection guide forDC
circuit breakers
Diagrams
DB116985.eps
DB116986.eps
DB116987.eps
DB116988.eps
(and types of faults)
Selection of circuit breaker and pole connection

Compact NSX DC
Un y 250 V
DB115861.eps
DB115861.eps
DB115861.eps
DB115860.eps
Two, three-pole, 2, 3P in Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel. Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel. Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel.

parallel, four-pole, 4P in parallel.
250 V < Un y 500 V (1)
DB115862.eps
DB115861.eps
Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel, Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel.

connected in series.
Compact NSX1200 DC (2)
Un y 300 V
DB418517.eps
DB418517.eps
DB418517.eps
DB418518.eps
300 V < Un y 600 V (3)

DB418518.eps
DB418517.eps
(1) Compact NSX DC circuit breakers (and switch disconnectors) are designed to break the rated current or fault current at the rated operational voltage (Ue) with
all poles. To break the current at voltage > 250 V, two poles in series are required. In double earth fault situations (A + D or C + E), the circuit breaker (and switch
disconnectors) must break the current at full voltage with only half of the poles. Compact NSX DC circuit breakers (and switch disconnectors) are not designed for
(2) Do not remove parallel connectors.
(3) Compact NSX DC circuit breakers (and switch disconnections) are designed to break the rated current or fault current at the rated operational voltage (Ue) with
all poles. To break the current at voltage > 300 V, two poles in series are required. In double earth fault situations (A + D or C + E), the circuit breaker (and switch
disconnectors) must break the current at full voltage with only half of the poles. Compact NSX DC circuit breakers (and switch disconnectors) are not designed for
A-6
Comparison of series and parallel connection in
terms of performance
Series connection of poles divides the voltage per pole Series connection of poles on a DC circuit breaker is the means to:
and optimises breaking capacity for high-voltage b divide the system voltage by the number of poles
systems. b use the rated current for each pole
b use the breaking capacity of the circuit breaker for all the poles.
For example, a Compact NSX630, 3P DC type, with the three poles connected in
series, provides:
b a maximum voltage of 750 V (250 V per pole)
b a rated current of 630 A
b a breaking capacity of 100 kA / 750 V.
Consequently, a 630 A / 250 V device can be used in a 750 V system.
Parallel connection of poles divides the current per Parallel connection of poles, on the contrary, imposes the system voltage on
pole and optimises the rated current for systems that each pole, but is the means to:
do not exceed the withstand voltage of each pole. b divide the current flowing through each pole by the number of poles
The maximum useable rating and the value of the b increase the rated current.
magnetic setting are indicated (see pages B-7, B-8 For example, the same Compact NSX630 DC 3P circuit breaker with three poles in
and B-9). parallel provides:
b a maximum voltage of 250 V (250 V per pole)
b a rated current of 1500 A (see table page B-9).
Consequently, a 630 A device used in a 250 V system can handle 1500 A.
A-7
Functions Selection guide forDC
and characteristics
circuit breakers
Examples of circuit breaker selection
Selection of a Compact NSX DC

Example 1
Isc b Type of system - mid-point connected to earth
DB117186.eps
b System voltage - Un = 500 V DC with time constant L/R = 5 ms

b Rated current required at point of installation In = 250 A
b Short-circuit current at the point of installation Isc = 20 kA
Selection constraints - (see page A-4)
The system with the mid-point connected to earth requires (see conclusion
page A-4):
b identical protection-pole layout for each polarity
b an equal number of poles for each polarity, i.e. a total of two or four
DB115867.eps
DB115868.eps
b all poles of the two polarities must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at Un,
i.e. 20 kA/500 V in this case
b all poles of the each polarity must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at Un/2,
i.e. 20 kA/250 V in this case.
Selection possibilities - (see pages A-5 and A-6)
The tables indicate for 250 V < Un y 500 V and for this system:
b poles connected in series: two-pole 2P in series V selection 1
b poles connected in parallel: four-pole 2 x 2P parallel connected in series
V selection 2.
Circuit breaker selection - (see pages A-14 and B-8)
b selection 1: the 250 A rated current does not exist in 2P. It is possible to use a
Selection 1. Selection 2: Compact NSX160 DC 4P 250A 3P DC type circuit breaker with the central pole not connected V selection 3
2 x 2P parallel mounted in series. b selection 2: the 160 A rated current (DC version) is suitable with a 2 x2P
assembly connected in parallel because (see table page B-8):
v the rated current of the 2 x 2P assembly connected in parallel is In = 288 A > 250 A
DB115869.eps
v and for L/R = 5 ms:

- breaking capacity of all poles = 36 kA/500 V > 20 kA/500 V
- breaking capacity of poles of each polarity = 36 kA/250 V > 20 kA/250 V.
The options are:
b selection 1: Compact NSX250S DC, 3P, 2 poles connected
b selection 3: Compact NSX160 DC, 4P, 2 x 2P parallel connected in series.
Both solutions exist in fixed and withdrawable configurations.
Trip-unit selection
Selection 3: Compact NSX250 DC 3P with 2P connected. b Compact NSX250 DC 3P: the selection table (see page A-18) indicates
3TM250DC trip units, which are interchangeable
b Compact NSX160 DC, 4P (2 x 2P) 160 A: the selection table (see page B-8)
indicates, for the 2 x 2P parallel configuration mounted in series and for 250A, a
TM125DC trip unit with the magnetic-protection threshold set to 2500 A.
Example 2
b Type of system - one polarity earthed
DB115870.eps

b Short-circuit current at the point of installation Isc = 20 kA.
The system with one polarity connected to earth requires (see conclusion
page A-4):
b protection poles on the protected polarity
b all poles contribute to breaking for the polarity:
DB115871.eps
DB115872.eps
v 1, 2 or 3P without disconnection of the two polarities

v 2, 3 or 4P with disconnection of the two polarities
b all poles of the protected polarity must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at Un,
Selection possibilities - (see pages A-5 and A-6)
The tables indicate for Un y 250 V and for this system:
b poles connected in series: single-pole V selection 1 (or two-pole with
disconnection V selection 2)
b poles connected in parallel: two-pole V selection 3
Selection 1: Compact NSX160F DC 1P. Selection 2. b other selections (parallel connection) are possible, but are of no particular interest.
Circuit breaker selection - (see pages A-14 and B-7)
DB115873.eps
b selection 1: Compact NSX160F DC, 1P, 36 kA, available in fixed version

(or selection 2: Compact NSX160F DC, 2P, 36 kA, if disconnection of the two
polarities is desired)
b selection 3: Compact NSX100N DC, 2P in parallel, 36 kA, providing a rated
current of 200 A (see table page B-7), available in fixed version.
Trip-unit selection
b Compact NSX160N DC, 1P: the selection table (see page A-18) indicates a
built-in TM160DC trip unit with the magnetic-protection threshold set to 1250 A
b Compact NSX100N DC, 2P in parallel: the selection table (see page B-7)
indicates, for the 2P parallel configuration and for 160A, a TM80D trip unit with the
magnetic-protection threshold set to 1600 A.
Selection 3: Compact NSX100N 2P DC in parallel.
A-8
Solutions depending on the distribution system and the voltage

Diagrams, connection
DB108614.eps
DB108615.eps
DB108616.eps
DB108617.eps
method
Series connection of poles

Selection of switch-disconnectors and pole connection
Compact INS/INV
24 V y Un y 125 V
DB108619.eps
DB108589.eps
DB413528.eps
DB108592.eps
Two-pole (1). Three-pole. Two-pole (1). Four-pole.
125 V < Un y 250 V Not applicable

DB112606.eps
DB108591.eps
DB108592.eps
Four-pole. Four-pole. Four-pole.
(1) A 3P switch-disconnectors can be used if a 2P version does not exist. In this case, the central pole is not connected.

Selection of switch-disconnectors and pole connection
Compact INS/INV
Un y 63 V
DB413529.eps
DB413530.eps
DB413530.eps
DB413530.eps
Two, three-pole, 2, 3P in Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel. Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel. Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel.

parallel, four-pole, 4P in parallel.
63 V < Un y 125 V Not applicable Not applicable

DB413531.eps
DB413530.eps
Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel, Four-pole, 2 x 2P in parallel.

connected in series.
A-9
Functions Selection guide forDC
andcharacteristics
circuit breakers
Examples of circuit breaker selection
Selection of a Masterpact NW DC
Example 1
b Type of system - isolated polarities
DB115870.eps

The system with isolated polarities requires (see conclusion page A-4):
b identical protection for each polarity
b an equal number of poles for each polarity, i.e. a total of two or four
b all poles of each polarity must have breaking capacity u Isc max. at Un,
DB403116.eps

Selection possibilities - (see page A-5)
The table for series poles indicates for a voltage 24 V < Un y 750 V and the type of
system, use of a four-pole, version E circuit breaker.
Circuit breaker selection - (see page A-94)
The Masterpact NW DC characteristics table indicates more specifically with a
2000 A a NW20 DC type H circuit breaker with a breaking capacity of 50 kA/750 V
(L/R = 30 ms).
The correct selection is a Masterpact NW20 DC type H version E, 2000 A, 50 kA,
available in fixed and drawout versions.
Masterpact NW20H DC version E.
Example 2
b Type of system - one polarity earthed
DB115870.eps

The system with one polarity connected to earth requires
(see conclusion page A-4):
b protection poles on the protected polarity
b all poles contribute to breaking for the polarity:
DB115875.eps
v 1, 2 or 3P without disconnection of the two polarities

v 2, 3 or 4P with disconnection of the two polarities
b all poles of the protected polarity must have breaking capacity
u Isc max. at Un, i.e. 30 kA/500 V in this case.
Selection possibilities - (see page A-5)
The table for series poles indicates for a voltage 24 V < Un y 500 V and the type of
system, use of a three-pole, version C circuit breaker.
Circuit breaker selection - (see page A-94)
The Masterpact NW DC characteristics table indicates more specifically with a
1000 A a NW10 DC type N circuit breaker with a breaking capacity of 35 kA/500 V
Masterpact NW10N DC version C. (L/R = 15 ms). The correct selection is a Masterpact NW10 DC type N version C,
1000 A, 35 kA, available in fixed and drawout versions.
A-10
Calculation of DC distribution-
system characteristics
Short-circuit currents L/R time constant
Short-circuit currents
Calculation of the short-circuit current across the terminals of
DB403117.eps
a battery
During a short-circuit, the battery discharges a current equal to :
Vb
Isc =
Ri
b Vb = maximum discharge voltage (battery 100 % charged)
b Ri = internal resistance equivalent to all cells (a function of the capacity in
ampere-hours).
Example
b Consider a set of four 500 Ah batteries connected in parallel.
b Discharge voltage of one battery: 240 V (110 cells 2.2 V each).
b Discharge current of one battery: 300 A with a run-time of 30 minutes.
b Discharge current of all four batteries: 1200 A with a run-time of 30 minutes.
b Internal resistance 0.5 mW per cell, i.e. for one battery:
Ri = 110 x 0.5 x 10-3 = 55 x 10-3 W.
b Short-circuit current of one battery: Isc = 240 V / 55 x 10-3 W = 4.37 kA.
b Neglecting the resistance of the connections, for all four batteries discharging the
short-circuit current in parallel, the total short-circuit current is four times that of one
battery, i.e. Isc = 4 x 4.37 kA = 17.5 kA.
Note: if the internal resistance is not known, it is possible to use the following rough
approximation: Isc = kc where c is the capacity of the battery in ampere-hours and k is a
coefficient close to 10 and always less than 20.
Other typical examples

b PABXs: Isc from 5 to 25 kA at 240 VDC with L/R = 5ms.
b Submarine: Isc from 40 to 60 kA at 400 VDC with L/R = 5ms.
L/R time constant

When a short-circuit occurs across the terminals of a DC circuit, the current rises
DB403118.eps
from the load current (y In) to the short-circuit current Isc over a period of time that
depends on the value of the resistance R and inductance L of the short-circuited
loop.
The equation determining the current in the loop is:
U = Ri + L Di/Dt
The curve of I versus time is defined (neglecting In) by the equation:
I= Isc (1 - exp(t/t))
where t = L/R is the time constant for the rise to Isc.
DB403119.eps
Practically speaking, after a time t = 3t, the short-circuit is considered to be

established, because the value of exp(-3) = 0.05 is negligible compared to 1 (see the
curve opposite).
The lower the time constant (e.g. battery circuit), the shorter the time required for the
current to rise to Isc.
To express breaking capacity, the interrupted short-circuit current with the following
time constants is used:
b L/R = 5 ms, fast short-circuit
b L/R = 15 ms, standardised value used in standard IEC 60947-2
b L/R = 30 ms, slow short-circuit.
In general, the value of the system time constant is calculated under worst-case
conditions, across the terminals of the generator.
Breaking-capacity values for:

b Compact NSX DC (table page A-14) are the same for 5 ms and 15 ms
b Masterpact NW DC (table page A-94) are indicated for 3 values, 5 ms, 15 ms
and 30 ms.
A-11
Functions General characteristics of
andcharacteristics
Compact NSX DC and DC PV
Operating conditions
(m)
Altitude
DB111389.eps
2000
Compact NSX circuit breakers are designed to operate at their rated values at
altitudes under 2000 metres.
Above 2000 metres, the changes in the characteristics of the ambient air (electrical
resistance, cooling capacity) result in a reduction of the characteristics below.
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
Compact NSX DC
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 7.1 6.4 5.6
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 750 710 635 560
Maximum rated operationnal DC voltage 1 x Ue 0.88 x Ue 0.8 x Ue 0.7 x Ue
Rated current (A) 1 x In 0.96 x In 0.93 x In 0.9 x In
Compact NSX DC PV
Maximum rated operationnal DC voltage 1000 900 800 700
Rated current (A) 1 x In 0.96 x In 0.93 x In 0.9 x In
Vibrations
Compact NSX circuit breakers are guaranteed against electromagnetic or
mechanical vibrations.
DB111390.eps
Tests are carried out in compliance with standard IEC 68-2-6 for the levels required
by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyds, etc.):
b 2 to 13.2 Hz: amplitude 1 mm
b 13.2 to 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g.
Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage to
mechanical parts.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Compact NSX circuit breakers are protected against:
DB111391.eps
b overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances

b overvoltages caused by atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-system
outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system) and devices emitting radio waves (radios,
walkie-talkies, radar, etc.)
b electrostatic discharges produced by users. The circuit breakers have
successfully passed the electromagnetic-compatibility tests (EMC) defined by
international standard IEC 60947-2, appendix F.
The above tests guarantee that:
v no nuisance tripping occurs
v tripping times are respected.
Compact NSX circuit breakers comply with the following electromagnetic-
compatibility standards:
b IEC/EN 61000-4-2 - electrostatic immunity discharge test, part 2 (circuit breakers)
b IEC/EN 61000-4-3 - electromagnetic-field immunity test
b IEC/EN 61000-4-4 - electrical fast transient/burst immunity test
b IEC/EN 61000-4-5 - surge immunity test
b IEC/EN 61000-4-6 - immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by
radiofrequency fields
b CISPR 11 - radio-frequency conducted and radiated emission tests required for
CE marking:
v EN 61000-6-2 - immunity standard for industrial environments
v EN 50081-1-2 - emissions in commercial and industrial environments.
Ambient temperature
Operating-temperature range
b Compact NSX circuit breakers and switches may be used between
-25 C and +70 C.
bb For temperatures higher than 40 C (65 C for circuit breakers used to protect
motor feeders), devices must be derated as indicated in the documentation.
b Circuit breakers and switches should be put into service under the normal,
ambient operating temperatures indicated above. Exceptionally, they may be put
into service when the ambient temperature is between -35 C and -25 C.
Derating
Above 40 C, it is necessary to take into account the derating values.
Storage-temperature range
b Compact NSX circuit breakers and switches may be stored in their original
packing between -50C and +85 C.
A-12
Compact NSX DC and DC PV
Installation in class II switchboards

All Compact NSX DC circuit breakers are class II front-face devices. They may be
installed through the door of class II switchboards (as per standard IEC 60664)
without downgrading switchboard insulation. Installation requires no special
operations even when the circuit breaker is equipped with a rotary handle or a motor
mechanism.
Degree of protection
Compact NSX DC circuit breakers offer the following protection characteristics
depending on the installation conditions:
b IP: degree of protection (standard IEC 60529)
b IK: protection against external mechanical impacts (standard EN 50102).
Compact NSX DC
Bare circuit breaker with terminal shields
With toggle IP3X IK07
DB402607.eps
With direct rotary handle, IP3X IK07

DB402608.eps
standard or VDE
Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard

With toggle IP40 IK07
DB402609.eps
With direct rotary handle, IP40 IK07

DB402610.eps
standard or VDE
CCM IP43 IK07
CNOMO IP54 IK07
With extended rotary handle IP55 IK08

DB402611.eps
With motor mechanism IP40 IK07

DB402612.eps
5...8
DB403582.eps
Positive contact indication

Compact NSX DC circuit breakers are suitable for isolation as defined
by IEC 60947-1 and 60947-2:
b the isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF) position
b the operating handle and the indicators cannot indicate the OFF position unless
the contacts are effectively open
b padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open.
The isolation function is certified by tests guaranteeing:
b the mechanical reliability of the position-indication system
b the absence of leakage currents
b overvoltage withstand capacity between upstream and downstream connections.
DB116888.eps
For Compact NSX DC, installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does
not alter the reliability of the position-indication system.
A-13
Functions Circuit breaker characteristics
andcharacteristics
Compact NSX100 DC to NSX250 DC
Compact NSX DC circuit breaker

PB108201.eps
Basic frame Number of poles

Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-1/ 60947-2 and EN 60947-1 / 60947-2
Rated current at 40 C In (A)
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV peak)
Rated operational voltage Ue (V DC)
Type of circuit breaker
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (kA rms) V DC 24-125 V (1P) (1)
(L/R = 5 ms and L/R = 15 ms) 250 V (1P) (1)
500 V (2P) (1)
750 V (3P) (1)
Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu
PB108202.eps
Rated making capacity Icm % Icu

Utilisation category
Breaking time (ms)
Suitability for isolation
Pollution degree (as per IEC 60664-1)
Protection against overcurrents (see trip-unit table page A-19)
Built-in
Trip units Interchangeable
Protection Overloads
Short-circuits
Durability
(O/C cycles) Mechanical
PB107547_32.eps
Electrical 250 V In
250 V In/2
500 V In
500 V In/2
750 V In
750 V In/2
Indication and control auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts
Voltage release MX shunt release
MN undervoltage release
Installation and connections
Fixed Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in (base) Front connection
Rear connection
Withdrawable (chassis) Front connection
Rear connection
Control Manual with toggle
with direct or extended rotary handle
Electrical with remote control
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions Fixed (mm) 1P
H x W x D (mm) connected in series 2P
3P
4P
Weight (kg) Fixed (kg) 1P
connected in series 2P
3P
4P
(1) Number of poles in series taking part in current interruption.
Example. The NSX100N DC circuit breaker exists in the following versions:
- 1 pole with an Icu of 50 kA, for systems y 250 V
- 2 poles with an Icu of 85 kA, for systems y 500 V; 1 pole can be used in a 250 V system.
A-14
NSX100 DC NSX160 DC NSX250 DC
1 2 3/4 1 2 3/4 3/4
100 160 250

750 750 750
8 8 8
250 500 750 250 500 750 750
F N M F M S F S F N M F M S F S F S
36 50 85 36 85 100 36 100 36 50 85 36 85 100 36 100 36 100
36 50 85 36 85 100 36 100 36 50 85 36 85 100 36 100 36 100
- - - 36 85 100 36 100 - - - 36 85 100 36 100 36 100
- - - - - - 36 100 - - - - - - 36 100 36 100
100 %
100 %
A
< 10 ms
b
3
b b b b b b - b b b b b b - -
- - - - - - b - - - - - - b b
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b
10000
5000
10000
5000
10000
5000
10000
- b b - b b b
- b b - b b b
- b b - b b b
b
b
- - - - - - b - - - - - - b b
- - - - - - b - - - - - - b b
- - - - - - b - - - - - - b b
- - - - - - b - - - - - - b b
b
b
b
161 x 35 x 86 - - 161 x 35 x 86 - -
- 161 x 70 x 86 - - 161 x 70 x 86 -
- - 161 x 105 x 86 - - 161 x 105 x 86
- - 161 x 140 x 86 - - 161 x 140 x 86
0.7 - - 0.7 - -
- 1.2 - - 1.2 -
- - 1.6 to 1.9 - - 1.6 to 1.9
- - 2.1 to 2.3 - - 2.1 to 2.3
A-15
andcharacteristics
Compact NSX400 DC to NSX1200 DC
Compact NSX DC circuit breaker

PB114534-L30_r.eps
Basic frame Number of poles

Rated current at 40 C In (A)
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (kA rms) V DC 24-125 V (1P) (1)
(L/R = 5 ms and L/R = 15 ms) 250 V (1P) (1)
500 V (2P) (1)
750 V (3P) (1)
Icu (kA rms) V DC 24-300 V (1P) (1)
300-600 V (2P) (1)
PB113833-L32_r.eps

Utilisation category
Breaking time (ms)
Protection against overcurrents (see trip-unit table page A-19)
Trip units Interchangeable
Short-circuits
Durability
(O/C cycles) Mechanical
Electrical 250 V In
250 V In/2
500 V In
500 V In/2
750 V In
750 V In/2
600 V In
600 V In/2
Auxiliary contacts
Fixed Front connection
Rear connection
Plug-in (base) Front connection
Rear connection
Withdrawable (chassis) Front connection
Rear connection
Control Manual with toggle
with direct or extended rotary handle
Electrical with remote control
Dimensions Fixed (mm) 1P
3P
4P
Weight (kg) Fixed (kg) 1P
connected in series 2P
3P
4P
(1) Number of poles in series taking part in current interruption.
Example. The NSX100N DC circuit breaker exists in the following versions:
- 1 pole with an Icu of 50 kA, for systems y 250 V
- 2 poles with an Icu of 85 kA, for systems y 500 V; 1 pole can be used in a 250 V system.
A-16
NSX400 DC NSX630 DC NSX1200 DC
3/4 3/4 3/4 2
250 320 400 500 600 630 800 1000 1200

750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
750 750 750 750 500 600 600 600 600
F S F S F S F S F S N
36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100 - - - -
36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100 - - - -
36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100 - - - -
36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100 - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - 50 50 50 50
- - - - - - - - - - 50 50 50 50
100 % 100 % 25 %
100 % 100 % 100 %
A
10ms
b
3
-
b
b
5000 5000 5000 -

1000 1000 1000 -
2000 2000 2000 -
1000 1000 1000 -
2000 2000 2000 -
1000 1000 - -
2000 2000 - -
- - - 1000
- - - 2000
b
b
b b b b b b
b b - - - -
b b - - - -
b b - - - -
b b - - - -
b b - - - -
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
-
- 350 x 185 x 110
255 x 140 x 110
255 x 185 x 110 -
-
- 9.4
8 -
8.4 -
A-17
Functions Trip-unit characteristics
andcharacteristics Types of trip units
Trip units for Compact NSX DC
Trip units for Compact NSX100 DC - NSX160 DC

pb107518_13_r.eps
Single-pole and two-pole (not interchangeable)

Type of trip unit TM-D
Rating In (A) at 40 C 16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Compact circuit NSX100N/H DC b b b b b b b b b - -
breaker NSX160N/H DC - - - - - - - - - b b
Overload protection (thermal)
Tripping threshold Ir (A) at 40 C Fixed
16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 160
Protection against short-circuits (magnetic)
Pick-up Im (A) Fixed
Compact circuit NSX100/ Marked AC value (1) 190 190 300 300 500 500 500 640 800 1000 1250
pb107524-19_r.eps
breaker 160N/H DC True DC value 260 260 400 400 700 700 700 800 1000 1200 1250
Trip units for Compact NSX100 DC - NSX160 DC - NSX250 DC
Three-pole 3P-3d and four-pole 4P-4d (interchangeable trip units)
Type of trip unit TM-D TM-DC
Rating (A) In (A) at 40 C 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
Compact NSX100 DC b b b b b b b b - - - -
circuit NSX160 DC - - - - - - - - b b - -
breaker b b
NSX250 DC - - - - - - - - - -
Tripping Ir (at 40 C) Adjustable
threshold (A) 0.7 to 1 x In
PB107547_32.eps

Pick-up (A) Im Fixed Adjustable
Compact NSX100/160/ Marked AC 190 300 400 500 500 500 - - - - - -
circuit NSX250 DC value (1)
breaker True DC value 260 400 550 700 700 700 800 800 1250 1250 5 to 10 x In
Trip units for Compact NSX100 DC - NSX160 DC - NSX250 DC
Three-pole 3P-3d and four-pole 4P-4d (interchangeable trip units)
Type of trip unit TM-G
Rating (A) In (A) at 40 C 16 25 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
Compact NSX100 DC b b b b b b
circuit NSX160 DC - - - - - - b b
breaker b b
NSX250 DC - - - - - - - -
PB114534-L30_r.eps

Tripping Ir (at 40 C) Adjustable
threshold (A) 0.7 to 1 x In
Pick-up (A) Im Fixed
Compact Marked AC NSX100 DC 63 80 80 125 200 320 - - - -
circuit value (1) NSX160 DC - 80 80 125 200 320 440 440 - -
breaker
NSX250 DC - - - - 200 320 440 - 440 520
True DC value NSX100 DC 80 100 100 150 250 400 530 530 530 625
NSX160 DC - 100 100 150 250 400 530 530 - -
NSX250 DC - - - - - - - - 530 625
(1) The pick-up values for single-pole and two-pole, TMD and TMG magnetic trip units up to 63 A are marked with AC values.
A correction coefficient is required to obtain the DC pick-up values indicated on the next line.
The magnetic-protection pick-up values for TM-DC trip units are indicated directly in DC values.
Trip units for Compact NSX400DC - NSX1200DC
Three-pole, four- pole (not interchangeable) / Two-pole (not interchangeable)
PB113833-L32_r.eps
Type of trip unit TM-DC

Rating (A) In(A) at 40 C 250 (2) 320 400 500 600 630 800 1000 1200
Compact NSX400DC b b b - - - - - -
circuit NSX630DC - - - b b - - - -
breaker NSX1200DC - - - - - b b b b
Tripping threshold (A) Ir (at 40 C) Adjustable 0.7 to 1 x in
Pick-up (A) Im Adjustable 2.5 to 5 x in
(2) TM-DC 250 Adjustable range is 2.5 to 4 x ln.
A-18
Types of trip units
DB418166.eps
DC DC
see page A-18 see page A-96

see page B-7
(parallel connection of poles)
Trip units for Compact NSX DC

DB402616.eps
TM thermal-magnetic trip unit up to 1200 A

DB417820.eps
6000 3000
TM 1200 DC
5400 3600
840 1200A/40C
1200 960 4800 4200
1080 c
1 overload protection threshold. Up to 1200 A for Compact NSX DC, protection is provided by thermal-magnetic trip
2 short-circuit protection pick-up.
units.
b TM-D up to 160 A: fixed thermal threshold and magnetic pick-up.
b TM-D up to 63 A: adjustable thermal threshold and fixed magnetic pick-up.
b TM-DC from 80 to 250 A: fixed or adjustable (for 200 and 250 A) magnetic pick-up
and adjustable thermal threshold.
b TM-DC from 250 A to 1200 A adjustable magnetic pick-up and adjustable thermal
threshold.
b TM-G, up to 250 A: adjustable thermal threshold and fixed low magnetic pick-up to
protect long cables.
A-19
Functions Switch-disconnectors
and characteristics Characteristics and performance of
Compact NSX switch-disconnectors
from 100 to 250 NA
Installation standards require upstream protection.
However Compact NSX100 to 630 NA switch-
Common characteristics
disconnectors are self-protected by their high-set Rated voltages
magnetic release. Insulation voltage (V) Ui 750
Impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp 8
Operational voltage (V) Ue 750
Suitability for isolation IEC/EN 60947-3 yes
Utilisation category DC 22 A/DC 23 A
Pollution degree IEC 60664-1 3
Switch-disconnectors
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3
PB113369_L37.eps
Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C

Number of poles
Operational current (A) depending on le DC
the utilisation category 250 V (1 pole)
500 V (2 poles in series)
750 V (3 poles in series)
Short-circuit making capacity lcm min. (switch-disconnector alone)
(kA peak) max. (protection by upstream NSX DC
circuit breaker)
Rated short-time withstand current lcw for 1s
(A rms) 3s
20 s
Durability (C-O cycles) mechanical
Compact NSX100 to 250 NA. electrical DC 250 V (1 pole) and In/2
500 V (2 poles in series)In
Pollution degree
Protection
Add-on earth-leakage protection By Vigi module
By Vigirex relay
Additional indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
Voltages releases MX shunt release
Voltage-presence indicator
Current-transformer module
Ammeter module
Insulation monitoring module
Remote communication by bus
Device-status indication
Device remote operation
Operation counter
Installation / connections
Dimensions (mm) fixed, front connections 2/3P
WxHxD 4P
Weight (kg) fixed, front connections 3P
4P
Source-changeover systems (see chapter on Source-changeover systems)
Manual source-changeover systems
Remote-operated or automatic source-changeover systems
(1) 2P in 3P case.
(2) Suitable for 480 V NEMA.
Note: For more information, please see catalogue Compact NSX LVPED208001EN.
A-20
Common characteristics
Control
Manual With toggle b
With direct or extended rotary handle b
Electrical With remote control b
Versions
Fixed b
Withdrawable Plug-in base b
Chassis b
NSX100NA NSX160NA NSX250NA
100 160 250

2 (1), 3, 4 2 (1), 3, 4 2 (1), 3, 4
DC22A / DC23A DC22A / DC23A DC22A / DC23A
100 160 250
100 160 250
100 160 250
2.6 3.6 4.9
100 100 100
1800 2500 3500

1800 2500 3500
690 960 1350
50000 40000 20000
10000 10000 10000
5000 5000 5000
b b b
3 3 3
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
105 x 161 x 86
140 x 161 x 86
1.5 to 1.8
2.0 to 2.2
b
b
A-21
andcharacteristics
characteristics
Compact NSX400/630 NA DC
Compact NSX DC switch-disconnector

PB114539-L24_r.eps
Number of poles
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3
Rated current (A) In 40 C
(free air + no venting)
Altitude m 2000
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand Uimp
voltage (kV)
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue DC
Rated short circuit withstand Icw/Icm t=1s
current (kA rms)
Compact NSX630 NA DC. Rated conditionnal short-circuit Iq kA
current with back-up fuse A gG
Rated conditionnal short-circuit Iq with NSX DC circuit breaker kA with MCCB
PB114537-L31_r.eps
current
Utilization category
Pollution degree
Durability
Endurance (C-O cycles) mechanical
electrical (In) 750 V
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
motor mechanism
Compact NSX630 NA DC. Connections fixed front connection
long rear connection
plug-in (on base) front connection
rear connection
withdrawable (on chassis) front connection
rear connection
Additional measurement, indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts OF auxiliary contact
SD, SDE trip, fault-trip
Voltage releases MX, MN shunt trip/undervoltage release
Installation
Accessories crimp lugs / bare cable connector
terminal extensions and spreaders
escutcheons
terminal shields and interphase barriers
Din rail adapter
Dimensions (mm) H x W x D (w/o series connection) 3P
4P
Weight (kg) (w/o series connection) 3P
4P
A-22
NSX400 NA DC NSX630 NA DC
3/4 3/4
400 630
b b
750 750
8 8
750 750
7.5 7.5
10 10
400 630
100 100
DC22-A DC22-A
b b
3 3
5000 5000
1000 1000
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
b b
- -
255 x 140 x 110 255 x 140 x 110

255 x 185 x 110 255 x 185 x 110
6 6
7.8 7.8
A-23
Functions Accessories and auxiliaries
and characteristics Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 DC (*)
fixed version
Insulation accessories
DB418158.eps
Interphase barriers
Electrical auxiliaries A-39
Sealable terminal
shields
Indication contact
Heat sink Voltage release
Protection and measurements
TM-D, TM-G trip unit
(*) Applicable for circuit breaker up to 600 A see page A-16.
A-24
Connection A-32
One-piece spreader
Cable connectors
Rear connectors
Cable connectors
Communication (1)
(1) (1)
Terminal
extensions
BSCM module
NSX cord
(1)
Modbus interface
Control accessories A-40
Direct rotary handle Extended rotary handle
Motor mechanism
(1) See communication chapter.
A-25
and characteristics Overview of Compact NSX1200 DC
fixed version
DB417702.eps
Sealable terminal
shields
Indication contact
Voltage release Im
6000 3000
4000
TM 25
0D
/ 40C I I
Ir 250A r m
5000
840
1200
960 A
1080
Sealable terminal
shields
A-26
Cable connectors
(1) (1)
BSCM module
NSX cord
(1)
Modbus interface
Direct rotary handle Extended rotary handle
Motor mechanism
A-27
and characteristics Overview of Compact NSX100 to 630 DC (*)
plug-in and withdrawable versions
DB418159.eps
Interphase barriers
Electrical accessories A-34
Sealable long terminal

shields for plug-in base
Heat sink
Automatic withdrawable auxiliary connector
Manual auxiliary connector
Mechanical accessories A-31
Circuit-breaker side plate
Chassis side plate

(*) Applicable for circuit breaker up to 600 A see page A-16.
A-28
Connection A-32
Cable connectors Rear connectors
Lugs
Rear connectors
Adapter
Cable connectors
Circuit breaker
Terminal extensions
Plug-in base
Power connection
accessories
Power connections
A-29
Functions Electrical and mechanical
andcharacteristics
accessories
Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC
Compact NSX DC circuit breakers may be installed Fixed circuit breakers NSX100 to NSX1200
horizontally, vertically or flat on their back, without Fixed circuit breakers are designed for standard connection using bars or cables
derating performance levels. with lugs. Bare-cable connectors are available for connection to bare copper or
There are three installation versions: aluminium cables.
b fixed For connection of large cables, a number of solutions with spreaders may be used
b plug-in (on a base) for both cables with lugs or bare cables.
b withdrawable (on a chassis).
For the last two, components must be added (base,
DB112200.eps
DB112201.eps
DB112202.eps
chassis) to the fixed version.
Many connection components are shared by the three
versions.
Mounting on a backplate. Mounting on rails. Mounting on DIN rail

(with adapter).
PB107547_32.eps
DB112203.eps
DB112204.eps
L3
L2
L1
8 Nm
L2
8 Nm
L3
8 Nm
DB112208.eps
L3
L2
L1
Mounting on a Prisma mounting plate. Mounting on busbars with an

Fixed Compact NSX250 DC. Installation positions. adapter.
Plug-in base circuit breakers NSX100 to NSX630 (*)

PB104934.eps
The plug-in version makes it possible to:

bb extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker without having to touch the
connections on the base
bb allow for the addition of future circuits by installing bases that will be equipped with
a circuit breaker at a later date
bb isolate the power circuits when the device is mounted on or through a panel. It acts
as a barrier for the connections of the plug-in base. Insulation is made complete by
the mandatory short terminal shields on the device. The degrees of protection are:
vv circuit breaker plugged in = IP4
vv circuit breaker removed = IP2
DB112209.eps
vv circuit breaker removed, base equipped with shutters = IP4.

Parts of a plug-in configuration
A plug-in configuration is made by adding a "plug-in kit" to a fixed device.
Plug-in Installation positions. To avoid connecting or disconnecting the power circuits under load conditions, a
Compact NSX250 DC. safety trip causes automatic tripping if the device is ON, before engaging or
withdrawing it. The safety trip, supplied with the kit, must be installed on the device.
If the device is disconnected, the safety trip does not operate. The device can be
operated outside the switchboard.
Accessories
Optional insulation accessories are available.
bb Terminal shields to protect against direct contact.
bb Interphase barriers to reinforce insulation between phases and protect against
direct contact.
Mounting
DB112206.eps
DB112205.eps
DB112207.eps
Mounting on a backplate. Mounting through a front panel. Mounting on rails.

(*) Applicable for circuit breaker up to 600 A see page A-14 to A-17.
A-30
bb Disconnected position - the power circuits are Withdrawable circuit breakers NSX100 to NSX630 (*)
disconnected, but the circuit breaker is still on the In addition to the advantages provided by the base, installation on a chassis
chassis and may still be operated (ON, OFF, facilitates handling. It offers three positions, with transfer from one to the other after
push-to-trip). mechanical unlocking:
bb The circuit breaker may be locked using bb connected: the power circuits are connected
1 to 3 padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm), to bb disconnected: the power circuits are disconnected, the device can be operated to
prevent connection. check auxiliary operation
bb The auxiliaries can be tested (with manual auxiliary bb removed: the device is free and can be removed from the chassis.
connector).
Parts of a withdrawable configuration
A withdrawable configuration requires two side plates installed on the base and two
PB104935.eps
sides plates mounted on the circuit breaker. Similar to the plug-in version, a safety
trip causes automatic tripping if the device is ON, before engaging or withdrawing it,
and enables device operation in the disconnected position.
Accessories
Accessories are the same as for the base, with in addition:
bb auxiliary contacts for installation on the fixed part, indicating the connected and
disconnected positions
bb locking by 1 to 3 padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm), to:
vv prevent insertion for connection
vv lock the circuit breaker in connected or disconnected position
bb toggle collar for circuit breakers with a toggle mounted through a front panel,
intended to maintain the degree of protection whatever the position of the circuit
breaker (supplied with a toggle extension)
bb telescopic shaft for extended rotary handles. The door can then be closed with the
Withdrawable Compact NSX250 DC. device in the connected and disconnected positions.
DB112209.eps
DB111369.eps
DB112219.eps
Installation positions.
Protection collar for toggle and toggle Telescopic shaft.
extension to provide IP4 in the connected and
DB112210.eps
disconnected positions.
Connected. Disconnected. Removed. Mounting

DB112220.eps
DB112221.eps
DB112312.eps
Mounting on a backplate. Mounting through a front Mounting on rails.

panel.
(*) Applicable for circuit breaker up to 600 A see page A-14 to A-17.
A-31
and characteristics
accessories
Connection of fixed devices
Fixed circuit breakers are designed for standard front Front connection
connection using bars or cables with lugs.
Cable connectors are available for bare cables. Rear Bars or cables with lugs
connection is also possible. Standard terminals
Compact NSX100 to 630 DC come with terminals comprising snap-in nuts with
screws:
DB112169.eps
DB417865.eps
bb Compact NSX100/160/250 DC: M8 nuts and screws

bb Compact NSX400/630 DC: M10 nuts and screws.
These terminals may be used for:
bb direct connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs
bb terminal extensions offering a wide range of connection possibilities.
Insulated bar.
Interphase barriers or terminal shields are recommended. They are mandatory for
DB112170.eps
certain connection accessories (in which case the interphase barriers are provided).
Bars
When the switchboard configuration has not been tested, insulated bars are
mandatory.
Maximum size of bars
Compact NSX DC circuit breaker 100 to 250 400 to 630 1200
Small lug for copper cables.
DB417866.eps
Without spreaders pitch (mm) 35 45 45

DB112171.eps
maximum bar size (mm) 20 x 2 32 x 6 2 x (32 x 6)

With spreaders pitch (mm) 45 52.5 -
maximum bar size (mm) 32 x 2 40 x 6 -
Crimp lugs
There are two models, for aluminium and copper cables.
Small lug for Al cables. It is necessary to use narrow lugs, compatible with device connections. They must
be used with interphase barriers or long terminal shields. The lugs are supplied with
interphase barriers and may be used for the types of cables listed below.
Cable sizes for connection using lugs
Compact NSX DC circuit breaker 100 to 250 400 to 630 630 to 1200
Copper cables size (mm) 120, 150, 185 240, 300 185, 2 x 185
crimping hexagonal barrels or punching
Aluminium cables size (mm) 120, 150, 185 240, 300 185, 2 x 185
crimping hexagonal barrels
Terminal extensions
Extensions with anti-rotation ribs can be attached to the standard terminals to
provide numerous connection possibilities in little space:
DB112172.eps
DB112173.eps
DB112174.eps
bb straight terminal extensions

bb right-angle terminal extensions
bb edgewise terminal extensions
bb double-L extensions
Straight terminal Right-angle terminal 45 terminal bb 45 extensions.
extensions. extensions. extensions.
Spreaders
Spreaders may be used to increase the pitch:
DB112175.eps
DB112176.eps
DB112177.eps
bb NSX100 to 250 DC: the 35 mm pitch can be increased to 45 mm

bb NSX400/630 DC: the 45 mm pitch can be increased to 52 or 70 mm.
Bars, cable lugs or cable connectors can be attached to the ends.
Edgewise terminal Double-L terminal Spreaders. One-piece spreader for NSX100 to 250 DC
extensions. extensions. Connection of large cables may require an increase in the distance between the
device terminals.
DB118544.eps
The one-piece spreader is the means to:

bb increase the 35 mm pitch of the NSX100 to 250 DC circuit breaker terminals to the
45 mm pitch of a NSX400/630 DC device
bb use all the connection and insulation accessories available for the next largest
frame size (lugs, connectors, spreaders, right-angle and edgewise terminal
extensions, terminal shields and interphase barriers).
It may also be used for Compact INS switch-disconnectors.
DB112179.eps
DB112180.eps
Equipped with a single-piece spreader, Compact NSX DC devices can be mounted:

bb at the back of a switchboard
bb behind the front panel with a raiser.
The one-piece spreader is also the means to:
bb align devices with different frame sizes in the switchboard
bb use the same mounting plate, whatever the device.
Pitch (mm) depending on the type of spreader
Mounting at the Mounting
back of a behind the front Compact NSX DC circuit breaker 100 to 250 400 to 630
switchboard. panel with a Without spreaders 35 45
raiser. With spreaders 45 52.5 or 70
With one-piece spreader 45 -
A-32
Bare cables
DB112313.eps
DB112314.eps
For bare cables (without lugs), the prefabricated bare-cable connectors may be used
for both copper and aluminium cables.
1-cable connector for Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
The connectors snap directly on to the device terminals or are secured by clips to
right-angle and straight terminal extensions as well as spreaders.
Bare cable.
1-cable connector for Compact NSX400 to 630 DC
The connectors are screwed directly to the device terminals.
2-cable connector for Compact NSX100 to 250 and 400/630/1200 DC
The connectors are screwed to device terminals or right-angle terminal extensions.
Distribution connectors for Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
These connectors are screwed directly to device terminals. Interphase barriers are
supplied with distribution connectors, but may be replaced by long terminal shields.
Each connector can receive six cables with cross-sectional areas ranging from 1.5 to
35 mm each.
Maximum size of cables depending on the type of connector

Compact NSX DC circuit breaker 100/160 250 400 630 1200
DB112315.eps
DB112316.eps
DB112317.eps
DB111326.eps
Steel connectors 1.5 to 95 mm b

Aluminium connectors 25 to 95 mm b b
120 to 185 mm b b
2 cables 50 to 120 mm b b
1-cable 1-cable 2-cable 2-cable 2 cables 35 to 240 mm b b b
connector for connector for connector for connector for 35 to 300 mm b b
NSX100 NSX400/ NSX100 NSX400/ Distribution connectors 6 cables 35 mm b b
to 250 DC. 630 DC. to 250 DC. 630/1200 DC.
Rear connection (up to rated current 600 A)

DB111327.eps
Device mounting on a backplate with suitable holes enables rear connection.
Bars or cables with lugs

Rear connections for bars or cables with lugs are available in two lengths. Bars may
Distribution connector for be positioned flat, on edge or at 45 angles depending on how the rear connections
NSX100 to 250 DC. are positioned.
The rear connections are simply fitted to the device connection terminals. All
combinations of rear connection lengths and positions are possible on a given
device.
Four positions. Two lengths.
Bare cables
DB111329.eps
DB111330.eps
For the connection of bare cables, the 1-cable connectors for Compact NSX100
to 250 DC may be secured to the rear connections using clips.
Accessories for series and parallel connection

DB416293.eps
(up to rated current 600 A)

DB414022.eps
A limited number of accessories can be used to

optimise series and parallel connection of poles.
Cable connector.
DB414021.eps
Accessories for series connection

These include series connection plates, equipped with
heat sinks.
Series connection plates
equipped with heat sinks.
Accessories for parallel connection
those for series connections. They are equipped with
DB104729.eps
DB104728.eps
Rear connection. heat sinks. Customer connections are made directly to

the connection plates after removing the heat sinks.
DB111332.eps
DB104730.eps
Parallel connection plates.
Connection of bare cables to NSX100 to 250 DC by clips.
A-33
and characteristics
accessories
Connection of electrical auxiliaries
Fixed Compact NSX100-250 DC

DB403554.EPS
Auxiliary circuits exit the device through a knock-out in the front cover.
Fixed Compact NSX DC.
Withdrawable or plug-in Compact NSX DC

DB403555.EPS
Automatic auxiliary connectors

Auxiliary circuits exit the circuit breaker via one to three automatic auxiliary
connectors (nine wires each). These are made up of:
bb a moving part, connected to the circuit breaker via a support (one support per
circuit breaker)
bb a fixed part, mounted on the plug-in base, equipped with connectors for bare
cables up to 2.5 mm.
Micrologic trip unit options are also wired via the automatic auxiliary connectors.
Selection of automatic auxiliary connectors

Depending on the functions installed, one to three automatic auxiliary connectors are
required.
Plug-in/withdrawable
Compact NSX DC.
DB403557.eps
DB403556.eps
Connector 1
Connector 1
Connector 2
Connector 2
Connector 3
DB111376.EPS
Compact
NSX100/160/250 DC.
Compact NSX400/630 DC.
Automatic auxiliary Moving part

connector:
Fixed part
A-34
Withdrawable Compact NSX DC
DB111379.EPS
Manual auxiliary connectors

As an option to the automatic auxiliary connectors, withdrawable circuit breakers
may be equipped with one to three plugs with nine wires each. In "disconnected"
position, the auxiliaries remain connected.
They can then be tested by operating the device.
Nine-wire manual auxiliary connector.

Connector 1
DB403583.eps
Connector 2
Compact NSX100/160/250 DC.

DB115611.eps
Connector 1
Connector 2
Connector 3
Each auxiliary is equipped with a terminal block with

numbered terminals for connection of wires up to:
bb 1.5 mm for auxiliary contacts and voltage releases
bb 2.5 mm for the motor mechanism module.
Circuit breaker Connector 1 Connector 2 Connector 3

OF1 OF2 OF3
MN/ SDE
MX NSX cord
MT
SD
24 V DC
NSX100/160/250 DC b b -
NSX400/630 DC b b b
MT: motor mechanism.
Compact NSX400/630 DC.
A-35
and characteristics
accessories
Selection of auxiliaries
for Compact NSX100/160/250 DC
Remote tripping
044313_30_SE.eps
MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker.
This release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a tripping
threshold:
b tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage
b circuit breaker closing is possible if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated
voltage. For a lower value, circuit breaker closing cannot be guaranteed.
Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard
IEC 60947-2.
Time-delay unit for an MN release

Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting 200 ms.
It is used in conjunction with:
b a 250 V DC MN release, control voltage 220/240 V AC
b a 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC.
MX shunt release
Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un.
Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 20 ms) or maintained.
Operation
When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be reset
locally.
MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.
In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary,
is not possible.
Mechanical characteristics
b Endurance is equal to 50 % of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker.
b The releases clip in behind the front cover.
b Connection using wires up to 1.5 mm2, to integrated terminal blocks.
Electrical characteristics
b Consumption:
v pick-up (MX): < 30 VA
v seal-in (MN and MNR): < 5 VA.
b Response time: < 50 ms.
NA, TMD, TMG, MA

Standard
DB403010.eps
DB403012.eps
Motor mechanism /
rotary handle / toggle handle
SD SDE
OF1 OF2 OF2
SD SDE OF1
MN /
MX MN /
MX
A-36
Communication
Communication requires specific auxiliaries (see page A-42).
Communication of status indications (1)
bb 1 BSCM module.
bb 1 NSX cord (internal terminal block) for both communication and 24 V DC supply
to the BSCM.
Communication of status conditions is compatible with a toggle handle and a rotary
handle.
Communication of status indications and controls
This requires, in addition to the previous auxiliaries:
bb 1 IFM connected to the BSCM.
TMD, TMG
Communication of status indications (1)
Rotary handle / Communicating
DB403584.eps
DB403585.eps
toggle handle motor mechanism
BSCM BSCM
NSX cord
or
NSX cord
(1) Compact NSX100-250 DC only.
A-37
and characteristics
accessories
Selection of auxiliaries
for Compact NSX400/630/1200 DC
Standard
All Compact NSX400/630/1200 DC circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors have
slots for the electrical auxiliaries listed below.
5 indication contacts (see page A-39)
bb 3 ON/OFF (OF1, OF2, OF3)
bb 1 trip indication (SD)
bb 1 fault-trip indication (SDE).
1 remote-tripping release (see page A-43)

bb Either 1 MN undervoltage release.
bb Or 1 MX shunt release.
All these auxiliaries may be installed with a motor mechanism or a rotary

handle or toggle handle.
NA, NSX400/1200 DC
Standard
Motor mechanism /
DB403013.eps
DB403586.eps
rotary handle / toggle handle
OF1,
OF2, SD
OF1 SD OF3
SDE
OF2
OF3 SDE
MN / MN /
MX MX
A-38
Functions
and characteristics
Indication contacts for Compact NSX DC
One contact model provides circuit breaker status These common-point changeover contacts provide remote circuit breaker status
indications (OF - SD - SDE). information.
An early-make or early-break contact, in conjunction They can be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.
with a rotary handle, can be used to anticipate device They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation.
opening or closing.
A CE / CD contact indicates that the chassis is Functions
connected / disconnected. Breaker-status indications, during normal operation or after a fault
A single type of contact provides all the different indication functions:
bb OF (ON/OFF) indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts
bb SD (trip indication) indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
vv an overload
vv a short-circuit
DB125549.eps
vv operation of a voltage release

vv operation of the "push to trip" button
vv disconnection when the device is ON.
The SD contact returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
bb SDE (fault-trip indication) indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
vv an overload
vv a short-circuit.
Indication contacts.
The SD contact returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
Rotary-handle position contact for early-make or early-break functions
bb CAM (early-make or early-break function) contacts indicate the position of the
PB103706-68.eps
rotary handle.
They are used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (early break)
or to energise a control device prior to circuit breaker closing (early make).
Chassis-position contacts
bb CE/CD (connected/disconnected) contacts are microswitch-type carriage
switches for withdrawable circuit breakers.
CE/CD carriage switches.
Installation
bb OF, SD, SDE functions: a single type of contact provides all these different
indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. The contacts
clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker.
The SDE function on a Compact NSX100 - 250 DC equipped with a thermal-
magnetic trip unit requires the SDE actuator.
bb CAM function: the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct or extended).
bb CE/CD function: the contacts clip into the fixed part of the chassis.
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts

Contacts Standard Low level
Types of contacts All OF, SD, SDE
Rated thermal current (A) 6 5
Minimum load 100 mA at 24 V DC 1 mA at 4 V DC
Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V AC/DC 6 6 6 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V AC/DC 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V AC/DC 6 5 0.6 0.05 5 2.5 0.6 0.05
220/240 V AC 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V DC - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V AC 6 2 - - 5 1.5 - -
480 V AC 6 1.5 - - 5 1 - -
660/690 V AC 6 0.1 - - - - - -
A-39
and characteristics
accessories
Rotary handles
For Compact NSX DC
There are two types of rotary handle: Direct rotary handle
b direct rotary handle
b extended rotary handle. Standard handle
There are two models: Degree of protection IP40, IK07.
b standard with a black handle The direct rotary handle maintains:
b red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control. bb visibility of and access to trip-unit settings
bb suitability for isolation
bb indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped
bb access to the "push to trip" button.
Device locking
PB104936.eps
The rotary handle facilitates circuit breaker locking.

bb Padlocking:
vv standard situation, in the OFF position, using 1 to 3 padlocks, shackle diameter 5
to 8 mm, not supplied
vv with a simple modification, in the ON and OFF positions. Locking in the ON
position does not prevent free circuit breaker tripping if a fault occurs. In this case,
the handle remains the ON position after the circuit breaker tripping. Unlocking is
required to go to the tripped then the OFF position.
bb Keylock (and padlock)
It is possible to install a Ronis or Profalux keylock (optional) on the base of the
handle to obtain the same functions as with a padlock.
Early-make or early-break contacts (optional)
Compact NSX DC with a rotary handle. Early-make and/or early-break contacts may be used with the rotary handle. It is thus
possible to:
PB103607-50.eps
bb supply an MN undervoltage release before the circuit breaker closes

bb open the contactor control circuit before the circuit breaker opens.
MCC switchboard control
Control of an MCC switchboard is achieved by adding a kit to the standard handle. In
addition to the standard functions, the kit offers the characteristics listed below.
Higher degree of protection IP
Degree of protection IP43, IK07.
The IP is increased by a built-in gasket.
Door locking depending on device position
bb The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or in the tripped position.
For exceptional situations, door locking can be temporarily disabled with a tool to
open the door when the circuit breaker is closed. This operation is not possible if the
handle is locked by a padlock.
bb Circuit breaker closing is disabled if the door is open. This function can be
Compact NSX DC with an MCC rotary handle. deactivated.
Machine-tool control in compliance with CNOMO
PB103608-50.eps
Control of a machine-tool is achieved by adding a kit to the standard handle. In

addition to the standard functions, the kit offers the characteristics listed below.
Enhanced waterproofness and mechanical protection
bb Degree of protection IP54, IK08.
bb Compliance with CNOMO E03.81.501N.
Compact NSX DC with a CNOMO machine-tool rotary handle.
A-40
Rotary handles
For Compact NSX DC
Extended rotary handle

PB104939.eps
Degree of protection IP55, IK08.

The extended rotary handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at
the back of switchboards, from the switchboard front.
It maintains:
bb visibility of and access to trip-unit settings
bb suitability for isolation
bb indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped.
Mechanical door locking when device closed
A standard feature of the extended rotary handle is a locking function, built into the
shaft, that disables door opening when the circuit breaker is in the ON or tripped
positions.
Door locking can be temporarily disabled with a tool to open the door without
opening the circuit breaker. This operation is not possible if the handle is locked by a
Compact NSX DC with an extended rotary handle installed at padlock.
the back of a switchboard, with the keylock option and key. Voluntary disabling of mechanical door locking
A modification to the handle, that can be carried out on site, completely disables door
locking, including when a padlock is installed on the handle. The modification is
PB104940.eps
reversible.
When a number of extended rotary handles are installed on a door, this disabling
function is the means to ensure door locking by a single device.
Device and door padlocking
Padlocking locks the circuit breaker handle and disables door opening:
bb standard situation, in the OFF position, using 1 to 3 padlocks, shackle diameter 5
to 8 mm, not supplied
bb with a simple modification, in the ON and OFF positions. Locking in the ON
position does not prevent free circuit breaker tripping if a fault occurs.
In this case, the handle remains in the ON position after the circuit breaker tripping.
Unlocking is required to go to the tripped then the OFF position.
If the door controls were modified to voluntarily disable door locking, padlocking
does not lock the door, but does disable handle operation of the device.
Device locking using a keylock inside the switchboard
It is possible to install a Ronis or Profalux keylock (optional) on the base of the rotary
handle to lock the device in the OFF position or in either the ON or OFF positions.
Accessory for device operation with the door open
When the device is equipped with an extended rotary handle, a control accessory
mounted on the shaft makes it possible to operate the device with the door open.
bb The device can be padlocked in the OFF position.
bb The accessory complies with UL508.
Early-make or early-break contacts (optional)
The extended rotary handle offers the same possibilities with early-make and/or
early-break contacts as the standard rotary handle.
Parts of the extended rotary handles
bb A unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws).
bb An assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the
same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally.
bb An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max distance
between the back of circuit breaker and door is:
vv 185600 mm for Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
vv 209600 mm for Compact NSX400/630/1200 DC.
For withdrawable devices, the extended rotary handle is also available with a
telescopic shaft to compensate for device disconnection. In this case, the min/max
distances are:
vv 248600 mm for Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
vv 272...600 mm for Compact NSX400/630/1200 DC.
Manual source-changeover systems

PB104937.eps
An additional accessory interlocks two devices with rotary handles to create a

source-changeover system. Closing of one device is possible only if the second is
open.
This function is compatible with direct or extended rotary handles.
Up to three padlocks can be used to lock in the OFF or ON position.
A-41
and characteristics
accessories
Motor mechanism
For Compact NSX DC
When equipped with a motor mechanism module, Compact NSX DC circuit
PB113341.eps
breakers feature very high mechanical endurance as well as easy and sure
operation:
bb all circuit breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible,
including trip-unit settings and indications
bb suitability for isolation is maintained and padlocking remains possible
bb double insulation of the front face.
A specific motor mechanism is required for operation via the communication
function (1). This communicating motor mechanism must be connected to the
BSCM module to receive the opening and closing orders. Operation is identical to
that of a standard motor mechanism.
Compact NSX250 DC with motor mechanism.
Applications
bb Local motor-driven operation, centralised operation, automatic distribution control.
bb Normal/standby source changeover or switching to a replacement source to
ensure availability or optimise energy costs.
bb Load shedding and reconnection.
bb Synchrocoupling.
Operation
The type of operation is selected using the manual/auto mode selection switch (7).
A transparent, lead-seal cover controls access to the switch.
Automatic
When the switch is in the "auto" position, the ON/OFF (I/O) buttons and the charging
lever on the mechanism are locked.
bb Circuit breaker ON and OFF controlled by two impulse-type or maintained signals.
1 2 3
DB416307.eps
bb Automatic spring charging following voluntary tripping (by MN or MX), with

standard wiring.
bb Mandatory manual reset following tripping due to an electrical fault.
Manual
When the switch is in the "manual" position, the ON/OFF (I/O) buttons may be used.
0OFF discharged
A microswitch linked to the manual position can remote the information.
4 bb Circuit breaker ON and OFF controlled by 2 pushbuttons I/O.
bb Recharging of stored-energy system by pumping the lever 8 times.
bb Padlocking in OFF position.

All installation (fixed, plug-in/withdrawable) and connection possibilities are
OFF ON
maintained.
Motor mechanism module connections are made behind its front cover to integrated
terminals, for cables up to 2.5 mm.
8 7 6 5 Optional accessories
bb Keylock for locking in OFF position.
1 Position indicator bb Operations counter for the Compact NSX400/630 DC, indicating the number
(positive contact indication) of ON/OFF cycles. Must be installed on the front of the motor mechanism module.
2 Spring status indicator (charged, discharged)
3 Manual spring-charging lever Characteristics
4 Keylock device (optional)
Locking device (OFF position), using 1 to 3 padlocks, Motor mechanism MT100 to MT630
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm, not supplied Response time (ms) opening < 600
5 I (ON) pushbutton closing < 80
6 O (OFF) pushbutton Operating frequency cycles/minute max. 4
7 Manual/auto mode selection switch. The position of this Control voltage (V) DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 110/130 - 250
switch can be indicated remotely. AC 50/60 Hz 48 (50 Hz) - 110/130 -
8 Operation counter (Compact NSX400/630 DC). 220/240 - 380/440
Consumption (1) DC (W) opening y 500
closing y 500
AC (VA) opening y 500
closing y 500
(1) For NSX100 to 250 DC, the inrush current is 2 In for 10 ms.
Electrical endurance
Circuit breaker + motor
DB417749.eps
10 mechanism module, in
thousands of operations
(IEC 60947 2), at 440 V.
5 NSX100/160/250 DC
1 NSX400/630/1200 DC
(1) NSX100-250 DC only. 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 I/In
A-42
Remote tripping
For Compact NSX DC
MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker. They serve primarily
044313_20_SE.eps
for remote, emergency-off commands.

It is advised to test the system every six months.
The MN release opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to a value
below 35 % of its rated voltage Un.
Undervoltage tripping, combined with an emergency-off button, provides fail-safe
MX or MN voltage release. tripping. The MN release is continuously supplied, i.e. if supply is interrupted:
bb either voluntarily, by the emergency-off button,
Failsafe opening Possible opening bb or accidentally, through loss of power or faulty wiring,
DB115605.eps
the release provokes opening of the circuit breaker.

0
0.35 0.7 1.1 Un Opening conditions
Opening conditions of the MN release. Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard
IEC 60947-2.
Failsafe closing bb Automatic opening of the circuit breaker is ensured when the continuous voltage
DB115606.eps
supply to the release U y 0.35 x Un.

0
0.85 1.1 Un bb If the supply voltage is between 0.35 and 0.7 Un, opening is possible, but not
Closing conditions of the MN release. guaranteed. Above 0.7 Un, opening does not take place.
Closing conditions
If there is no supply to the MN release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker,
either manually or electrically. Closing is ensured when the voltage supply to the
release U u 0.85 x Un. Below this threshold, closing is not guaranteed.
Characteristics
PB104916.eps
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz: 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/240

50 Hz: 380/415 60 Hz: 208/277
V DC 12 - 24 - 30 - 48 - 60 - 125 -250
Operating threshold Opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
Closing 0.85 Un
Operating range 0.85 to 1.1 Un
MN voltage release. Consumption (VA or W) Pick-up: 10 - Hold: 5
Response time (ms) 50
Time-delay unit for an MN release

DB413345.eps
Delayed A time delay unit for the MN release eliminates the risk of nuisance tripping due to a
trip order transient voltage dip lasting y 200 ms. For shorter micro-outages, a system of
capacitors provides temporary supply to the MN at U > 0.7 to ensure non tripping.
DB115631.eps
10 12 The correspondence between MN releases and time-delay units is shown below.

Time-delay
unit Power supply Corresponding MN release
Unit with fixed delay 200 ms
3 6
Instantaneous 48 V AC 48 V DC
trip order 220 / 240 V AC 250 V DC
Unit with adjustable delay y 200 ms
D2 48 - 60 V AC/DC 48 V DC
100 - 130 V AC/DC 125 V DC
MN 220 - 250 V AC/DC 250 V DC
D1 MX shunt release
The MX release opens the circuit breaker via an impulse-type (u 20 ms) or
MN release with a time-delay Wiring diagram for maintained order.
unit. emergency-off function with Opening conditions
MN + time-delay unit. When the MX release is supplied, it automatically opens the circuit breaker. Opening
is ensured for a voltage U u 0.7 x Un.
Possible opening Failsafe opening Characteristics
DB115608.eps
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz: 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/240

0 50 Hz: 380/415 60 Hz: 208/277
0.7 1.1 Un
V DC 12 - 24 - 30 - 48 - 60 - 125 -250
Opening conditions of the MX release. Operating range 0.7 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) Pick-up: 10
Response time (ms) 50
Circuit breaker control by MN or MX

When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be reset
before it can be reclosed.
MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.
In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary, is
not possible.
Note: circuit breaker opening using an MN or MX release must
be reserved for safety functions. This type of tripping increases Connection using wires up to 1.5 mm to integrated terminal blocks.
wear on the opening mechanism. Repeated use reduces the
mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker by 50 %.
A-43
and characteristics
accessories
Locks
For Compact NSX DC
Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2. Padlocking
DB111364.eps
DB111365.eps
systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters ranging from 5 to
8 mm (padlocks not supplied). Certain locking systems require an additional
accessory.
Control device Function Means Required accessories

Toggle Lock in OFF position Padlock Removable device
Lock in OFF or ON Padlock Fixed device
position
Direct rotary Standard Lock in Padlock -
Toggle locking using padlocks and an accessory: handle b OFF position Keylock Locking device + keylock
Removable device Fixed device attached to the b OFF or ON position (1)
case (3)
MCC Lock in Padlock -
b OFF position
DB111363.eps
b OFF or ON position (1)
CNOMO Lock in Padlock -

b OFF position
Extended rotary handle Lock in Padlock -
b OFF position
with door opening
prevented (2)
Lock in OFF position Padlock UL508 control accessory
Rotary-handle locking using
a keylock. b OFF or ON position (1) Keylock Locking device + keylock
inside the switchboard
Motor Lock in OFF position Padlock -
mechanism remote operation Keylock Locking device + keylock
disabled
Withdrawable circuit Lock in Padlock -

breaker b disconnected position
Keylock Locking device + keylock
b connected position Keylock Locking device + keylock
(1) Following a simple modification of the mechanism.
(2) Unless door locking has been voluntarily disabled.
(3) Only for 3-4P.
DB111358.eps
DB111359.eps
Rotary-handle locking using a padlock or a keylock.

DB125897.eps
DB111360.eps
5...8
u auto u auto
man man
Motor mechanism locking using a padlock or a keylock.

DB111362.eps
DB111361.eps
Chassis locking in the connected position.
A-44
Sealing accessories
For Compact NSX DC
Outgoing-circuit identification
DB115224.eps
Compact NSX100 to 630 DC can be equipped with label holders supplied in sets of
ten (cat. no. LV429226).
They are compatible with escutcheons.
Identification accessories. Sealing accessories

Sealing accessories are available. Each bag of accessories contains all the parts
required for the types of sealing indicated below.
DB115033.eps
A bag contains:
bb 6 sealing accessories
bb 6 lead seals
bb 0.5 m of wire
bb 2 screws.
Sealing accessories.
Types of seals and corresponding functions

Toggle control
DB112300.eps
DB112301.eps
DB112303.eps
Rotary handle
DB112302.eps
DB112306.eps
DB403120.eps
Motor mechanism
DB112304.eps
DB112305.eps
DB112307.eps
DB125896.eps
5...8
5...8
u auto
man
u auto
man
auto
5...8
uto
Types of seals Front-cover fixing screw Trip-unit transparent Motor mechanism Terminal-shield fixing
cover transparent cover screw
Protected operations bb front removal bb access to manual/auto bb access to power
bb access to auxiliaries bb modification of settings mode selection switch: connections (protection
bb trip-unit removal. bb access to test connector. depending on its position, against direct contact).
manual (1) or automatic
operation is not possible.
(1) In this case, local
operation is not possible.
A-45
and characteristics
accessories
Escutcheons and protection collars
For Compact NSX DC
Escutcheons are an optional feature mounted on the IP30 or IP40 escutcheons for fixed devices
switchboard door. They increase the degree of
protection to IP40, IK07. Protection collars maintain the IP30
degree of protection, whatever the position of the The three types are glued to the cut-out in the front door of the switchboard:
device (connected, disconnected). bb escutcheon for all control types (toggle, rotary handle or motor mechanism):
vv without access to the trip unit
vv with access to the trip unit.
IP40
PB104942.eps
The four types, with a gasket, are screwed to the door cut-out:
bb three escutcheons identical to the previous, but IP40
bb a wide model for Vigi and ammeter modules that can be combined with the above.
DB112290.eps
IP30 escutcheon.
DB402617.eps
PB104938.eps
Escutcheon for toggle without and with access to the trip unit.
IP30 escutcheon with access to the trip unit.
A-46
Escutcheons and protection collars
For Compact NSX DC
IP40 escutcheons for withdrawable devices

IP40 for withdrawable devices
The two types, with a gasket, are screwed to the door cut-out:
bb for rotary handle or motor mechanism: standard IP40 escutcheon
bb for toggle with extension: standard escutcheon + collar for withdrawal.
PB103777-36.eps
DB112294.eps
DB112295.eps
DB112296.eps
5...8
5
5...8
...8
Escutcheon with collar for toggle.
Standard escutcheon with Standard escutcheon for Standard escutcheon with

rotary handle. motor mechanism. collar for withdrawal, for
toggle.
PB103775-40.eps
IP43 toggle cover

Available only for devices with toggles. Fits over toggle and front cover of the device.
bb Mounted on the front of the circuit breaker.
bb Degree of protection IP43, IK07.
DB112218.eps
Toggle cover.
PB103820_35.eps
Toggle cover.
Retrofit front covers

These replacement front covers make it possible to install NSX DC devices in
existing switchboards containing NSX devices by installing the NSX-type retrofit
covers on the NSX DC devices.
bb NSX100 to 250 DC cover.
bb NSX400/630 DC cover.
NSX retrofit front cover.
A-47
andcharacteristics Compact NSX80 TM DC PV
to NSX500 TM DC PV
Compact NSX DC PV circuit breaker

PB110837.eps
Number of poles
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 40 C heatsink standard-IP4X
Altitude m 2000
voltage (kV)
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (kA rms) DC 1000 V (4P series)
Compact NSX200 TM DC PV. (L/R 2 ms)
PB110846.eps
Selectivity category (Utilisation category)

Pollution degree
Durability
Protection
Overload/short-circuit protection thermal magnetic
Connection and insulation
accessories.
motor mechanism
Connections fixed front connection
plug-in front connection
(on base) rear connection
withdrawable front connection
(on chassis) rear connection
Installation
escutcheons
Din rail adapter
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D (w/o series connection) 4P
Weight (kg) fixed front connection 4P
(1) Double earth fault:
PV systems are either insulated from the earth or one pole is earthed through an overcurrent protection. In both set-ups,
therefore, there can be a ground fault in which current leaks to the ground. If this fault is not cleared, it may spread to the healthy
pole and give rise to a hazardous situation where fire could break out. Even though double insulation makes such an eventuality
unlikely, it deserves full attention.
For the two following reasons the double fault situation shall be absolutely avoided: insulation monitoring devices or overcurrent
protection in earthed system shall detect first fault and staff shall look after the first fault and clear it with no delay.
bb The fault level could be low (e.g. two insulation faults or a low short-circuit capability of the generator in weak sunlight) and
below the tripping value of overcurrent protection (circuit breaker or fuses). However, a DC arc fault does not extinguish itself,
even when the current is low. It could be a serious hazard, particularly for PV modules on buildings.
bb Circuit breakers and switches used in PV systems are designed to break the rated current or fault current with all poles at
open-circuit maximum voltage (UOC MAX). To break the current when UOC MAX is equal to 1000 V, four poles in series (two poles in
series for each polarity) are required. In double earth fault situations, the circuit breaker or switches must break the current at
full voltage with only two poles in series. Such switchgear is not designed for that purpose and could sustain irremediable
damage if used to break the current in a double ground fault situation.
The ideal solution is to prevent double ground faults arising. Insulation monitoring devices or overcurrent protection in grounded
systems detect the first fault. However, although the insulation fault monitoring system usually stops the inverter, the fault is still
present. Staff must locate and clear it without delay. In large generators with sub-arrays protected by circuit breakers, it is highly
advisable to disconnect each array when that first fault has been detected but not cleared within the next few hours.
A-48
NSX80 TM NSX125 TM NSX160 TM NSX200 TM NSX250 TM NSX320 TM NSX400 TM NSX500 TM
DC PV DC PV DC PV DC PV DC PV DC PV DC PV DC PV
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
80 125 160 200 250 320 400 500
b b b b b b b b
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
10 (1) 10 (1) 10 (1) 10 (1) 10 (1) 10 (1) 10 (1) 10 (1)
50 % 50 % 50 % 50 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %

b b b b b b b b
A A A A A A A A
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
10000 10000 10000 10000 5000 5000 5000 5000

1500 1500 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - -
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b - - - -
140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 225 x 185 x 110 225 x 185 x 110 225 x 185 x 110 225 x 185 x 110
2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1
A-49
andcharacteristics
characteristics
Compact NSX100 NA DC PV
to NSX500 NA DC PV
Compact NSX DC PV switch-disconnector
PB110838.eps
Number of poles
Altitude m 2000
voltage (kV)
Rated short circuit withstand Icw/Icm t=1s
current (kA rms),
Rated conditionnal short-circuit Iq kA
current with back-up fuse A gPV
Compact NSX200 NA DC PV. Rated conditionnal short-circuit Iq with circuit breaker kA with MCCB
current
PB110847.eps

Pollution degree
Durability
motor mechanism
plug-in (on base) front connection
Compact NSX200 NA DC PV. rear connection
withdrawable (on chassis) front connection
rear connection
Installation
escutcheons
Din rail adapter
series for each polarity) are required. In double earth fault situations, the circuit breaker or switches must break the current at full
voltage with only two poles in series. Such switchgear is not designed for that purpose and could sustain irremediable damage if
used to break the current in a double ground fault situation.
A-50
NSX100 NA DC PV NSX160 NA DC PV NSX200 NA DC PV NSX400 NA DC PV NSX500 NA DC PV
4 4 4 4 4
100 160 200 400 500

heatsink - IP4X heatsink - IP4X heatsink - IP4X heatsink - IP3X heatsink - IP3X
b b b b b
1000 (1) 1000 (1) 1000 (1) 1000 (1) 1000 (1)
8 8 8 8 8
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
2.5 2.5 2.5 6 6
10 10 10 10 10
100 160 200 400 500
10 10 10 - -
NSX125 TM DC PV NSX160-200 TM DC PV NSX200 TM DC PV
DC22-A DC22-A DC22-A DC22-A DC22-A
b b b b b
3 3 3 3 3
10000 10000 10000 5000 5000

1500 1000 1000 1000 1000
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b - -
140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 110 185 x 255 x 110
2.8 2.8 2.8 8.1 8.1
A-51
andcharacteristics
characteristics
Compact NSX630b NA DC PV
to NSX1600 NA DC PV
Compact NSX DC PV switch-disconnector
PB112180_53.eps
Number of poles
Altitude m 2000
voltage (kV)
Compact NSX1600 NA DC PV. Rated short circuit withstand Icw/Icm t=1s
current (kA rms)
Rated conditionnal short-circuit Iq kA
current with back-up fuse A gPV
Rated conditionnal short-circuit Iq with circuit breaker
current
Pollution degree
Durability

Control manual
motor mechanism
rear connection

Installation
Accessories terminal extensions
escutcheons
series for each polarity) are required. In double earth fault situations, the circuit breaker or switches must break the current at full
voltage with only two poles in series. Such switchgear is not designed for that purpose and could sustain irremediable damage if
used to break the current in a double ground fault situation.
A-52
NSX630b NA DC PV NSX800b NA DC PV NSX1000 NA DC PV NSX1250 NA DC PV NSX1600 NA DC PV
4 4 4 4 4
630 800 1000 1250 1500

heatsink - IP2X heatsink - IP2X heatsink - IP2X heatsink - IP2X heatsink - IP0
b b b b b
1000 (1) 1000 (1) 1000 (1) 1000 (1) 1000 (1)
8 8 8 8 8
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
20 20 20 20 20
10 10 10 10 10
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
10 10 10 10 10
DC22-A DC22-A DC22-A DC22-B DC22-B

b b b b b
3 3 3 3 3
10000 10000 10000 10000 10000

1000 500 500 100 100
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
b b b b b
280 x 327 x 182 280 x 327 x 182 280 x 327x 182 280 x 327 x 182 280 x 327 x 182
18 18 18 18 18
A-53
Functions
and characteristics
Overview of Compact NSX80 TM
to NSX500 TM DC PV circuit breakers
DB417656.eps
Terminal shields
Communication (1)
(2)
(2)
NSX cord BSCM module

Heatsink
(2)
Modbus interface
Short terminal shield
Cable connectors
Terminal
Terminal shields Rear connectors
extensions

(2) Compact NSX100-250 only.
A-54
Overview of Compact NSX100 NA
to NSX500 NA DC PV switch-disconnectors
DB418160.eps
Terminal shields
Interphase barriers (2) Communication (1)

(1)
(1)
NSX cord BSCM module
(1)
Heatsink
I I
n m
Modbus interface
Interphase barriers (2) Cable connectors
Terminal shields Terminal

Short terminal shield Rear connectors extensions

(2) Only for switches.
A-55
and characteristics Overview of Compact NSX630b NA
to NSX1600 NA DC PV
DB418161.eps
Phase
barriers
Sealable terminal
shield
Heatsink
Auxiliary contact
Escutcheon
I ON
OOFF
pus h
pus h
Voltage release
ed
harg
disc
O OFF
53
012
Manual control with Communications

front connection module
Rear connectors Connection kit

for connectors
Vertical connection Terminal extension for

adapter cables with lugs
Phase barriers
Phase
barriers
Sealable terminal
shield
A-56
Functions Compact INS DC PV
and characteristics
No matter the size or scale of the project, Schneider Electric, has a photovoltaic
DB417877.eps
solution to fit your needs. Fast ROI, high efficiency its all a part of our offer as the
INS PV-1 world leader in energy management.
600V
Ith 40A 60 The INS PV-1 is a direct current switch disconnector dedicated to array isolation and
600V DC Max 4PS control with Voc until 600 V DC.
Ue (V) Ie
DC21B 600 10A
DC21B 500 25A
DC21B 400 32A
PB111408_42.eps
DC21B 300 40A
IEC / EN 60947-3 K EMA

EUR
Compact INS PV-1.
Compact INS80 PV
Number of poles 4 serial pole
Conventional thermal current (A) lth
Conventional thermal current in enclosure (A) lthe
Rated insulation level (DC V) Ui
Impulse-withstand voltage (kV) Uimp
Rated operational voltage (DC V) Ue
Rated operational voltage DC21B (V)
Rated operational current (A) le Electrical DC
DC21B 600
DC21B 500
DC21B 400
DC21B 300
Rated duties Uninterrupted duty -
Intermittent duty Class 120 - 60 %
Short-circuit making capacity (kA peak) lcm
Short-time withstand current (A rms) lcw
Suitability for isolation Yes
Durability (O-C cycles) Mechanical 20000
Electrical DC
600 V 1500
Positive contact indication Yes
Visible break -
Emergency-off switch disconnector Yes
Degree of pollution 3
A-57
Functions and characteristics Switch-disconnector selection
Compact INS40 to 160 DC
Compact INS switch-disconnectors

PB111402_30.eps
Number of poles
Electrical characteristics as defined by IEC 60947-1 / 60947-3 and EN 60947-1 / 60947-3
Conventional thermal current (A) Ith at 60 C
Conventional thermal current in enclosure Ithe at 60 C
Rated insulation level (V) Ui AC 50/60 Hz
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
Compact INS40 to 80 switch-disconnector.
DC
Rated operational voltage AC20 and DC20 (V) AC 50/60 Hz
PB111403_30.eps
Rated operational current (A) Ie Electrical DC

125 V (2P in series)
Rated duties Uninterrupted duty
Intermittent duty
Short-circuit making capacity (kA peak) Icm Min. (switch-disconnector alone)
Short-time withstand current (A rms) Icw 1s
Compact INS40 to 80 emergency-off switch-disconnector. 3s
20 s
30 s
PB111406_42.eps

Durability (O-C cycles) Mechanical
Electrical DC
250 V
Visible break
Emergency-off switch disconnector
Degree of pollution
Upstream protection
See the Complementary technical information in catalogue Compact INS/INV
LVPED213024EN.
Compact INS100 to 160 switch-disconnector.
PB111407_42.eps
Compact INS100 to 160 emergency-off switch-disconnector.
A-58
INS40 INS63 INS80 INS100 INS125 INS160
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
40 63 80 100 125 160

40 63 80 100 125 160
690 690 690 800 800 800
8 8 8 8 8 8
500 500 500 690 690 690
250 250 250 250 250 250
690 690 690 750 750 750
DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A
40 40 63 63 80 80 100 100 125 125 160 160
40 40 63 63 80 80 100 100 125 125 160 160
b b b b b b
Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 %
15 15 15 20 20 20
3000 3000 3000 5500 5500 5500
1730 1730 1730 3175 3175 3175
670 670 670 1230 1230 1230
550 550 550 1000 1000 1000
b b b b b b
20000 20000 20000 15000 15000 15000
DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A
1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500
b b b b b b
- - - - - -
b b b b b b
3 3 3 3 3 3
- - - - - -
A-59

Installation
Fixed, front connection
Fixed, rear connection
On symmetrical rails
On a backplate
Connection
By cables To bare cable connectors
By cables with lugs Directly to terminals
To spreaders
To vertical-connection adapters via cable-lug adapters
Flat-facing bars Directly to terminals
To spreaders
Edgewise bars To vertical-connection adapters
Indication and measurement auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts
Ammeter module
Control, locking and interlocking
Control Direct front rotary handle
Extended front rotary handle
Direct lateral rotary handle
Extended lateral rotary handle
Locking By keylock
By padlocks
Interlocking By keylock
Mechanical
Complete source-changeover assembly
Operating torque (Nm) (typical value for 3-4 poles with front handle)
Installation and connection accessories
Bare cable connectors
Rear connectors
Terminal extensions
Spreaders
One-piece spreader
Terminal shrouds
Terminal shields
Interphase-barrier
Front panel escutcheons
Coupling accessories
Tightening torque for electrical connections (Nm)
Dimensions and weights
Overall dimensions H x W x D (mm) 3 poles
4 poles
Approximate weight (kg) 3 poles
4 poles
Enclosure dimensions for Ithe
H x W x D (mm)
DB105413.eps
A-60
INS40 INS63 INS80 INS100 INS125 INS160
b b b b b b
- - - b b b
b b b - - -
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
- - - b b b
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
bb bb bb b b b
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
b b b b b b
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
- - - - - -
b b b b b b
- - - - - -
b b b b b b
- - - - - -
0.7 < Nm < 1.3 0.7 < Nm < 1.3 0.7 < Nm < 1.3 1.4 < Nm < 2 1.4 < Nm < 2 1.4 < Nm < 2
b b b b b b
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
- - - - - -
- - - - - -
5 5 5 8 8 8
85 x 90 x 62.5 85 x 90 x 62.5 85 x 90 x 62.5 100 x 135 x 62.5 100 x 135 x 62.5 100 x 135 x 62.5
85 x 90 x 62.5 85 x 90 x 62.5 85 x 90 x 62.5 100 x 135 x 62.5 100 x 135 x 62.5 100 x 135 x 62.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 0.8
0.6 0.6 0.6 0.9 0.9 0.9
190 x 115 x 55 190 x 115 x 55 190 x 115 x 55 260 x 160 x 55 260 x 160 x 55 260 x 160 x 55
A-61
Compact INS250-100 to 630 DC

PB111440_52.eps
Number of poles
DC
Compact INS250 switch-disconnector.
PB111441_47.eps

Intermittent duty
3s
20 s
30 s
Compact INS250 emergency-off switch-disconnector.
Electrical DC
250 V
PB111482_L49.eps

Visible break
Degree of pollution
Upstream protection
LVPED213024EN.
(2) 550 A (DC).

PB111483_L49.eps
A-62
INS250-100 INS250-160 INS250-200 INS250 INS320 INS400 INS500 INS630
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
100 160 200 250 320 400 500 630

100 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 (2)
800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750
DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC23B
100 100 160 160 200 200 250 250 320 320 400 400 500 500 550 550 630
100 100 160 160 200 200 250 250 320 320 400 400 500 500 550 550 630
b b b b b b b b
Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 %
30 30 30 30 50 50 50 50
8500 8500 8500 8500 20000 20000 20000 20000
4900 4900 4900 4900 11500 11500 11500 11500
2200 2200 2200 2200 4900 4900 4900 4900
1800 1800 1800 1800 4000 4000 4000 4000
b b b b b b b b
15000 15000 15000 15000 10000 10000 10000 10000
DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC23A DC23B DC23A DC23B DC23A DC23B DC23A DC23B
1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1000 - 1000 - 1000 - 1000 200
b b b b b b b b
- - - - - - - -
b b b b b b b b
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
- - - - - - - -
A-63

Installation
On a backplate
Connection
To spreaders
To spreaders
Auxiliary contacts
Ammeter module
Locking By keylock
By padlocks
Mechanical
Rear connectors
Terminal extensions
Spreaders
One-piece spreader
Terminal shrouds
Terminal shields
Interphase-barrier
4 poles
4 poles
H x W x D (mm)
DB105413_1.eps
A-64
INS250-100 INS250-160 INS250-200 INS250 INS320 INS400 INS500 INS630
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
- - - - - - - -
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
- - - - - - - -
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
- - - - b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b - - - -
b b b b - - - -
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
5 < Nm < 6.2 5 < Nm < 6.2 5 < Nm < 6.2 5 < Nm < 6.2 13.5 < Nm < 16.5 13.5 < Nm < 16.5 13.5 < Nm < 16.5 13.5 < Nm < 16.5
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b - - - -
- - - - - - - -
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
15 15 15 15 50 50 50 50
2 2 2 2 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6
2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 4.9 4.9 4.9 4.9
A-65
Compact INS630b to 2500 DC

PB111510_45.eps
Number of poles
DC
Intermittent duty
Short-time withstand current (kA rms) Icw 0.5 s
0.8 s
PB111511_45.eps
1s
3s
20 s
30 s
Electrical DC
125 V (2P)
250 V (4P)
Visible break
Degree of pollution
Upstream protection
See the Complementary technical information catalogue Compact INS/INV
LVPED213024EN.
PB111518_72.eps
(2) For vertical connection busbars only. For horizontal connection busbars, see derating charts
in Installation recommendations in catalogue Compact INS/INV LVPED213024EN.
A-66
INS630b INS800 INS1000 INS1250 INS1600 INS2000 INS2500
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
630 800 1000 1250 1600 (2) 2000 2500

630 800 1000 1250 1600 (2) 2000 2500
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
690 690 690 690 690 690 690
250 250 250 250 250 250 250
800 800 800 800 800 800 800
DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21B DC22B DC23B DC21B DC22B DC23B
630/2 630/2 630/2 800/2 800/2 800/2 1000/2 1000/2 1000/2 1250/2 1250/2 1250/2 1600/2 1600/2 1600/2 2000/2 2000/2 - 2500/2 2500/2 -
630/4 630/4 630/4 800/4 800/4 800/4 1000/4 1000/4 1000/4 1250/4 1250/4 1250/4 1600/4 1600/4 1600/4 2000/4 2000/4 - 2500/4 2500/4 -
b b b b b b b
Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 %
75 75 75 75 75 105 105
50 50 50 50 50 50 50
42 42 42 42 42 50 50
35 35 35 35 35 50 50
20 20 20 20 20 30 30
10 10 10 10 10 13 13
8 8 8 8 8 11 11
b b b b b b b
5000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23B DC21B DC22B DC23B DC21B DC22B DC23B
1000 1000 1000 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 100 100 - 100 100 -
1000 1000 1000 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 100 100 - 100 100 -
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
b b b b b - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
- - - - - - -
A-67

Installation
On a backplate
Connection
To spreaders
To spreaders
Auxiliary contacts
Ammeter module
Locking By keylock
By padlocks
Mechanical
Rear connectors
Terminal extensions
Spreaders
One-piece spreader
Terminal shrouds
Terminal shields
Interphase-barrier
Tightening torque for electrical
connections (Nm)
4 poles
4 poles
H x W x D (mm)
DB105413_2.eps
A-68
INS630b INS800 INS1000 INS1250 INS1600 INS2000 INS2500
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
- - - - - b b
- - - - - - -
b b b b b - -
b b b b b b b
b b b b b - -
b b b b b - -
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
30 30 30 30 30 60 60
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
50 50 50 50 50 50 50
300 x 340 x 146.5 300 x 340 x 146.5 300 x 340 x 146.5 300 x 340 x 146.5 300 x 340 x 146.5 440 x 347.5 x 227.5 440 x 347.5 x 227.5
300 x 410 x 146.5 300 x 410 x 146.5 300 x 410 x 146.5 300 x 410 x 146.5 300 x 410 x 146.5 440 x 462.5 x 227.5 440 x 462.5 x 227.5
14 14 14 14 14 35 35
18 18 18 18 18 45 45
- - - - - - -
A-69
Compact INV100 to 630 DC
Compact INV switch-disconnectors

PB111442_52.eps
Number of poles
Electrical characteristics as defined by IEC 60947-1 / 60947-3
and EN 60947-1 / 60947-3
DC
Compact INV250 switch-disconnector.
PB111443_47.eps

Intermittent duty
3s
20 s
Compact INV250 emergency-off switch-disconnector. 30 s
PB111484_L49.eps

Electrical DC
250 V
Visible break
Degree of pollution
Upstream protection
LVPED213024EN.
(2) 550 A (DC).

PB111485_L49.eps
Compact INV630 emergency-off switch-disconnector.
A-70
INV100 INV160 INV200 INV250 INV320 INV400 INV500 INV630
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
100 160 200 250 320 400 500 630

100 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 (2)
800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750
DC21A DC22A DC23B DC21A DC22A DC23B DC21A DC22A DC23B DC21A DC22A DC23B DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A/
DC23B
100 100 100 160 160 160 200 200 200 250 250 250 320 320 320 400 400 400 500 500 500 550 550 550/630
100 100 100 160 160 160 200 200 200 250 250 250 320 320 320 400 400 400 500 500 500 550 550 550/630
b b b b b b b b
Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 %
30 30 30 30 50 50 50 50
8500 8500 8500 8500 20000 20000 20000 20000
4900 4900 4900 4900 11500 11500 11500 11500
2200 2200 2200 2200 4900 4900 4900 4900
1800 1800 1800 1800 4000 4000 4000 4000
b b b b b b b b
15000 15000 15000 15000 10000 10000 10000 10000
DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A/
DC23B
1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000/200
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
- - - - - - - -
A-71

Installation
On a backplate
Connection
To spreaders
To spreaders
Auxiliary contacts
Ammeter module
Locking By keylock
By padlocks
Mechanical
Rear connectors
Terminal extensions
Spreaders
One-piece spreader
Terminal shrouds
Terminal shields
Interphase-barrier
4 poles
4 poles
H x W x D (mm)
DB105413_3.eps
A-72
INV100 INV160 INV200 INV250 INV320 INV400 INV500 INV630
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
- - - - - - - -
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
- - - - - - - -
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
- - - - b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b - - - -
b b b b - - - -
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
- - - - - - - -
5 < Nm < 6.2 5 < Nm < 6.2 5 < Nm < 6.2 5 < Nm < 6.2 13.5 < Nm < 16.5 13.5 < Nm < 16.5 13.5 < Nm < 16.5 13.5 < Nm < 16.5
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
- - - - - - - -
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b b
15 15 15 15 50 50 50 50
2 2 2 2 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6
2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 4.9 4.9 4.9 4.9
A-73
Compact INV630b to 2500 DC

PB111512_45.eps
Number of poles
Electrical characteristics as defined by IEC 60947-1 / 60947-3
and EN 60947-1 / 60947-3
DC
Compact INV1600 switch-disconnector. 250 V (4P in series)
Intermittent duty
Short-time withstand current (kA rms) Icw 0.5 s
PB111513_45.eps
0.8 s
1s
3s
20 s
30 s
Electrical DC
125 V (2P)
250 V (4P)
Visible break
Compact INV1600 emergency-off switch-disconnector. Degree of pollution
Upstream protection
LVPED213024EN.
PB111519_L62.eps

(2) For vertical connection busbars only. For horizontal connection busbars, see derating charts
in Installation recommendations in catalogue Compact INS/INV LVPED213024EN.
A-74
INV630b INV800 INV1000 INV1250 INV1600 INV2000 INV2500
3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
630 800 1000 1250 1600 (2) 2000 2500

630 800 1000 1250 1600 (2) 2000 2500
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
690 690 690 690 690 690 690
250 250 250 250 250 250 250
800 800 800 800 800 800 800
DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21B DC22B DC23B DC21B DC22B DC23B
630/2 630/2 630/2 800/2 800/2 800/2 1000/2 1000/2 1000/2 1250/2 1250/2 1250/2 1600/2 1600/2 1600/2 2000/2 2000/2 - 2500/2 2500/2 -
630/4 630/4 630/4 800/4 800/4 800/4 1000/4 1000/4 1000/4 1250/4 1250/4 1250/4 1600/4 1600/4 1600/4 2000/4 2000/4 - 2500/4 2500/4 -
b b b b b b b
Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 % Class 120 - 60 %
75 75 75 75 75 105 105
50 50 50 50 50 50 50
42 42 42 42 42 50 50
35 35 35 35 35 50 50
20 20 20 20 20 30 30
10 10 10 10 10 13 13
8 8 8 8 8 11 11
b b b b b b b
5000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23A DC21A DC22A DC23B DC21B DC22B DC23B DC21B DC22B DC23B
1000 1000 1000 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 100 100 - 100 100 -
1000 1000 1000 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 100 100 - 100 100 -
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
b b b b b - -
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
- - - - - - -
A-75
Compact INV630b to 2500 DC

Installation
On a backplate
Connection
To spreaders
To spreaders
Auxiliary contacts
Ammeter module
Locking By keylock
By padlocks
Mechanical
Rear connectors
Terminal extensions
Spreaders
One-piece spreader
Terminal shrouds
Terminal shields
Interphase-barrier
4 poles
4 poles
H x W x D (mm)
DB105413_4.eps
A-76
INV630b INV800 INV1000 INV1250 INV1600 INV2000 INV2500
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
- - - - - b b
- - - - - - -
b b b b b - -
b b b b b b b
b b b b b - -
b b b b b - -
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
30 30 30 30 30 60 60
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
b b b b b b b
- - - - - - -
50 50 50 50 50 50 50
300 x 340 x 146.5 300 x 340 x 146.5 300 x 340 x 146.5 300 x 340 x 146.5 300 x 340 x 146.5 440 x 347.5 x 227.5 440 x 347.5 x 227.5
300 x 410 x 146.5 300 x 410 x 146.5 300 x 410 x 146.5 300 x 410 x 146.5 300 x 410 x 146.5 440 x 462.5 x 227.5 440 x 462.5 x 227.5
14 14 14 14 14 35 35
18 18 18 18 18 45 45
- - - - - - -
A-77
Functions Communication
and characteristics
EnerlinX communication system
Products overview
Enerlin'X communication system provides access Ethernet has become the universal link between switchboards, computers and
to status, electrical values and devices control using communication devices inside the building. The large amount of information which
Ethernet and Modbus SL communication protocols. can be transferred makes the connection of Enerlin'X digital system to hosted web
services of Schneider Electric a reality. More advantages are offered to integrators
thanks to configuration web pages available remotely or on the local Ethernet network.
Modbus SL is the most widely used communication protocol in industrial networks.

It operates in master-slave mode. The devices (slaves) communicate one after
the other with a gateway (master).
G G
G G
H D
(1)
(2)
F
B
Ethernet
Modbus SL ULP is a fast communication link dedicated
ULP to circuit breaker monitoring and control.
(1) Only Micrologic 1.0 (no metering/advanced functions).
(2) No Micrologic available.
A-78
Enerlin'X communication devices and displays
Name Function Port Bin. Analog. Bin. Cial. Ref.
Input Input Output
(to device) (to server)
Com'X 200 Energy Server Modbus Ethernet cable 6 2 - EBX200

with Ethernet Master + WiFi
A (1)
Gateway function
FDM128 (2) Ethernet LCD - Ethernet - - - LV434128

colour touch screen
B
FDM121 (2) LCD display for ULP - - - - TRV00121

C circuit breaker
IFE Ethernet interface Modbus Ethernet - - - LV434011

interface + (3) & Gateway Master & ULP
D
gateway
IFE Ethernet interface ULP Ethernet - - - LV434010

interface for circuit breakers
Acti9 Ethernet interface Modbus Ethernet 14 2 7 A9XMEA08
E Smartlink
Ethernet
with Input/Output
functions &
Master
Gateway
Acti9 Modbus interface - Modbus Slave 22 - 11 A9XMSB11

F Smartlink
Modbus
with Input/Output
functions
IFM Modbus interface ULP Modbus Slave - - - TRV00210

for circuit breaker
G
I/O Input/Output ULP ULP 6 - 3 LV434063

application module
H for circuit breaker
(1) Gateway: transfers data from a network to another (ie.: Modbus to Ethernet).
(2) No metering/advanced function available.
(3) Interface: transfers data from an equipment to a network.(ie.: ULP to Modbus).
Commissioning / maintenance tools

Web pages embedded into ComX 200 and
Acti9 Smartlink Ethernet gateways
Access with a standard PC and common browser:
bb commissioning,
bb communication diagnosis,
bb functional tests
Electrical Asset Manager

Loaded into a standard PC Error free commissioning. Time saving, easier
management and maintenance thanks to the advanced services:
bb project management,
Plug and play commissioning tools give a real peace of mind bb configuration of controllers, gateways,
to panel builders as their panels can be functionally checked bb test of communication networks, diagnostic report
before delivery.
A-79
and characteristics IFE Ethernet interface
IFE interface, IFE interface + gateway description

PB112059-55.eps
Introduction
The IFE interface and IFE interface + gateway enable LV circuit breakers
as Masterpact NT/NW, Compact NSX or Powerpact to be connected to an Ethernet
network.
IFE interface: ref. LV434010

Provides an Ethernet access to a single LV circuit breaker.
Function
Interface - one circuit breaker is connected to the IFE interface via its ULP port.
IFE interface + gateway: ref. LV434011

Provides an Ethernet access to one or several LV circuit breakers.
Functions
bb Interface - one circuit breaker is connected to the IFE interface via its ULP port.
bb Gateway: several circuit breakers on a Modbus network are connected via
IFE interface, ref.: LV434010 the IFE interface + gateway master Modbus port.
IFE interface, IFE interface + gateway features

bb Dual 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port for simple daisy chain connection.
bb Device profile web service for discovery of the IFE interface, IFE interface +
DB416830.eps
gateway
on the LAN.
bb ULP compliant for localization of the IFE interface in the switchboard.
bb Ethernet interface for Compact, Masterpact and Powerpact circuit breakers.
bb Gateway for Modbus-SL connected devices (IFE interface + gateway only).
bb Embedded set-up web pages.
bb Embedded monitoring web pages.
bb Embedded control web pages.
bb Built-in e-mail alarm notification.
Mounting
The IFE interface, IFE interface + gateway are DIN rail mounting devices. A stacking
accessory enables the user to connect several IFMs (ULP to Modbus interfaces) to
an IFE interface + gateway without additional wiring.
24 V DC power supply
IFE interface + gateway, ref.: LV434011 The IFE interface, IFE interface + gateway must always be supplied with 24 V DC.
The IFMs stacked to an IFE interface + gateway are supplied by the IFE interface +
gateway, thus it is not necessary to supply them separately. It is recommended to
use an UL listed and recognized limited voltage/limited current or a class 2 power
supply with a 24 V DC, 3 A maximum.
DB406743.eps
IFE interface, IFE interface + gateway firmware update

The firmware can be updated using:
bb FTP
bb customer engineering tool.
Required circuit breaker communication modules
The connection to IFE interface or IFE interface + gateway requires a
communication module embedded into the circuit breaker:
bb Compact NSX: NSX cord and/or BSCM module
The insulated NSX cord is mandatory for system voltages greater than 480 V AC.
When the second ULP RJ45 connector is not used, it must be closed with an ULP
terminator (TRV00880).
Network communication interface
Characteristic Value
Type of interface module Modbus RTU, RS485 serial connection
Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet
Transmission Modbus RS485 Transfer rate: 9,600...19,200 Baud
Medium Double shielded twisted pair
Impedance 120
Ethernet Transfer rate : 10/100 Mbps
Medium STP, Cat5e, straight cable
Structure Type Modbus, Ethernet
Method Master/Slave
Device type Modbus Master
Ethernet Server
Turnaround time Modbus 10 ms
Ethernet 1 ms
Maximum length of cable Modbus 1000 m
Ethernet 100 m
Type of bus connector Modbus 4-pin connector
Ethernet RJ45 (Shielded)
A-80
General characteristics
DB417466.eps
Environmental characteristics
24VDC
Conforming to standards UL 508, UL 60950, IEC 60950, 60947-6-2
Certification cUIUs, GOST, FCC, CE
Ambient temperature -20 to +70 C (-4 to +158 F)
Relative humidity 585 %
ETH1 ETH2 Level of pollution Level 3
Flame resistance ULV0
Shock resistance 1000 m/s2
Resistance to sinusoidal vibrations -5 Hz < f < 8.4 Hz
A B Electrical characteristics
Resistance to electromagnetic discharge Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3
I J K Immunity to radiated fields 10 V/m
Immunity to surges Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-5
Consumption 120 mA at 24 V input
ETH1 ETH2
Physical characteristics
Dimensions 72 x 105 x 71 mm (2.83 x 4.13 x 2.79 in.)
IFE Mounting DIN rail
IFE-XX.YY.ZZ (factory set)
ETH1 LK/10-100/ACT
Weight 182.5 g (0.41 lb)
ETH2 LK/10-100/ACT
C Degree of protection of the installed IO bb On the front panel (wall mounted enclosure): IP4x
Module Status D bb Connectors: IP2x
Modbus-SL
Network Status
E bb Other parts: IP3x
T LV434011
Connections Screw type terminal blocks
F Technical characteristics - 24 V DC power supply
Power supply type Regulated switch type
R
Rated power 72 W
Input voltage 100120 V AC for single phase
200500 V AC phase-to-phase
PFC filter With IEC 61000-3-2
H G Output voltage 24 V DC
Power supply out current 3A
Note: it is recommended to use an UL listed/UL listed recognized limited voltage/Limited current
or a class 2 power supply with a 24 V DC, 3 A maximum.
IFE web page description

Monitoring web page
Real time data 67 bb
Device logging bb
Control web page
Single device control bb
Diagnostics web page
Statistics bb
Device information bb
L
IMU information bb
A Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 communication port. Read device registers bb
B 24 V DC power supply terminal block. Communication check bb
C Ethernet communication LEDs: Maitenance web page
bb yellow: 10 Mb Maintenance log bb
bb green: 100 Mb. Maintenance counters bb
D Module status LED:
Setup web page
bb steady off: no power
bb steady green: device operational Device localization/name bb
bb steady red: major fault Ethernet configuration (dual port) bb
bb flashing green: standby IP configuration bb
bb flashing red: minor fault
bb flashing green/red: self-test. Modbus TCP/IP filtering bb
Serial port bb
E Network status LED:
bb steady off: not power/no valid IP address Date and time bb
bb steady green: connected, valid IP address E-mail server configuration bb
bb steady orange: default IP address Alarms to be e-mailed bb
bb steady red: duplicated IP address
bb flashing green/red: Self-test. Device list bb
F Sealable transparent cover. Device logging bb
G ULP status LED. Device log export bb
H Test button (accessible closed cover). SNMP parameters bb
I Locking pad. Documentation links bb
J Modbus traffic status LED (LV434011 only). Preferences bb
K Device name label. Advanced services control bb
L ULP ports. User accounts bb
Web page access bb
A-81
and characteristics IFM Modbus communication interface
Function
PB103798-50.eps
A IFM - Modbus communication interface - is required for connection of a Masterpact

or Compact to a Modbus network as long as this circuit breaker is provided with
a ULP (Universal Logic Plug) port. The port is available on respectively a BCM ULP
or BSCM embedded module.
The IFM is defined as an IMU (Intelligent Modular Unit) in the ULP connection System
documentation.
Once connected, the circuit breaker is considered as a slave by the Modbus master.
Its electrical values, alarm status, open/close signals car be monitored or controlled
by a Programmable Logic Controller or any other system.
Characteristics
ULP port
2 RJ45 sockets, internal parallel wiring.
bb Connection of a single circuit breaker (eventually via its I/O application module).
IFM Modbus communication interface.
Ref.: TRV00210.
bb A ULP line terminator or an FDM121 display unit must be connected to the second
RJ45 ULP socket.
The RJ45 sockets deliver a 24 VDC supply fed from the Modbus socket.
DB417690.eps
Built-in test function, for checking the correct connection to the circuit breaker
A and FDM121 display unit.
Modbus slave port
bb Top socket for screw-clamp connector, providing terminals for:
vv 24 VDC input supply (0V, +24V)
vv Modbus line (D1, D2, Gnd).
bb Lateral socket, for Din-rail stackable connector.
Both top and lateral sockets are internally parallel wired.
6
5
B
4 7
3 8
2
1 0
5
9
6
bb Multiple IFM can be stacked, thus sharing a common power supply and Modbus
line without individual wiring.
4 7
3 8
2 9
C bb On the front face:

1 0
D vv Modbus address setting (1 to 99): 2 coded rotary switches

vv Modbus locking pad: enables or disables the circuit breaker remote control
and modification of IFM parameters.
Test E bb Self adjusting communication format (Baud rate, parity).
F
Technical characteristics
IFM Modbus communication interface
Dimensions 18 x 72 x 96 mm
I H G
Maximum number of stacked IFM 12
A M
odbus screw clamp E ULP activity LED. Degree of protection Part projecting beyond IP4x
connector. of the installed the escutcheon
F Test button.
module Other module parts IP3x
B M
odbus address
G Mechanical lock.
switches. Connectors IP2x
H ULP RJ45 connectors. Operating temperature -25...+70 C
C Modbus traffic LED.
I Stacking accessory Power supply voltage 24 V DC -20 %/+10 % (19.2...26.4 V DC)
D Modbus locking pad.
connection. Consumption Typical 21 mA/24 V DC at 20 C
Maximum 30 mA/19.2 V DC at 60 C
Certification
CE IEC/EN 60947-1
UL UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment
CSA No. 142-M1987 - Process Control
Equipment
bb CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 0-M91 -
General requirements - Canadian Electrical
Code Part
bb CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 14-05 -
Industrial Control Equipment
Simplified IFM installation

Staking IFM Stacking an IFE interface + gateway with IFM
Stacking accessories Up to 12 stacked IFM
A-82
COM option in Compact and Masterpact
All the Masterpact devices can be fitted with the For fixed and Drawout devices, the common communication option is made
communication function thanks to the COM option. up of:
Masterpact uses the Ethernet or Modbus bb a BCM ULP module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and supplied with
communications protocol for full compatibility with the its set of sensors (OF, SDE, PF and CH micro switches) its kit for connection to XF
supervision management systems. and MX1 communicating voltage releases and its COM terminal block (inputs E1 to
Eco COM is limited to the transmission of metering E6). This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits
data. It is not used to communicate status and controls. information on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between
the control unit and the communication module.
Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.
bb IFM, this module required for connection to the network, contains the Modbus
address (1 to 99) declared by the user via the two dials in front. It automatically
adapts (baud rate, parity) to the Modbus network in which it is installed.
Or
bb IFE, the Ethernet interface for LV circuit breaker enables an intelligent modular
unit (IMU), for example a Masterpact NT/NW or Compact NSX circuit breaker to be
connected to an Ethernet network. Each circuit breaker has its own IFE and a
corresponding IP address.
PB106674-20.eps
For drawout device the Cradle Management option must be added:

I/O (Input/Output) application module for LV breaker, the I/O application module is
delivered with withdrawable devices ordered with the COM option, for cradle
management. It must be installed on a DIN rail near the device. It must be connected
to the ULP system and to the position contacts (CD, CT, CE) that transmit the
position of the device in the cradle.
For communicating remote control, option with XF and MX1 communicating
voltage releases must be added:
BCM ULP. The XF and MX1 communicating voltage releases are equipped for connection to
the "device" communication module.
The remote-tripping function (MX2 or MN) are independent of the communication
option. They are not equipped for connection to the "device" communication module.
BSCM module
PB103786.eps
Functions
The optional BSCM Breaker Status & Control Module is used to acquire device
status indications and control the communicating remote-control function.
It includes a memory used to manage the maintenance indicators.
Status indications
Indication of device status:
BSCM module. O/F, SD and SDE.
Maintenance indicators
The BSCM module manages the following indicators:
bb mechanical operation counter
bb electrical operation counter
bb history of status indications.
It is possible to assign an alarm to the operation counters.
Controls
The module can be used to carry out communicating remote control operations:
(open, close and reset) in different modes (manual, auto).
Mounting
The BSCM module can be installed on all CompactNSX circuit breakers and
switch-disconnectors. It simply clips into the auxiliary contact slots. It occupies the
slots of one O/F contact and one SDE contact. The BSCM is supplied with 24 V DC
power automatically via the NSX cord when the communication system is installed.
A-83
and characteristics I/O application module
Description
DB416829.eps
The I/O input/output application module for LV breaker is part of an ULP system with
built-in functionalities and applications to enhance the application needs. The ULP
system architecture can be built without any restrictions using the wide range of
circuit breakers.
The I/O application is compliant with the ULP system specifications.
Two I/O application module can be connected in the same ULP network.
The ranges of LV circuit breakers enhanced by the I/O are:

bb Masterpact NW
bb Masterpact NT
bb Compact NS1600b-3200
bb Compact NS630b-1600
bb Compact NSX100-630 A.
I/O input/output interface for LV breaker resources

The I/O application module ressources are:
bb 6 digital inputs that are self powered for either NO and NC dry contact or pulse
counter
bb 3 digital outputs that are bistable relay (5 A maximum)
bb 1 analog input for Pt100 temperature sensor.
Pre-defined applications
Pre-defined application adds new functions to the IMU in a simple way:
bb selection by the application rotary switch on the I/O, defining the application with
pre-defined input/output assignment and wiring diagram.
bb no additional setting with the customer engineering tool required.
The resources not assigned to the pre-defined application are free for additional
user-defined applications:
bb cradle management
bb breaker operation
bb light and load control
bb custom.
User-defined applications
User-defined applications are processed by the I/O in addition to the pre-defined
application selected.
The user-defined applications are available depending on:
bb the pre-defined application selected
bb the I/O resources (inputs and outputs) not used by the application.
The resources required by user-defined applications are assigned using the
customer engineering tool:
bb protection
bb control
bb energy management
bb monitoring.
Mounting
The I/O is a DIN rail mounting device.
Application rotary switch

5 The application rotary switch enables the selection of the pre-defined application.
DB416827.eps
4 6
It has 9 positions and each position is assigned to a pre-defined application.
3 7
The factory set position of the switch is pre-defined application 1.
2 8
1 9
Setting locking pad
The setting locking pad on the front panel of the I/O enables the setting of the I/O by
the customer engineering tool.
DB416828.eps
DB416828.eps
A-84
DB417467.eps
Environmental characteristics
Conforming to standards UL 508, UL 60950, IED 60950, 60947-6-2
Certification cUIUs, GOST, FCC, CE
Ambient temperature -20 to +70 C (-4 to +158 F)
Relative humidity 585 %
Level of pollution Level 3
I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6
Flame resistance ULV0
Shock resistance 1000 m/s2
Resistance to sinusoidal -5 Hz < f < 8.4 Hz
vibrations
A B
Resistance to electromagnetic Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-3
discharge
Immunity to radiated fields 10 V/m
Immunity to surges Conforming to IEC/EN 61000-4-5
24VDC I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6 Consumption 165 mA
Physical characteristics
Dimensions 71.7 x 116 x 70.6 mm (2.83 x 4.56 x 2.78 in.)
C
Mounting DIN rail
4 5 6
M 3 7 I1
AI D Weight 229.5 g (0.51 lb)
2 8
1
APP
9 I2
Degree of protection of the bb On the front panel (wall mounted enclosure): IP4x
I3 O1
installed IO bb IO parts: IP3x
L I4 O2 E
I5
O3
bb Connectors: IP2x
I6 F Connections Screw type terminal blocks
K T
G Technical characteristics - 24 V DC power supply
J IO LV434063 Power supply type Regulated switch type
Rated power 72 W
Input voltage 100120 V AC for single phase
200500 V AC phase-to-phase
13
O1
14 23
O2
24 33
O3
34 T1
A1
T2 PFC filter With IEC 61000-3-2
Output voltage 24 V DC
Power supply out current 3A
Note: it is recommended to use an UL listed/UL listed recognized limited voltage/Limited current
I H or a class 2 power supply with a 24 V DC, 3 A maximum.
Digital inputs
Digital input type Self powered digital input with current limitations as per
IEC 61131-2 type 2 standards (7 mA)
Input limit values at state 1 19.825.2 V DC, 6.18.8 mA
13 14 23 24 33 34 T1 T2 (close)
Input limit values at state 0 019.8 V DC, 0 mA
(open)
Maximum cable length 10 m (33 ft)
Note: for a length greater than 10 m (33 ft) and up to 300 m (1,000 ft), it is mandatory to use a
1
2
shielded twisted cable. The shield cable is connected to the IO functional ground of the IO.
Digital outputs
Digital output type Bistable relay
Rated load 5 A at 250 V AC
Rated carry current 5A
O N
Maximum switching voltage 380 V AC, 125 V DC
Maximum switch current 5A
A 24 V DC power supply terminal block. Maximum switching power 1250 VA, 150 W
B Digital input terminal block: 6 inputs, 3 commons and 1 shield. Minimum permissible load 10 mA at 5 V DC
C 6 input status LEDs. Contact resistance 30 m
D Analog input status LED. Maximum operating frequency bb 18000 operations/hr (Mechanical)
E 3 output status LEDs. bb 1800 operations/hr (Electrical)
F I/O identification labels. Digital output relay protection External fuse of 5 A or less
G Sealable transparent cover. by an external fuse
H Analog input terminal block. Maximum cable length 10 m (33 ft)
I Digital output terminal blocks. Analog inputs
J ULP status LED. The IO analog input can be connected to a Pt100 temperature sensor
K Test/reset button (accessible with cover closed). Range -30 to 200 C -22 to 392 F
L Setting locking pad. Accuracy 2 C from -30 to 20 C 3.6 F from -22 to 68 F
M Application rotary switch: 1 to 9. 1 C from 20 to 140 C 1.8 F from 68 to 284 F
N Switch for IO addressing (IO 1 or IO 2). 2 C from 140 to 200 C 3.6 F from 284 to 392 F
O ULP connectors. Refresh interval 5s 5s
A-85
and characteristics Communications modules, IFM and IFE
for Compact NSX
All Compact NSX devices can be equipped with the Four functional levels
communication function via a prewired connection The Compact NSX can be integrated in a Modbus or Ethernet communication
system and a Modbus or Ethernet network interface. environment. Four functional levels can be used separately or combined.
The interface can be connected directly or via the Communication of status indications
FDM121 switchboard display unit. Four functional This level is compatible with all Compact NSX circuit breakers, whatever the trip unit,
levels can be combined to adapt to all supervision and with all switch-disconnectors. Using the BSCM module, the following information
requirements. is accessible:
bb ON/OFF position (O/F)
bb trip indication (SD)
bb fault-trip indication (SDE).
Communication of commands
Also available on all circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors, this level
(communicating remote control) can be used to:
bb open
bb close
bb reset.
Modbus principle
The Modbus RS 485 (RTU protocol) system is an open bus on which communicating
Modbus devices (Compact NS with Modbus COM, Power Meter PM700, PM800,
Sepam, Vigilohm, Compact NSX, etc.) are installed. All types of PLCs and
microcomputers may be connected to the bus.
Addresses
The Modbus communication parameters (address, baud rate, parity) are entered
using the Electrical Asset Manager or RSU (Remote Setting Utility).
Number of devices
The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Modbus bus
depends on the type of device (Compact with Modbus COM, PM700, PM800,
Sepam, Vigilohm, Compact NSX, etc.), the baud rate (19200 is recommended), the
volume of data exchanged and the desired response time. The RS 485 physical
layer offers up to 32 connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves).
A fixed device requires only one connection point (communication module on the
device). A drawout device uses two connection points (communication modules on
the device and on the chassis).
The number must never exceed 31 fixed devices or 15 drawout devices.
Length of bus
The maximum recommended length for the Modbus bus is 1200 meters.
Bus power source
A 24 V DC power supply is required (less than 20 % ripple, insulation class II).
Ethernet principle
Ethernet is a data link and physical layer protocol defined by IEEE 802 10 and 100
Mbps specifications that connects computer or other Ethernet devices. Ethernet is
an asynchronous Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision detection (referred as
CSMA/CD) protocol. Carrier Sense means that the hosts can detect whether the
medium (coaxial cable) is idle or busy. Multiple Access means that multiple hosts can
be connected to the common medium. Collision Detection means a host detects
whether its transmission has collided with the transmission of another host (or
hosts). IFE Ethernet interface can be connected to a PC or a laptop over Ethernet.
The maximum length of Ethernet cable is 100 meters. IFE Ethernet interface +
gateway provides a Modbus TCP/IP gateway over Ethernet to enable Modbus TCP
communication from a Modbus TCP master to any Modbus slave devices connected
to it. The maximum active Modbus TCP client connection is twelve.
IFE Ethernet interface has an embedded web server (web page).
The Modbus RS 485 (RTU protocol) system is an open bus on which communicating
Modbus devices (Compact NS with Modbus COM, Power Meter PM700, PM800,
Sepam, Vigilohm, Compact NSX, etc.) are installed. All types of PLCs and
microcomputers may be connected to the bus.
A-86
Communication components
and connections
Communication components and connections, IFM

Connections
bb Compact NSX is connected to the I/O application module Modbus
DB417661.eps
A
or FDM121 display unit via the internal terminal block for the
NSX cord equipped with an RJ45 connector: 24 V DC
vv cord available in three lengths: 0.35 m, 1.3 m and 3 m.
vv insulated 1.3 m version for installations > 480 V AC
vv lengths up to 10 m possible using extensions.
B
bb The FDM121 display unit and the I/O application module
are connected to:
J
vv the IFM Modbus interface by a communication cable with
RJ45 connectors on both ends I
or J
vv the IFE Ethernet interface module by a communication
cable with RJ45 connectors on both ends. H
DB416931.eps
D E
1.3 m
F
Modbus
ULP
24 V DC
Communication components and connections, IFE

Ethernet
DB417662.eps
24 V DC
+24V
0V
B'
Eth2
Eth1
J
I
J
R
A Modbus network
B IFM Modbus interface
B' IFE Ethernet interface module
C NSX cord
C
D Internal terminal block for communication
via NSX cord
D E
E BSCM module
F Prefabricated wiring F
G TMD trip unit
H FDM121 display G
I RJ45 cable
J Line terminator (on unused connector if applicable) Ethernet
K I/O application module ULP
24 V DC
A-87
and characteristics Connection of the IFE to a fixed or drawout
Masterpact NW
Connect the IFE to a fixed electrically operated Connect the IFE to a drawout Masterpact NW or circuit breaker using the
Masterpact NW or circuit breaker using the breaker ULP cord
breaker ULP cord
Ethernet Ethernet
DB417665.eps
DB417664.eps
24 V DC 24 V DC
I6
C
I5
24VDC 24VDC C
I4
I3
I2
C
I1
ETH2 ETH2 C
I6
I5
I4
ETH2 ETH2
ETH1 ETH1
C
I3
I2
ETH1 ETH1
C
I1
+ C
24VD
set) set)
(factory (fac tory
.YY.ZZ .YY.ZZ
K
IFE_XX IFE_XX
CT CT
-100/A -100/A
LK/10 LK/10
ETH1 ETH1
IFE -100/A
CT
IFE -100/A
CT
LK/10 LK/10
ETH2 tus ETH2 tus
e Sta e Sta
Modul Modul
rk Status
Netwo
s-SL
Modbu A1
T2
O3 T1
34
33
A
O2
24
O1 23
14
13
B B
C
H
J
C
D
F
E
G
A IFE Ethernet interface for LV circuit breaker A IFE Ethernet interface for LV circuit breaker
B Breaker ULP cord B ULP cable
C Fixed terminal block C Breaker ULP cord
D BCM ULP communication module D Circuit breaker disconnected position contact (CD)
E Fixed electrically operated circuit breaker E Circuit breaker cradle
F BCM ULP communication module
G Drawout circuit breaker
H Drawout terminal block
I Circuit breaker connected position contact (CE)
J Circuit breaker test position contact (CT)
K I/O (Input/Output) application module for LV circuit breaker
A-88
Connection of the IFM to a fixed or drawout
Masterpact NW
Connect the IFM to a fixed electrically operated Connect the IFM to a drawout Masterpact NW or circuit breaker using the
Masterpact NW or circuit breaker using the breaker ULP cord
breaker ULP cord
Modbus Modbus
DB417669.eps
DB417670.eps
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+ C
24VD
K
A1
T2
A
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
A
14
13
B
B
C
H
J
C
D
D
E
F
E
A IFM Ethernet interface for LV circuit breaker A IFM Ethernet interface for LV circuit F BCM ULP communication module
B Breaker ULP cord breaker G Drawout circuit breaker
C Fixed terminal block B ULP cable H Drawout terminal block
D BCM ULP communication module C Breaker ULP cord I Circuit breaker connected position
E Fixed electrically operated circuit breaker D Circuit breaker disconnected position contact (CE)
contact (CD) J Circuit breaker test positioncontact(CT)
E Circuit breaker cradle K I/O (Input/Output) application module
for LV circuit breaker
A-89
and characteristics Electrical Asset Manager Configuration
Engineering tool
Introduction
Capture1b.eps
Electrical Asset Manager is a software application that helps the user to manage a
project as part of designing, testing, site commissioning, and maintenance of the
project life cycle.
It enables the user to prepare the settings of the devices offline (without connecting
to the device) and configure them when connected with the devices.
Also it provides lot of other value added features for the user to manage the project
such as, safe repository in cloud, attach artifacts to each device or at the project
level, organize devices in switchboard wise, manage a hierarchical structure of the
installation etc.
Compatible devices (configuration and device management)

Electrical Asset Manager is compatible with the following devices:
Capture2b.eps
bb Compact NSX100-630 (IEC)

bb PowerPactTM (UL) circuit breaker
bb Compact NS630b-3200 (IEC)
bb Masterpact NT/NW (IEC and UL) circuit breaker
bb Acti9 Smartlink.
bb Compatible devices (Device Management in the project)
bb Switch disconnectors (Compact NSX, Masterpact & PowerPact Family)
bb Third party devices.
References:
Electrical Asset Manager software package can be downloaded from our website
www.schneider-electric.com.
Capture3b.eps
Features
Electrical Asset Manager supersedes the Schneider Electric customer engineering
tools such as Remote setting Utility (RSU) and Remote Control Utility (RCU) with
additional features.
Electrical Asset Manager supports the connection of Schneider Electric
communicable devices to:
bb create projects by device discovery, selection of devices, and import Bill of
Material (BOM)
bb monitor the status of protection and IO status
bb read information (alarms, measurements, parameters)
bb check protection discrimination between two devices
bb upload and download of configuration or settings in batch mode to multiple
Capture4b.eps
devices.
bb carry out commands and tests
bb generate and print device settings report and communication test report
bb manage multiple devices with electrical and communication hierarchy model
bb manage artifacts (project documents)
bb check consistency in settings between devices on a communication network
bb compare configuration settings between PC and device (online)
bb download latest firmware.
Electrical Asset Manager enables the user to avail the advanced features of the
software once the project is saved in Schneider Electric cloud.
A-90
Functions
Capture5b.eps
Offline Mode
A project can be built in offline mode through 2 different ways:
bb through BOM file import
bb through Device Selection.
Additionally, the user can open an existing project and modify the settings offline.
The user can do the discrimination curve check and firmware compatibility check for
devices in the project.
Online Mode
A project can be built in online mode through device discovery also other than the
methods possible through offline method.
Once the project is built, the following functions can be performed in addition to the
functions available in offline mode:
Capture6b.eps
bb compare the device parameters with project parameters

bb load parameters from project to the device and vice versa
bb firmware downloads to the device
bb monitor the measurement, maintenance, device status and I/O status
bb control functions.
User Interface
Electrical Asset Manager software provides fast direct access to the project and the
devices in the project through different tabs.
bb Project: to provide the project information including customer details, project
references and to add project artifacts (documents related to the project).
bb Configuration: to build up the tree structure of the project architecture ; to have a
table view of the devices added in the project ; to set the parameters of the devices ;
Capture7b.eps
to transfer the device settings ; to view the tripping curves; to attach device artifacts
and to download the latest firmware, to do the communication test for all the devices
and generate the test report.
bb Monitoring: this allows the user to monitor the real time values of different devices
through different sub tabs namely Monitoring, Logs and Control.
bb Reports: report tab allows you to generate and print a report of the project settings
from the report tab. The user details and project characteristics are automatically
filled with the details entered in the Project page.
Capture8b.eps
A-91
Functions
and characteristics
ofMasterpact NW DC - DC PV
Operating conditions
Masterpact circuit breakers have been tested for

operation in industrial atmospheres. It is
recommended that the equipment be cooled or heated
to the proper operating temperature and kept free of
excessive vibration and dust.
Ambient temperature
DB402051.eps
Masterpact devices can operate under the following temperature conditions:

bb the electrical and mechanical characteristics are stipulated for an ambient
temperature of -25 C to +70 C
bb circuit-breaker closing is guaranteed down to -35 C by manual operation (push
button).
Storage conditions are as follows:
bb -40 to +85 C for a Masterpact device without its control unit
bb -25 C to +85 C for the control unit.
Extreme atmospheric conditions

DB402052.eps
Masterpact devices have successfully passed the tests defined by the following
standards for extreme atmospheric conditions:
bb IEC 60068-2-1: dry cold at -40 C
bb IEC 60068-2-2: dry heat at +85 C
bb IEC 60068-2-30: damp heat (temperature +55 C, relative humidity 95 %)
bb IEC 60068-2-52 level 2: salt mist.
Masterpact devices can operate in the industrial environments defined by standard
IEC 60947 (pollution degree up to 4).
It is nonetheless advised to check that the devices are installed in suitably cooled
switchboards without excessive dust.
Vibrations
DB128163.eps
Masterpact devices have successfully passed testing in compliance with

IEC 60068-2-6 for the following vibration levels:
bb 2 to 13.2 Hz: amplitude 1 mm
bb 13.2 to 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g.
Vibration testing to these levels is required by merchant marine inspection
organisations (Veritas, Lloyds, etc). Some applications have vibration profiles
outside of this standard and require special attention during application design,
installation, and use. Excessive vibration may cause unexpected tripping, damage to
connections or to other mechanical parts. Please refer to the Masterpact
maintenance guide (causes of accelerated ageing / operating conditions / vibrations)
for additional information.
Examples of applications with high vibration profiles could include:
bb wind turbines
bb power frequency converters that are installed in the same switchboard or close
proximity to the Masterpact circuit breaker
bb emergency generators
bb high vibration marine applications such as thrusters, anchor positioning systems,
etc.
A-92
Masterpact NW DC and DC PV
Altitude
DB128162.eps
(m)
2000 At altitudes higher than 2000 metres, the modifications in the ambient air (electrical
resistance, cooling capacity) lower the following characteristics as follows:
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
NW DC
Maximum rated operationnal NW DC y500 V 500 450 390 350
voltage 50/60 Hz Ue (V) NW DC 500-900 V 900 800 700 630
Rated current (A) at 40 C 1 x In 0.98 x In 0.96 x In 0.94 x In
NW DC PV
Maximum rated operationnal DC voltage 1000 1000 950 850
Rated current (A) at 40 C 1 x In 0.98 x In 0.96 x In 0.94 x In
Intermediate values may be obtained by interpolation.
Electromagnetic disturbances
DB128164.eps
Masterpact NW DC devices are protected against:

bb overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances
bb overvoltages caused by atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-system
outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system)
bb devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.)
bb electrostatic discharges produced by users.
Masterpact NW DC devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-
compatibility tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards:
bb IEC 60947-2, appendix F
bb IEC 60947-2, appendix B (trip units with earth-leakage function).
The above tests guarantee that:
bb no nuisance tripping occurs
bb tripping times are respected.
Degree of protection
Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers offer the following protection characteristics
depending on the installation conditions:
b IP: degree of protection (standard IEC 60529)
b IK: protection against external mechanical impacts (standard EN 50102).
Masterpact NW DC
Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard
Bare circuit breaker IP30
DB104534.eps
Escutcheon (CDP) for fixed and drawout IP40 IK07

versions, with blanking plate
Transparent cover (CCP) for escutcheon IP54 IK10

PB100776-20R.eps
for drawout version
A-93
Functions
and characteristics
ofMasterpact NW DC - DC PV
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC
Masterpact NW DC circuit breaker

PB104917.eps
Poles coupling version C or D (3 poles)

E (4 poles)
Rated current at 40 C / 50 C (1) In (A)
NW10 DC 3P. Ultimate breaking capacity L/R = 5 ms Icu (kA) V DC 500
750
900
PB105024_42.eps
L/R = 15 ms Icu 500

750
900
L/R = 30 ms Icu 500
750
900
Short-time withstand current Icw 1s
NW10 DC 4P. Utilisation category
Breaking time (ms)
Making time (ms)
Protection against overcurrents (see trip-unit table page D-12)
Trip units Built-in
Short-circuits
Durability
(O/C cycles) Mechanical With maintenance
Without maintenance
Electrical Without maintenance 500 V DC
900 V DC
Auxiliary contacts
Switch-disconnector as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3
Type of switch-disconnector
Rated making capacity Icm (kA)
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA) 1s
Unprotected circuit breaker (500 V DC only)
Tripping by shunt trip as per IEC 60947-2
Type of unprotected circuit breaker
Ultimate breaking capacity L/R = 6.5 ms Icu (kA) 500 V DC
Short-time withstand current Icw (kA) 1s
Ultimate breaking capacity L/R = 15 ms Icu (kA) 500 V DC
Short-time withstand current Icw (kA) 1s
Overload and short-circuit protection
External protection relay: short-circuit protection, maximum delay: 500 ms
Connection Drawout 3P RC Horizontal
4P Vertical
Fixed 3P RC Horizontal
4P Vertical
Dimensions Drawout 3P
Fixed 3P
4P
Weight (kg) Drawout 3P
connected in series (approximate values) 4P
Fixed 3P
4P
(1) 50 C - see the derating table for the NW40 DC.
A-94
NW10 DC NW20 DC NW40 DC
b b b
b b b
1000 2000 4000

1000 1000 1000
12 12 12
500/900 500/900 500/900
N H N H N H
85 100 85 100 85 100
- 85 - 85 - 85
- 85 - 85 - 85
35 85 35 85 35 85
- 50 - 50 - 50
- 35 - 35 - 35
25 50 25 50 25 50
- 50 - 50 - 50
- 25 - 25 - 25
100 %
100 %
50 85 50 85 50 85
B
30 to 75
< 70
b b b b b b
4
b b b b b b
- - - - - -
b b b b b b
20000
10000
8500 5000 2000
- 2000 - 2000 - 1000
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
b b b b b b
HA HA HA
- 85 - 85 - 85
- 85 - 85 - 85
NW10 HADC-C 500V DC NW20 HADC-C 500V DC NW40 HADC-C 500V DC

85 85 85
85 85 85
65 65 65
65 65 65
100 %
- - -
b b b b - -
b b b b b b
b b b b - -
b b b b b b
439 x 441 x 494 439 x 441 x 594

439 x 556 x 494 439 x 556 x 594
352 x 422 x 427 352 x 422 x 527
352 x 537 x 427 352 x 537 x 527
90 to 116
125 to 146
60 to 86
85 to 106
A-95
Functions Trip-unit characteristics
and characteristics Trip units for Masterpact NW DC
All Masterpact NW DC devices Protection using the Micrologic 1.0 DC control unit
are equipped with a Micrologic 1.0 DC control unit.
Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers use Micrologic 1.0 DC control units. These
interchangeable units with instantaneous thresholds, operating with electromagnetic
sensors, can be adjusted on site.
The circuit breakers can be used with the three versions of sensors,
defined by their setting range.
PB101139-32R.eps
Type of sensor 1250/2500 A 2500/5400 A 5000/11000 A

Masterpact NW10 DC b b b
Masterpact NW20 DC - b b
Masterpact NW40 DC - - b
Adjustments
Settings for Masterpact NW DC circuit breakers may be accessed from the front,
with the switchboard door open.
b Settings are made for the input (+ pole) and the output (- pole).
b The setting range comprises eleven positions, plus five preferential settings
marked A, B, C, D and E.
b The setting values for the two corresponding sensors must be identical.
DB403050.eps
DB402618.eps
Magnetic pick-up value.
Two identical settings.
A-96
Setting values for magnetic pick-up Im
Settings marked A, B, C, D and E
DB104542.eps
Minimum Maximum
Sensor versions Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings
A1 and A2 B1 and B2 C1 and C2 D1 and D2 E1 and E2
1250/2500 1250 A 1500 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A
2500/5400 2500 A 3300 A 4000 A 5000 A 5400 A
5000/11000 5000 A 8000 A 10000 A 11000 A 11000 A
Tolerances 8 % 10 % 10 % 10 % 10 %
DB403114.eps
Intermediate settings
It is possible to set eleven other (unmarked) intermediate values.
DB403115.eps
A-97
and characteristics
for PV application
Masterpact NW HADCD-PV
Masterpact NW HADCD-PV NW20 HADCD-PV NW40 HADCD-PV

PB113343_32.eps
switch-disconnectors for PV application

Poles coupling version D (3 poles) b b
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-1 / 60947-3 and EN 60947-1 / 60947-3
Rated current at 40/45 C In (A) 2000 4000
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 1000 1000
Rated impulse Uimp (kV peak) 12 12
withstand voltage
Masterpact NW20 Rated operational voltage Ue (V DC) 1000 (1) 1000 (1)
HADCD-PV. Switch-disconnector as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3
Rated making capacity Icm (kA) 85 85
Rated short-time Icw (kA/1 s) 85 85
withstand current
DB416572.eps
Masterpact Utilization category DC-22A DC-22A

NW20 HADCD-PV Durability
Ui 1000V Uimp 12kV (O/C cycles) Mechanical with maintenance 20000 20000
Ue 1000 V c 3P in series without maintenance 10000 10000
Icw 85kA/1s Electrical without 1000 V DC 2000 1000
Icm 85kA maintenance L/R = 2 ms
Connection Fixed rear Vertical b b
IEC 60947-3
connections Horizontal b -
Drawout rear Vertical b b
Ith 2000A 55C
connections Horizontal b -
Ue (V) Ie (A)
DC22A 1000 2000
Dimensions Fixed 3P 352 x 422 x 427 352 x 422 x 527
H x W x D (mm) with the Drawout 3P 439 x 441 x 494 439 x 441 x 594
series connection
Masterpact NW20 Weight (kg) Fixed 3P 60 to 86
HADCD-PV rating plate.
with the series connection Drawout 3P 90 to 116
(approximate values)
All the accessories of the standard NW HADC switch-disconnectors can be used.
(1) NW HADCD-PV switch-disconnectors for PV applications are designed and qualified to break the rated or the fault current
DB416460.eps
Masterpact under 1000 V DC with all the 3 poles in series and this is a mandatory condition whatever the type of fault. This comes to say that
NW40 HADCD-PV the PV systems using these switch-disconnectors must be isolated systems from the earth and that the double fault situation (A
Ui 1000V Uimp 12kV and D or C and E on the diagram below) must be absolutely avoided : insulation monitoring devices shall detect the first fault and
Ue 1000 V c 3P in series the staff shall look for this first fault and clear it with no delay. These switch-disconnectors cannot be used in grounded systems as
Icw 85kA/1s in this situation they may be expected to break the current under the full voltage (1000 V DC) with only 1 pole or 2 poles in series.
Icm 85kA These devices are not designed for that purpose and could sustain irremediable damage if used to break in these conditions.
DB116984.eps
IEC 60947-3
Ith 4000A 45C

Ue (V) Ie (A)
DC22A 1000 4000
Masterpact NW40 Isolated system.

HADCD-PV rating plate.
A-98
Connections and safety clearances
Fixed version, vertical rear connections

NW20 HADCD-PV NW40 HADCD-PV
DB402264_55.eps
DB402268_55.eps
Safety clearances Insulated Metal parts Energised
parts parts
DB416461.eps
DB416462.eps
A 0 0 100
B 0 0 60
F : Datum.
A(*) An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove the arc chutes.
An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.
Drawout version, vertical rear connections

NW20 HADCD-PV NW40 HADCD-PV
DB402291_55.eps
DB402311_55.eps
Safety clearances Insulated Metal parts Energised

parts parts
DB416463.eps
DB416464.eps
A 0 0 0
B 0 0 60
F : Datum.
A-99
Functions Panorama of electrical and
andcharacteristics
mechanical accessories
All Masterpact NW DC devices
PB104736.eps
exist in circuit-breaker (equipped with Micrologic DC
1.0 control unit) and switch-disconnector versions. All
auxiliaries are common from 1000 to 4000 A.
1 OFF pushbutton.
2 ON pushbutton.
3 Closing mechanism charging handle.
4 Operation counter.
5 Operating mechanism charged and ready to close
indication:
b spring charged
DB104522.eps
b spring discharged.
6 Main contact position indication:

b ON
DB104523.eps
b OFF.
7 Fault trip indication and reset button.

8 Micrologic 1.0 DC control unit.
9 Racking interlock.
10 Racking-handle storage.
11 Shutter position indication and locking.
12 Connected / test / disconnected
position indication.
13 Racking-handle port.
14 Reset pushbutton.
15 Padlock locking.
16 Keylock locking.
Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors

PB104432-48R.eps
Masterpact NW DC exists in fixed and withdrawable versions:

b circuit breaker equipped with Micrologic 1.0 DC control unit
b switch-disconnector without the control unit.
Common auxiliaries from 1000 to 4000 A

All accessories are:
b accessible from the front in a compartment isolated from the power circuits
b secured by a single screw
b no adjustments
b adaptable on site.
Vertical rear connection. Communication

Circuit-breaker or switch-disconnector integration in a supervision system requires
the COM option.
DB101149.eps
Masterpact uses the Modbus communication protocol compatible with ION-E

electrical engineering expert system software.
An external gateway is available for communication with other networks (Profibus,
Ethernet, etc.).
Connections
b Rear vertical connection in standard.
b Possibility of conversion to horizontal connection by turning the connectors
on the site by the customer (except for the NW40).
b Prefabricated series connections.
b Safety shutters, shutter locking blocks.
b Optional accessories:
v interphase barriers
v shutter position indication and locking.
A-100
Locking
PB104367A32.eps
PB104366A32.eps
PB100780-32R_SE.eps
b Pushbutton locking by padlockable transparent
cover.
b OFF-position locking by padlock or keylock.
b Chassis locking:
v in disconnected position by keylock
v in connected, disconnected and test positions.
b Door interlock (inhibits door opening with breaker in
connected position).
b Racking interlock (inhibits racking with door open).
b Racking interlock between crank and OFF
pushbutton.
b Automatic spring discharge before breaker removal.
b Mismatch protection. Locking in disconnected position by keylock or padlock. Door interlock (inhibits door
opening with breaker in
connected position).
Indication contacts
PB100806-19R.eps
PB100807-12R.eps
PB100820-19R.eps
PB100816-19R.eps
b Standard or low-level contacts:
v ON/OFF indication (OF)
v fault-trip indication (SDE)
v carriage switches for connected (CE), disconnected
(CD) and test (CT) positions.
OF contact OF contact SDE contact. Combined contact

(microswitch). (rotary). (connected/closed).
Remote operation
PB104349A55.eps
PB100808-22R.eps
PB100809-11R.eps
PB100818-11R.eps
b Remote ON/OFF:
v gear motor
v XF closing or MX opening voltage releases
v PF ready-to-close contact
v options:
- RAR automatic or Res electrical remote reset
- BPFE electrical closing pushbutton.
b Remote tripping function:
v MN voltage release:
- standard
- adjustable or non-adjustable delay
v or 2nd MX voltage release.
Remote ON/OFF. Gear motor. Voltage PF

releases ready-to-
(MX and XF). close
contact.
Accessories
DB104524.eps
b Auxiliary terminal shield.

b Operation counter.
PB100776-29R.eps
b Escutcheon.
b Transparent cover for escutcheon.
PB104382-27R.eps
b Escutcheon blanking plate.
Operation counter. Escutcheon with blanking plate. Transparent cover.
A-101
Functions Connection
andcharacteristics Overview of solutions
Two types of connection are available: vertical Rear connection fixed device
connection is standard however the connectors can be
Masterpact NW DC
rotated for on-site conversion to horizontal connection
(except for NW40). Vertical rear connection
PB105026.eps
Horizontal rear connection

PB105025.eps
A-102
Connection
Overview of solutions
Rear connection withdrawable device

Masterpact NW DC
Horizontal rear connection
DB402291_59.eps
DB402303_59.eps
Vertical rear connection

PB104920_59.eps
DB402323_59.eps
A-103
andcharacteristics
accessories
Locking on the device

1 Fault trip indication and
DB418162.eps
reset button.
2 OFF position locking.
3 Electrical closing
pushbutton.
4 ON pushbutton.
5 OFF pushbuton.
6 Operating mechanism
charged and ready to
close indication.
7 Pushbutton locking.
8 Main contact position
indication.
9 Operation counter.
Pushbutton locking VBP

PB100811-32R.eps
The transparent cover blocks access to the pushbuttons used to open and close the
device.
It is possible to independently lock the opening button and the closing button.
The locking device is often combined with a remote operating mechanism.
The pushbuttons may be locked using either:
b three padlocks (not supplied)
b lead seal
Access to pushbuttons protected by transparent cover. b two screws.
Device locking in the OFF position

VCPO - by padlocks - VSPO - by keylocks
PB100810-32R.eps
The circuit breaker is locked in the OFF position by physically maintaining the
opening pushbutton pressed down:
b using padlocks (one to three padlocks, not supplied)
b using keylocks (one or two different keylocks, supplied).
Keys may be removed only when locking is effective (Profalux or Ronis type locks).
The keylocks are available in any of the following configurations:
b one keylock
b one keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied separately for
interlocking with another device
Pushbutton locking using a padlock. b two different key locks for double locking.
Profalux and Ronis keylocks are compatible with each other.
A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis,
Profalux, Kirk or Castell).
PB100812-32R.eps
Accessory-compatibility
3 padlocks and/or 2 keylocks.
Cable-type door interlock IPA

This option prevents door opening when the circuit breaker is closed and prevents
circuit breaker closing when the door is open.
For this, a special plate associated with a lock and a cable is mounted on the right
side of the circuit breaker.
With this interlock installed, the source changeover function cannot be implemented.
This option is identical for fixed or drawout versions.
OFF position locking using a padlock.
PB104381A-40R.eps
OFF position locking using a keylock.
A-104
Locking on the chassis
1 Racking-handle port.
DB418163.eps
2 Connected/test/
disconnected position
indication.
3 Racking interlock.
4 Racking-handle storage.
5 Reset pushbutton.
6 Padlock locking.
7 Keylock locking.
8 Chassis front plate
(accessible with cubicle
door closed).
9 Disconnected position
door interlock.
10 Mismatch protection.
Disconnected position locking

By padlocks (standard) or keylocks (VSPD option)
Mounted on the chassis and accessible with the door closed, these devices lock the
circuit breaker in the disconnected position in two manners:
b using padlocks (standard), up to three padlocks (not supplied)
b using keylocks (optional), one or two different keylocks are available.
Profalux and Ronis keylocks are available in different options:
b one keylock
b two different keylocks for double locking
b one (or two) keylocks mounted on the chassis + one (or two) identical keylocks
supplied separately for interlocking with another device.
A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis,
Profalux, Kirk or Castell).
Connected, disconnected and test position locking

The connected, disconnected and test positions are shown by an indicator and
are mechanically indexed. The exact position is obtained when the racking handle
blocks. A release button is used to free it.
As standard, the circuit breaker can be locked only in disconnected position. On
request, the locking system may be modified to lock the circuit breaker in any of the
three positions connected, disconnected or test.
Door interlock catch VPEC

Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of
the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in connected or test position. It the
breaker is put in the connected position with the door open, the door may be closed
without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.
PB104737A.eps
Racking interlock VPOC

This device prevents insertion of the racking handle when the cubicle door is open.

This option is identical for fixed and drawout versions.
Racking interlock.
Racking interlock between crank and OFF pushbutton
IBPO for NW DC
This option makes it necessary to press the OFF pushbutton in order to insert the
racking handle and holds the device open until the handle is removed.
PB100815-32R_SE.eps
Automatic spring discharge before breaker removal

DAE for NW DC
This option discharges the springs before the breaker is removed from the chassis.
Mismatch protection VDC

Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with
compatible characteristics. It is made up of two parts (one on the chassis and one on
Mismatch protection.
the circuit breaker) offering twenty different combinations that the user may select.
A-105
andcharacteristics
accessories
Indication contacts are available: Indication contacts

b in the standard version for relay applications
b in a low-level version for control of PLCs and ON/OFF indication contacts OF
electronic circuits. Rotary type changeover contacts directly driven by the mechanism. These contacts
trip when the minimum isolation distance between the main circuit-breaker contacts
is reached.
PB100806-32R.eps
OF
Supplied as standard 4
Maximum number 12
Breaking capacity (A) Standard minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240/380 10/6 (1)
AC12/DC12 480 10/6 (1)
690 6
V DC 24/48 10/6 (1)
125 10/6 (1)
250 3
Low-level minimum load: 2 mA/15 V
V AC 24/48 6
240 6
380 3
V DC 24/48 6
125 6
250 3
(1) Standard contacts: 10 A; optional contacts: 6 A.
ON/OFF indication contacts OF (microswitch type).

Fault-trip indication contacts SDE
Circuit-breaker tripping due to a fault is signalled by:
b a red mechanical fault indicator (reset)
PB100807-20R.eps
b one changeover contact SDE.

Following tripping, the mechanical indicator must be reset before the circuit breaker
may be closed. One SDE is supplied as standard. An optimal SDE may be added.
This latter is incompatible with the electrical reset after fault-trip option (Res).
SDE
Supplied as standard 1
Maximum number 2
ON/OFF indication contacts OF (rotary type). Breaking capacity (A) Standard minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240/380 6
AC12/DC12 480 2
PB100820-32R.eps
V DC 24/48 3
125 0.3
250 0.15
V AC 24/48 3
240 3
380 3
V DC 24/48 3
125 0.3
250 0.15
Combined connected/closed contacts EF

Additional fault-trip indication contacts SDE. The contact combines the device connected and the device closed information to
produce the circuit closed information. Supplied as an option for Masterpact
NW DC, it is mounted in place of the connector of an additional OF contact.
PB100816-32R.eps
EF
Maximum number 8
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240/380 6
AC12/DC12 480 6
690 6
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3
V AC 24/48 5
240 5
380 5
Combined contacts.
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3
A-106
Connected, disconnected and test position carriage
PB100817-32R.eps
switches
Three series of optional auxiliary contacts are available for the chassis:
b changeover contacts to indicate the connected position CE
b changeover contacts to indicate the disconnected position CD. This position is
indicated when the required clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits
is reached.
b changeover contacts to indicate the test position CT. In this position, the power
circuits are disconnected and the auxiliary circuits are connected.
Additional actuators
A set of additional actuators may be installed on the chassis to change the functions
of the carriage switches.
CE, CD and CT connected/disconnected/test position
carriage switches. Contacts CE CD CT
Maximum number Standard with additional 3 3 3
actuators 9 0 0
6 3 0
6 0 3
3 6 0
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240 8
AC12/DC12
380 8
480 8
690 6
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3
V AC 24/48 5
240 5
380 5
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3
A-107
andcharacteristics
accessories
Two solutions are available for remote operation of Remote operation: remote ON / OFF
Masterpact devices:
The remote ON / OFF function is used to remotely open and close the circuit breaker.
b a point-to-point solution
It is made up of:
b a bus solution with the COM communication option. b an electric motor MCH equipped with a springs charged limit switch contact CH
b two voltage releases:
v a closing release XF
v an opening release MX.
Optionally, other functions may be added:
PB104349A-68R.eps
b a ready to close contact PF

b an electrical closing pushbutton BPFE
b remote RES following a fault.
A remote-operation function is generally combined with:
b device ON / OFF indication OF
b fault-trip indication SDE.
Wiring diagram of a point-to-point remote ON / OFF function

Note
DB402619.eps
An opening order always takes priority over a closing order.

If opening and closing orders occur simultaneously, the
mechanism discharges without any movement of the main
contacts. The circuit breaker remains in the open position
(OFF).
In the event of maintained opening and closing orders, the
standard mechanism provides an anti-pumping function by
blocking the main contacts in open position.
Anti-pumping function. After fault tripping or intentional opening
using the manual or electrical controls, the closing order must
first be discontinued, then reactivated to close the circuit
breaker.
When the automatic reset after fault trip (RAR) option is
installed, to avoid pumping following a fault trip, the automatic
control system must take into account the information supplied
by the circuit breaker before issuing a new closing order or
blocking the circuit breaker in the open position. (information
on type of fault: overload, short time delay, earth-leakage fault,
fault vigi or short-circuit, etc.)
Wiring diagram of a bus-type remote ON / OFF function

Note
DB402620.eps
MX communicating releases are of the impulse type only and

cannot be used to lock a circuit breaker in OFF position. For
locking in OFF position, use the remote tripping function
(2ndMX or MN).
When Mx or XF communicating releases are used, the third

wire (C3, A3) must be connected even if the communication
module is not installed. When the control voltage (C3-C1 or
A3-A1) is applied to the MX or XF releases, it is necessary to
wait 1.5 seconds before issuing an order. consequently, it is
advised to use standrad MX or XF releases for applications
such as source-changeover systems.
COM
A-108
Electric motor MCH
PB100808-32R.eps
The electric motor automatically charges and recharges the spring mechanism when
the circuit breaker is closed. Instantaneous reclosing of the breaker is thus possible
following opening. The spring-mechanism charging handle is used only as a backup
if auxiliary power is absent.
The electric motor (MCH) is equipped as standard with a limit switch contact (CH)
that signals the charged position of the mechanism (springs charged).
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/240 - 277 - 380/415 - 400/440 - 480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/125 - 200/250
Operating threshold 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) 180
Motor overcurrent 2 to 3 In for 0.1 s
Charging time maximum 4 seconds
Operating frequency maximum 3 cycles per minute
CH contact 10 A at 240 V
Voltage releases XF and MX

Their supply can be maintained or automatically disconnected.
Electric motor MCH for Masterpact NW DC.
Closing release XF
The XF release remotely closes the circuit breaker if the spring mechanism is
charged.
DB417155.eps
Opening release MX
200 ms The MX release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when energised, the
min. minimum duration of the pulse operating order must be 200 ms. The MX release
for MX locks the circuit breaker in OFF position if the order is maintained (except for MX
communicating releases).
Note: whether the operating order is maintened or automatically disconnected (pulse-type), XF
or MX communicating releases (bus solution with COM communication option) always have
an impulse-type action (see diagram).
Characteristics XF MX
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480
V DC 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating threshold 0.85 to 1.1 Un 0.7 to 1.1 Un
PB100809-16R.eps
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (during 200 ms) pick-up: 200 (during 200 ms)
hold: 4.5 hold: 4.5
Circuit-breaker response time at Un 70 ms 10 (NW DC y 4000 A) 50 ms 10 (NW DC)
80 ms 10 (NW DC > 4000 A)
Ready to close contact PF

The ready to close position of the circuit breaker is indicated by a mechanical indicator
and a PF changeover contact. This signal indicates that all the following are valid:
b the circuit breaker is in the OFF position
b the spring mechanism is charged
XF and MX voltage releases. b a maintained opening order is not present:
v MX energised
v fault trip
v remote tripping second MX or MN
PB100818-16R.eps
v device not completely racked in

v device locked in OFF position
v device interlocked with a second device.
Characteristics
Supplied as standard -
Maximum number 1
Breaking capacity Standard minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240/380 5
AC12/DC12
480 5
690 3
V DC 24/48 3
125 0.3
Ready to close contacts PF.
250 0.15
V AC 24/48 3
240 3
380 3
V DC 24/48 3
125 0.3
250 0.15
A-109
andcharacteristics
accessories
Electrical closing pushbutton BPFE

Located on the front panel, this pushbutton carries out electrical closing of the circuit
breaker. It is generally associated with the transparent cover that protects access to
the closing pushbutton.
Electrical closing via the BPFE pushbutton takes into account all the safety functions
that are part of the control/monitoring system of the installation.
The BPFE connects to the closing release XF in place of the COM module.
The COM module is incompatible with this option.
Different types of voltage exist and the XF electromagnet is compulsary if the BPFE
option is selected.
DB402622.eps
Remote reset after fault trip

Electrical reset after fault trip RES
Following tripping, this function resets the fault trip indication contacts SDE
and the mechanical indicator and enables circuit breaker closing.
Power supply: 110 / 130 V AC and 200 / 240 V AC.
The use of XF closing release is compulsory with this option.
DB402623.eps
Automatic reset after fault trip RAR

Following tripping, a reset of the mechanical indicator (reset button) is no longer
required to enable circuit-breaker closing. The mechanical (reset button) and
electrical SDE indications remain in fault position until the reset button is pressed.
The use of XF closing release is compulsory with this option.
A-110
Remote operation: remote tripping
This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of:
PB104369A-68R.eps
b a shunt release second MX

b or an undervoltage release MN
b or a delayed undervoltage release MNR: (MN + delay unit).
These releases (2nd MX or MN) cannot be operated by the communication bus.
The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an
emergency OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker.
Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function
DB402625.eps
DB402626.eps
DB402624.eps
Voltage releases second MX

PB100809-16R.eps
When energised, the MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker.
A continuous supply of power to the second MX locks the circuit breaker in the OFF
position.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating threshold 0.7 to 1.1 Un
Permanent locking function 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (during 80 ms) hold: 4.5
MX or MN voltage release. Circuit-breaker response time at Un 50 ms 10
Instantaneous voltage releases MN

The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage
drops to a value between 35 % and 70 % of its rated voltage. If there is no supply on
the release, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically.
Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts. Circuit-
breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release returns to
85% of its rated value.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
V DC 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
closing 0.85 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (during 200 ms) hold: 4.5
MN consumption with delay unit pick-up: 200 (during 200 ms) hold: 4.5
Circuit-breaker response time at Un 90 ms 5
MN delay units
To eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of
the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external
delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable
and non-adjustable.
Characteristics
Power supply non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250
VAC 50-60 Hz/DC adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
closing 0.85 Un
Consumption of delay unit alone (VA or W) pick-up: 200 (during 200 ms) hold: 4.5
Circuit-breaker response non-adjustable 0.25 s
time at Un adjustable 0.5 s - 0.9 s - 1.5 s - 3 s
A-111
andcharacteristics
accessories
Shields, blanking plates, counters

Auxiliary terminal shield CB
DB124953.eps
Optional equipment mounted on the chassis, the shield prevents access to the
terminal block of the electrical auxiliaries.
Operation counter CDM

PB104382-32R.eps
The operation counter sums the number of operating cycles and is visible on the front
panel. It is compatible with manual and electrical control functions.
Escutcheon CDP
DB101173.eps
Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases
the degree of protection to IP40 (circuit breaker installed free standing: IP30) .
It is available in fixed and drawout versions.
Blanking plate OP for escutcheon

Used with the escutcheon, this option closes off the door cut-out of a cubicle not yet
equipped with a device. It may be used with the escutcheon for both fixed and
drawout devices.
Transparent cover CCP for escutcheon

Optional equipment mounted on the escutcheon, the cover is hinged and secured by
a screw. It increases the degree of protection to IP54, IK10. It adapts to drawout
devices.
Escutcheon CDP with blanking plate.

PB100776-42R.eps
Transparent cover CCP for escutcheon.
Grounding kit KMT

DB414776.eps
This option allows the grounding of the breaker mechanism while the front cover is
removed. The grounding is made via the chassis for the drawout version and via the
fixation side plate for the fixed version.
Grounding kit KMT.
A-112
Compact NSX DC - DC PV Installation recommendations
Presentation 2
Compact NSX100 to NSX1200 DC

Installation in switchboards B-2
Power connections B-3
Safety clearances, minimum distances and insulation of live parts B-5
Temperature derating B-6
Characteristics of circuit breakers with parallel connection of poles B-7
Compact NSX DC PV
Safety clearances and minimum distances B-10
Temperature derating B-12
Temperature derating - Power dissipation / Resistance B-13
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC - DC PV

Installation in switchboard B-14
Door interlock B-15
Cable-type door interlock - Connection of MN, MX and XF voltage releases B-16
Power connection B-17
Busbar sizing B-20
Temperature derating - Power dissipation and input/output resistance B-21

B-1
Installation Compact NSX100 to NSX1200 DC
recommendations
Installation in switchboards
Possible mounting positions

For fixed or withdrawable circuit breakers
Fig. A Fig. B
DB413249.eps
DB413250.eps
Fig. C Fig. D
DB413251.eps
DB413252.eps
Fig. E
DB413253.eps
Possible supports
For fixed or withdrawable circuit breakers
On a plain mounting plate On a slotted mounting plate
DB413249.eps
DB413254.eps
On rails
DB413255.eps
B-2
Power connections
Electrodynamic forces on the conductors

DB402627.eps
The circuit breakers can be connected with copper, tinned copper or tinned
aluminum conductors (rigid or flexible bars, cables).
In the event of a short-circuit, electrodynamic forces will be exerted on the
conductors.
They must therefore be correctly sized and maintained in place using supports.
Electrical connection points on all types of devices (contactors, circuit breakers, etc.)
should not be used for mechanical support.
Ties for flexible bars and cables

The table below indicates the maximum distance between ties depending on the
prospective short-circuit current.
The maximum distance between ties attached to the switchboard frame is 400 mm.
Type of Maximum distance Short-circuit current

tie between ties (mm) (kA rms)
PANDUIT type ties 200 10
Width: 4.5 mm 100 14
Max. load: 22 kg
50 19
White
SAREL type ties 350 21
Width: 9 mm 200 27
Max. load: 90 kg
100 36
Black
Double ties 70 45
50 100
Note: for 50 mm cables, use the 9 mm wide ties.
Weights
Type Circuit Plug-in Chassis Motor
breaker base mechanism
NSX100N/H DC 1P/1D 0.5 - - -
2P/2D 1.45 - - -
NSX100 DC 3P/3D 1.79 0.8 2.2 1.2
4P/4D 2.57 1.05 2.2 1.2
NSX160N/H DC 1P/1D 0.5 - - -
2P/2D 1.45 - - -
NSX160N DC 3P/3D 1.85 0.8 2.2 1.2
4P/4D 2.58 1.05 2.2 1.2
NSX250 DC 3P/3D 2.2 0.8 2.2 1.2
4P/4D 2.78 1.05 2.2 1.2
NSX400/630 DC 3P/3D 6.19 2.4 2.2 2.8
4P/4D 8.13 2.8 2.2 2.8
NSX1200 DC 2P/2D 8.9 - - 2.8
B-3
recommendations
Power connections
Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs

DB112168.eps
NSX100/160/250 NSX400/630/1200
DC DC
Bars L (mm) y 25 y 32
DB115656.eps
I (mm) d + 10 d + 15
d (mm) y 10 y 15
400
e (mm) y6 3 y e y 10
d (mm) 8.5 10.5
I
L Lugs L (mm) y 25 y 32
L
(mm) 8.5 10.5
e Tightening torque (Nm) (1) 15 50
Tightening torque (Nm) (2) 5 20
(1) Tightening torque for lugs or bars on the circuit breaker.
(2) Tightening torque for rear connections or terminal extensions on plug-in base.
Connection of bare cables

DB115659.eps
DB115660.eps
NSX100 to 250 DC
DB111327.eps
DB112315.eps
Cable connector. Distribution connector.
Cable Steel Aluminium

connector y 160 A y 250 A
L (mm) 20 20
DB104660.eps
S (mm) Cu/Al 1.5... 95 (1)

10... 16 25... 35 50...185
150 max. flexible
Tightening 12 15 20 26
torque (Nm)
6-cable distribution connector (copper or aluminium)
L (mm) 15 or 30
S (mm) Cu/Al 1.5... 6 (1) 8... 35
Tightening 4 6
torque (Nm)
(1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm2, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule.
NSX400 to 630 DC
DB111326.eps
DB112316.eps
Cable connector. Distribution connector.
Cable connector 2-cable connector

L (mm) 20 30 or 60
DB104660.eps
S (mm) Cu/Al 35 to 300 rigid 2 x 85 to 2 x 240 rigid

240 max. flexible 240 max. flexible
Tightening 31 31
torque (Nm)
NSX1200 DC
2-cable connector
L (mm) 30 or 60
DB111326.eps
S (mm) Cu/Al 2 x 85 to 2 x 240 rigid

240 max. flexible
Tightening 31
torque (Nm)
B-4
Safety clearances, minimum distances
and insulation of live parts
Minimal distance between two adjacent circuit When installing a Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC circuit breaker, minimum distances
breakers (safety clearances) must be maintained between the device and panels, bars and
A1 other protection devices installed nearby. These distances, which depend on the
DB402628.eps
A2 ultimate breaking capacity, are defined by tests carried out in accordance with
standard IEC 60947-2.
If installation conformity is not checked by type tests, it is also necessary to:
b use insulated bars for circuit breaker connections
b block off the busbars using insulating screens.
Terminal shields, interphase barriers and the insulation kit are recommended and
may be mandatory depending on the utilisation voltage and the type of installation
(fixed, withdrawable).
Minimal distance between the circuit breaker and Minimal distance between the circuit breaker and top, bottom or side panels
front or rear panels
DB402630.eps
DB402629.eps
DB413245.eps
D1
Devices with long or short terminal shields.
Dimensions (mm) Insulation, insulated bars or Bare sheetmetal

painted sheet metal
Compact circuit breaker C1 D1 D2 C2 D1 D2 A1 (2) A2 (3) B
NSX100-250 DC U y 250 V 0 30 30 5 35 35 0 10 0
U y 500 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 35 35 0 20 0
U y 750 V 0 30 (4) 30 (4) 20 (4) 35 (4) 35 (4) 0 - 0
NSX400-630 DC U y 250 V 0 30 30 5 60 60 0 10 0
U y 500 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 60 60 0 20 0
U y 750 V 0 30 (4) 30 (4) 20 (4) 100 (4) 100 (4) 0 - 0
NSX1200 DC (5) U y 300 V 0 30 30 10 60 60 0 - 0
U y 600 V 0 30 30 20 100 100 0 - 0
(1) Distance must be doubled with interphase barriers.
(2) For Compact NSX DC with long or short terminal shields.
(3) For Compact NSX DC without terminal shields.
(4) For voltage > 500 V, terminal shields are mandatory. The length of terminal shields (long or short terminal shields) should be considered.
(5) For Compact NSX1200 DC, terminal shields are required and are supplied with the circuit breaker.
The mandatory distances when installing Compact NSX DC circuit breakers are calculated from the device case, not taking into account the terminal shields or the
interphase barriers.
Terminal shield configuration

NSX400/630/1200, NSX400/630 NA
NSX400/630 NSX1200
Circuit breaker 3P 3P 4P 4P 4P 2P
construction (4P platform)
Pole connection 3P in series 2P in series 3P in series 4P in series 2P parallel -
Terminal shield 3P 3P 4P 4P 4P 4P
construction
upstream LV438291 LV432593 LV438294 LV432594 LV438293 LV438293
upstream with LV438291 LV432593 or LV438294 LV432594 or LV432592 - -
rear connection LV432591 (short) (short)
downstream LV438291 LV438292 LV438295 LV438293 LV438293 LV438293
DB403294.eps
DB403289.eps
DB403290.eps
DB403288.eps
DB403291.eps
DB115861.eps
DB418517.eps
DB417745.eps
DB115854.eps
DB115855.eps
DB115853.eps
B-5
recommendations
Temperature derating
These values are valid for fixed and withdrawable When the ambient temperature is greater than 40 C, overload-protection
circuit breakers with or without terminal shields. characteristics are slightly modified.
To determine tripping times using time/current curves, use the values of the current
indicated in the table below, corrected to take into account the ambient temperature.
Compact NSX DC temperature derating

NSX DC configuration Type of trip Rating In (A) for a given temperature
unit Ambient Ambient Ambient Ambient Ambient Ambient Ambient
temp. 40 C temp. 45 C temp. 50 C temp. 55 C temp. 60 C temp. 65 C temp. 70 C
NSX100 DC 1/2P TM16D 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
1P 250 V - 2P 500 V TM25D 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
TM30D 32 31.3 30.5 30 29.5 29 28.5
TM40D 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
TM50D 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
TM63D 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
TM80D 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
TM100D 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
NSX160 DC 1/2P TM125D 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
1P 250 V - 2P 500 V TM160D 160 156 152 147 144 140 136
NSX100 DC 3/4P y 500 V TM16D 16.8 16.4 16 15.5 15.2 14.7 14.5
TM25D 26.3 25.7 25.2 24.7 24.2 23.1 22.1
TM32D 33.6 33 32 31.5 31 30.5 30
TM40D 42 41 40 39 38 37 36
TM50D 53 51 50 49 48 47 46
TM63D 66 65 63 61 60 58 57
TM80DC 84 82 80 78 76 74 71
TM100DC 105 102 100 97 95 92 89
NSX160 DC 3/4P y 500 V TM125DC 131 128 125 122 119 114 111
TM160DC 168 164 160 154 151 147 143
NSX250 DC 3/4P y 500 V TM200DC 210 205 200 194 189 184 179
TM250DC 250 240 235 230 220 210 200
NSX100 DC 3/4P > 500 V TM16D 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
TM25D 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
TM32D 32 31.3 30.5 30 29.5 29 28.5
TM40D 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
TM50D 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
TM63D 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
TM80DC 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
TM100DC 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
NSX160 DC 3/4P > 500 V TM125DC 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
TM160DC 160 156 152 147 144 140 136
NSX250 DC > 500 V TM200DC 200 195 190 185 180 175 170
TM250DC 230 225 220 210 200 190 180
NSX400 DC y 500 V TM250DC 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A
TM320DC 320 A 320 A 320 A 320 A 320 A 315 A 300 A
TM400DC 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 380 A 370 A
NSX400 DC > 500 V TM250DC 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A 250 A
TM320DC 320 A 320 A 320 A 320 A 315 A 305 A 290 A
TM400 DC 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 385 A 370 A 350 A
NSX630 DC y 500 V TM500DC 500 A 495 A 480 A 465 A 450 A 435 A 420 A
TM600DC 600 A 600 A 595 A 570 A 545 A 520 A 490 A
NSX630 DC > 500 V TM500DC 500 A 500 A 500 A 500 A 490 A 480 A 460 A
TM600DC - - - - - - -
NSX1200 DC 600 V TM630DC 630 A 630 A 630 A 630 A 630 A 610 A 585 A
TM800DC 800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 795 A 770 A 745 A
TM1000DC 1000 A 1000 A 1000 A 985 A 955 A 930 A 900 A
TM1200DC 1200 A 1160 A 1115 A 1085 A 1040 A 995 A 955 A
NSX400 NA DC y 500 V 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A
NSX400 NA DC > 500 V 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 400 A
NSX600 NA DC y 500 V 630 A 600 A 580 A 560 A 540 A 520 A 500 A
NSX600 NA DC > 500 V 605 A 585 A 570 A 550 A 530 A 505 A 485 A
Example: Compact NSX100 DC equipped with a TM80DC trip unit has a rating of:
b 84 A at 40 C
b 78 A at 55 C.
B-6
Characteristics of circuit breakers with
parallel connection of poles
When poles are connected in parallel,the trip unit Type of Pole Type of Equivalent Magnetic Breaking
corresponding to the maximum circuit breaker rating is circuit connections trip unit rated threshold capacity
never used, for safety reasons related to temperature breaker current (1) Im (A) Icu (kA)
rise.The heating conditions are modified.The table In (A) 20 %
opposite indicates the new thermal ratings that should at 40 C
be used for 2P, 3P and 4P circuit breakers. NSX100F DC 250 V 500 V
NSX100F DC 2P in parallel TM16D 40 520 36 -
2-pole TM25D 63 800
TM30D 80 800
TM40D 100 1400
TM50D 125 1400
TM63D 158 1400
See TM80D 200 1600
example 2
(see page
A-8)
NSX100F DC 3P in parallel TM16D 58 780 Please -
3-pole TM25D 90 1200 consult
us
TM32D 115 1650
TM40D 144 2100
TM50D 180 2100
TM63D 227 2100
TM80DC 288 2400
TM16G 58 240
TM25G 90 300
TM40G 144 300
TM63G 227 450
TM80G 288 750
TM100G 360 1200
NSX100F DC 4P in parallel TM16D 74 1040 Please -
4-pole TM25D 115 1600 consult
us
TM32D 147 2200
TM40D 184 2800
TM50D 230 2800
TM63D 290 2800
TM80DC 368 3200
TM16G 74 320
TM25G 115 400
TM40G 184 400
TM63G 290 600
TM80G 368 1000
TM100G 460 1600
2 x 2P (in TM16D 37 520 36 36
parallel) TM25D 58 800
in series
TM32D 74 1100
TM40D 46 1400
TM50D 115 1400
TM63D 145 1400
TM80DC 184 1600
TM16G 37 160
TM25G 58 200
TM40G 46 200
TM63G 145 300
TM80G 184 500
TM100G 230 800
(1) Rated current of the assembly with the indicated pole connections.
Example : a Compact NSX100F DC 4-pole circuit breaker with 4 poles in

parallel, equipped with a TM63D trip unit:
b an equivalent rated current of 290 A
b a fixed magnetic threshold of 2800 A.
B-7
recommendations
never used, for safety reasons related to temperature breaker current (1) Im (A) 20 % Icu (kA)
rise.The heating conditions are modified.The table In (A) at
opposite indicates the new thermal ratings that should 40 C
NSX160F DC 2P in parallel TM125D 313 2400 36 -
2-pole
NSX160F DC 3P in parallel TM100DC 360 2400 Please -
3-pole TM125DC 450 3750 consult
us
TM125G 450 1560
TM160G 576 1560
NSX160F DC 4P in parallel TM100DC 460 3200
4-pole TM125DC 575 5000
TM125G 575 2080
TM160G 736 2080
2x2P (in TM100DC 230 1600 36 36
See parallel) in TM125DC 288 2500
series
example 1 TM125G 288 1040
(see page TM160G 368 1040
A-8)
NSX250F DC
NSX250F DC 2P in parallel TM160DC 400 2500 36 -
3-pole TM200DC 500 2000 to 4000
NSX250F DC 3P in parallel TM160DC 576 3750 Please -
3-pole TM200DC 720 3000 to 6000 consult
us
TM200G 720 1560
TM250G 900 1875
NSX250F DC 4P in parallel TM160DC 736 5000
4-pole TM200DC 920 4000 to 8000
TM200G 920 2080
TM250G 1150 2500
2x2P (in TM160DC 368 2500 36 36
parallel) TM200DC 460 2000 to 4000
in series
TM200G 460 1040
TM250G 575 1250
Example : a Compact NSX160F DC 4-pole circuit breaker with 2x2P poles in

parallel, equipped with a TM125DC trip unit:
b an equivalent rated current of 288 A
b a fixed magnetic threshold of 2500 A.
B-8
never used, for safety reasons related to temperature breaker current (1) Im (A) 20 % Icu (kA)
rise.The heating conditions are modified.The table In (A) at
opposite indicates the new thermal ratings that should 40 C
NSX400F DC 2P in parallel TM250DC 500 1250 to 2000 36 -
3-pole TM320DC 640 1600 to 3200
3P in parallel TM250DC 750 1875 to 3000 36 -
TM320DC 960 2400 to 4800
NSX400F DC 4P in parallel TM250DC 1000 2500 to 4000
4-pole TM320DC 1280 3200 to 6400
2x2P (in TM250DC 500 1250 to 2000 36 36
parallel) TM320DC 640 1600 to 3200
in series
NSX630F DC
3-pole TM600DC 1065 3000 to 6000
3-pole TM600DC 1500 4500 to 9000
NSX630F DC 4P in parallel TM500DC 1650 5000 to 10000
4-pole TM600DC 1985 6000 to 12000
B-9
Installation Compact NSX DC PV
recommendations Safety clearances and minimum distances
Safety clearance using terminals shields

bb Terminal shields must be used with all DC PV circuit breakers when operating
at 1000 V DC.
bb Terminal shields can be used in option with DC PV switch-disconnectors
(U y 1000 V DC).
Minimal distance between two Minimal distance between the device
adjacent devices and panels
A1
DB413830.eps
DB415722.eps
D1
D3
C1
Dimensions (mm) Insulation, insulated bars or painted sheet metal

C1 D1 D3 A1
NSX80-500 TM DC PV 30 30 30 30
NSX100-500 NA DC PV 30 30 30 30
NSX630b-1600 NA DC PV 30 30 30 30
Minimal distance between the device and panels

C1 C2
DB416420.eps
0.8 min.
DB416421.eps
D1
Fiber
insulating
plate
Fiber
insulating
plate
D2
Dimensions (mm) C1 C2 D1 D2
NSX80 to 200 DC PV 13 13 13 13
NSX250 to 500 DC PV 25.4 25.4 25.4 25.4
Note: the thermal behaviour of switchgear and enclosures warrants careful monitoring. PV generator boxes and array boxes are usually installed outdoors
and exposed to the elements. In the event of high ambient temperatures, high IP levels could reduce air flow and thermal power dissipation.
In addition, the way switchgear devices achieve high voltage operation - i.e. through the use of poles in series - increases their temperature. Special attention
should therefore be paid to the temperature of switchgear inside outdoor enclosures on the DC side.
Schneider Electric recommend to check the installation as per IEC 61439 or any other equivalent standard.
B-10
Safety clearance with interphase barriers
PB110838_71.eps
bb Interphase barriers can used only with DC PV switch-disconnectors

(U y 1000 V DC).
Minimal distance between Minimal distance Rear panel:
two adjacent devices between the device insulation screen
and panels mandatory
A1 Front
DB413832.eps
DB413833.eps
DB413834.eps
panel
D1/D2
with short heatsinks and
D3 Insulating
C1 screen is
PB110839_69.eps
(1)
mandatory
(1) Dimensions of the insulating screen are identical as for the circuit breaker (see page B-10).
Dimensions (mm) Insulation, painted sheet Sheetmetal

metal
C1 D1 D3 C1 D2 D3 A1
NSX100-200 NA DC PV 50 50 100 50 100 100 50
NSX400-500 NA DC PV 70 70 100 70 100 100 70
NSX630b-1600 NA DC PV 70 70 125 70 100 125 70
with long heatsinks and
Note: the thermal behaviour of switchgear and enclosures warrants careful monitoring. PV generator boxes and array boxes are usually installed outdoors
and exposed to the elements. In the event of high ambient temperatures, high IP levels could reduce air flow and thermal power dissipation.
In addition, the way switchgear devices achieve high voltage operation - i.e. through the use of poles in series - increases their temperature. Special attention
should therefore be paid to the temperature of switchgear inside outdoor enclosures on the DC side.
Schneider Electric recommend to check the installation as per IEC 61439 or any other equivalent standard.
B-11
Installation
recommendations
Compact NSX DC PV
Compact switch-disconnectors have been tested for

operation in industrial atmospheres. It is recommended that
the equipment be cooled or heated to the proper operating
temperature and kept free of excessive vibration and dust.
DC PV switch-disconnectors
Compact NSX NA DC PV
IP Bottom Bottom Top Top Top series Maximum current (A): Ith Cooper
interphase terminal interphase terminal connection cable
40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C
barrier shield barrier shield section (1)
NSX100 NA DC PV 4P
IP0 3 (LV429329) No 1 (LV429329) No Short 2 x LV438328 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Cu 35 mm2
IP4X No LV429518 No LV438327 Short 2 x LV438328 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Cu 35 mm2
NSX160 NA DC PV 4P
IP0 3 (LV429329) No 1 (LV429329) No Long 2 x LV438339 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 Cu 70 mm2
NSX200 NA DC PV 4P
IP0 3 (LV429329) No 1 (LV429329) No Long 2 x LV438339 200 200 200 200 195 185 170 Cu 95 mm2
NSX400 NA DC PV 4P
IP3X No LV432594 No LV438337 LV438338 400 400 400 400 400 390 380 Cu 240 mm2
IP0 3 (LV432570) No 1 (LV429329) No LV438338 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 Cu 240 mm2
NSX500 NA DC PV 4P
IP3X No LV432594 No LV438337 LV438338 500 500 490 470 450 435 420 Cu 2 x 150 mm2
IP0 3 (LV432570) No 1 (LV429329) No LV438338 500 500 500 500 500 500 480 Cu 2 x 150 mm2
DC PV overcurrent protection
Compact NSX TM DC PV
Maximum current (A): Ith Cooper
For Compact NSX the overload protection is calibrated cable
20 C 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C
section (1)
at 40 C and for C60 DC PV at 20 C. This means that
when the ambient temperature is less or greater than NSX80 TM DC PV
these temperatures, the Ir protection pickup is slightly 88 86 84 82 80 77 75 72 69 66 63 Cu 25 mm2
modified. NSX125 TM DC PV
b Temperature rise for Compact range have been 137.5 135 131 128 125 121 116 112 108 103 98 Cu 50 mm2
checked with terminal shields (mandatory) heatsink on NSX160 TM DC PV
top, four cables on bottom connections with section 176 172 168 164 160 153 147 142 136 130 124 Cu 70 mm2
and length according to IEC60947-1 Table 9 and 10. NSX200 TM DC PV
b Values in the tables are provided for vertical 194 189 183 178 172 167 161 155 149 142 136 Cu 95 mm2
mounting only. In case of horizontal mounting consult 200 200 200 200 200 188 182 175 168 160 153 Cu 95 mm2 (*)
us. To obtain the tripping time for a given temperature: NSX250 TM DC PV
v see the tripping curves for 20 or 40 C 302 295 288 280 250 243 235 228 220 210 197 Cu 120 mm2
v determine tripping times corresponding to the Ir NSX320 TM DC PV
value (thermal setting on the device), corrected for the 371 362 352 342 320 309 297 286 273 261 248 Cu 185 mm2
breaker ambient temperature as indicated in the tables NSX400 TM DC PV
below. 455 444 433 421 400 386 372 358 343 327 311 Cu 240 mm2
NSX500 TM DC PV
557 542 526 511 495 478 461 444 426 405 384 Cu 2x150 mm2
(1) Temperature rise have been checked with four cables on bottom connections with section and length according to IEC60947-1 Table 9
a. When used in array boxes, with short connection to string protections the cross section of the bars or cables shall have a higher cross section.
b. When cables have a cross section lower than the value indicated an additional 0.9 derating coefficient shall be applied.
Values in the tables are provided for vertical mounting only.
(*) Take into account this derating line for products with date code over --15011.
B-12
Temperature derating -
Power dissipation / Resistance
Compact NSX630b to 1600 DC PV switch-disconnectors (1)

All the given values comes from connections tests.
For other kind of connections (rear horizontal/rear vertical) the values remain the same.
DC PV switch-disconnector
Compact NSX NA DC PV
IP Bottom Bottom Top Top Top series Maximum current (A): Ith Copper cable
interphase terminal interphase terminal connection section
barrier shield barrier shield 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C
NSX630b NA DC PV 4P
IP2X No 33629 No LV438968 2 x LV438966 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 Cu 2 x 185 mm2
IP0 3 (33646) No 1 (LV438967) No 2 x LV438966 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 Cu 2 x 185 mm2
NSX800 NA DC PV 4P
IP2X No 33629 No LV438968 2 x LV438966 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 Cu 2 x 240 mm2
IP0 3 (33646) No 1 (LV438967) No 2 x LV438966 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 Cu 2 x 240 mm2
NSX1000 NA DC PV 4P
IP2X No 33629 No LV438968 2 x LV438966 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Bar Cu 2 x 60 x 5 mm
IP0 3 (33646) No 1 (LV438967) No 2 x LV438966 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Bar Cu 2 x 60 x 5 mm
NSX1250 NA DC PV 4P
NSX1600 NA DC PV 4P
(1) For a switch-disconnector mounted in horizontal position, the derating to be applied is equivalent to that of a front or horizontal rear connected
switch-disconnector.
The values indicated in the tables opposite are

Compact NSX80 TM to 500 TM DC PV switch-disconnectors
typical values. Version Fixed device
Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W) TM
The value indicated in the table is the power R/pole P/pole
dissipated at IN, four-pole switchboard (these values NSX80 TM DC PV 1 6.40
can be higher than the power calculated on the NSX100 TM DC PV 0.72 7.20
basis of the pole resistance). Measurement and NSX125 TM DC PV 0.68 10.63
calculation of the dissipated power are carried out in NSX160 TM DC PV 0.49 12.54
compliance with the recommendations of Annex G NSX200 TM DC PV 0.44 17.60
of standard IEC 60947-2. NSX250 TM DC PV 0.33 20.63
Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (m) NSX320 TM DC PV 0.215 22.02
The value of the resistance per pole is provided as NSX400 TM DC PV 0.16 25.60
a general indication for a new device.
NSX500 TM DC PV 0.134 33.50
The value of the contact resistance must be
determined on the basis of the measured voltage
drop, in accordance with the manufacturers test Compact NSX630b NA to 1600 NA DC PV switch-disconnectors
procedure. Version Fixed device
NA
Note: this measurement is not sufficient to determine
the quality of the contacts, i.e. the capacity of the circuit
R/pole P/pole
breaker to carry its rated current. NSX630b NA DC PV 0.029 11.4
NSX800 NA DC PV 0.029 18.7
NSX1000 NA DC PV 0.030 29.7
NSX1250 NA DC PV 0.030 47.3
NSX1600 NA DC PV 0.033 74.0
B-13
Installation Masterpact NW10 to NW40
recommendations
DC - DC PV
Installation in switchboard
Possible positions
DB402631.eps
DB402632.eps
DB402633.eps
Power supply
The plus and minus polarities (LINE + and LINE -) of the power supply must be
connected as indicated in the Dimensions and connection chapter.
DB402634.eps
Mounting the circuit-breaker

It is important to distribute the weight of the device uniformily over a rigid mounting
surface such as rails or a base plate.
This mounting plane should be perfectly flat (tolerance on support flatness: 2 mm).
This eliminates any risk of deformation which could interfere with correct operation
of the circuit breaker.
Masterpact devices can also be mounted on a vertical plane using the special
brackets.
DB402635.eps
DB402636.eps
Mounting on rails.
DB402637.eps
Mounting with vertical brackets.
B-14
Door interlock
Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the craddle, Door interlock catch VPEC
this device inhibits opening of the cubicle door when
the circuit breaker is in connected or test position. Y
DB402638.eps
It the breaker is put in the connected position with the
door open, the door may be closed without having to
disconnect the circuit breaker.
Catch not supplied
Dimensions (mm)
Type DC (1) (2)
NW10-40 DC (versions C-D) 215 215
NW10-40 DC (version E) 330 215
Type DC PV (1) (2)
NW10-40 DC PV (version D) 215 215
Breaker in connected or test position

Door cannot be opened
DB402639.eps
Breaker in disconnected position

Door can be opened
DB402640.eps
Note:
The door interlock can either be mounted on the right side or
the left side of the breaker.
F : Datum.
B-15
recommendations
DC - DC PV
Cable-type door interlock - Connection of
MN, MX and XF voltage releases
This option prevents door opening when the circuit breaker is closed and prevents
circuit breaker closing when the door is open.
For this, a special plate associated with a lock and a cable is mounted on the right
side of the circuit breaker.
With this interlock installed, the source changeover function cannot be implemented.
DB402737.eps
DB402738.eps
DB402739.eps
Wiring of voltage releases

During pick-up, the power consumed is approximately 150 to 200 VA. For low control
voltages (12, 24, 48 V), maximum cable lengths are imposed by the voltage and the
cross-sectional area of cables.
Recommended maximum cable lengths (meter)

12 V 24 V 48 V
2.5 mm 1.5 mm 2.5 mm 1.5 mm 2.5 mm 1.5 mm
MN U source 100 % - - 58 35 280 165
U source 85 % - - 16 10 75 45
MX-XF U source 100 % 21 12 115 70 550 330
U source 85 % 10 6 75 44 350 210
Note: the indicated length is that of each of the two wires.
B-16
Power connection
Cable connections
DB402740.eps
DB402741.eps
If cables are used for the power connections, make
sure that they do not apply excessive mechanical
forces to the circuit breaker terminals.
For this, make the connections as follows:
bb extend the circuit breaker terminals using short bars
designed and installed according to the
recommendations for bar-type power connections:
vv for a single cable, use solution B opposite
vv for multiple cables, use solution C opposite.
bb in all cases, follow the general rules for connections
to busbars:
vv position the cable lugs before inserting the bolts
v the cables should firmly secured to the framework of
the switchboard E.
DB402742.eps
Busbar connections
DB402743.eps
DB402744.eps
The busbars should be suitably adjusted to ensure that

the connection points are positioned on the terminals
before the bolts are inserted B
The connections are held by the support which is solidly
fixed to the framework of the switchboard, such that the
circuit breaker terminals do not have to support its
weight C. (This support should be placed close to the
terminals).
DB402745.eps
Electrodynamic stresses
The first busbar support or spacer shall be situated within a maximum distance from
the connection point of the breaker (see table below). This distance must be
respected so that the connection can withstand the electrodynamic stresses between
phases in the event of a short circuit.
Maximum distance A between busbar to circuit breaker connection and the first busbar
support or spacer with respect to the value of the prospective short-circuit current.
Isc (kA) 30 50 65 80 100
distance A (mm) 350 300 250 150 150
B-17
recommendations
DC - DC PV
Power connection
Clamping
DB402746.eps
Correct clamping of busbars depends amongst other things, on the tightening

torques used for the nuts and bolts. Over-tightening may have the same
consequences as under-tightening.
For connecting busbars (Cu ETP-NFA51-100) to the circuit breaker, the tightening
torques to be used are shown in the table below.
These values are for use with copper busbars and steel nuts and bolts, class 8.8. The
same torques can be used with AGS-T52 quality aluminium bars (French standard
NFA 02-104 or American National Standard H-35-1).
Examples
DB402747.eps
DB402748.eps
DB402749.eps
1 Terminal screw factory-tightened to 16 Nm.
2 Breaker terminal. Tightening torques
3 Busbar. Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque
4 Bolt. with flat washers or (Nm) with contact
Nominal (mm) Drilling (mm)
5 Washer. split lockwashers or serrated washers
6 Nut.
10 11 37.5 50
Busbar drilling
Examples
DB402750.eps
DB402751.eps
DB402752.eps
Isolation distance
DB402753.eps
Dimensions (mm)
Ui X mini
500 V DC 8 mm
900 V DC 14 mm
Busbar bending
When bending busbars maintain the radius indicated below
(a smaller radius would cause cracks).
DB402754.eps
Dimensions (mm)
e Radius of curvature r
Min. Recommended
5 5 7.5
10 15 18 to 20
B-18
DB402767.eps DB402766.eps DB402765.eps DB402761.eps DB402760.eps DB402755.eps
DB402762.eps DB402756.eps
Vertical rear connection NW40 DC - DC PV

Vertical rear connection NW10 to NW20 DC - DC PV
Horizontal rear connection NW10 to NW20 DC - DC PV
DB402759.eps
B-19
recommendations
DC - DC PV
Busbar sizing
Rear horizontal connection

DB402768.eps
Basis of tables
b maximum permissible busbar temperature: 100 C
b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
b busbar material is unpainted copper.
Example
Conditions:
b drawout version
b horizontal busbars
b Ti:50 C
b service current:2000 A.
Solution
For Ti = 50 C, use an NW20 DC - DC PV which can be connected
with three 100 x 5 mm bars or two 80 x 10 mm bars.
Masterpact Maximum Ti: 40 C Ti: 50 C Ti: 60 C

NW DC - DC PV service no. of bars no. of bars no. of bars
current 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick bars 10 mm thick bars 5 mm thick bars 10 mm thick bars
bars bars
NW10 DC 1000 3b.50 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10
NW20 HADCD-PV 2000 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.63 x 10
Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot
replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
Rear vertical connection

DB402769.eps
Basis of tables
b maximum permissible busbar temperature: 100 C
b Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
b busbar material is unpainted copper.
Example
Conditions:
b fixed version
b vertical busbars
b Ti:40 C
b service current:1000 A.
Solution
For Ti = 40 C, use an NW10 DC - DC PV which can be connected
with two 50 x 5 mm bars or one 50 x 10 mm bar.
Masterpact Maximum Ti: 40 C Ti: 50 C Ti: 60 C

NW DC - DC PV service no. of bars no. of bars no. of bars
current 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick bars 10 mm thick bars 5 mm thick bars 10 mm thick bars
bars bars
NW40 DC 4000 - 4b.100 x 10 - 4b.100 x 10 - 4b.100 x 10
NW20 HADCD-PV 2000 3b.100 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10
NW40 HADCD-PV 4000 - 4b.100 x 10 - 4b.100 x 10 - 4b.100 x 10
Note: the values indicated in these tables have been extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot
replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
B-20
Temperature derating - Power dissipation
and input/output resistance
The table below indicates the maximum current rating, for each connection type, as
a function of the ambient temperature around the circuit breaker and the busbars.
For ambient temperatures greater than 60 C, consult us.
Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections.
Version Drawout device Fixed device

Connection Rear horizontal Rear vertical Rear horizontal Rear vertical
temp. Ti 40 45 50 55 60 40 45 50 55 60 40 45 50 55 60 40 45 50 55 60
NW DC
NW10 Version C 1000 1000 1000 1000
Version D 1000 1000 1000 1000
Version E 1000 1000 1000 1000
NW20 Version C 2000 2000 2000 2000
Version D 2000 2000 2000 2000
Version E 2000 2000 2000 2000
NW40 Version C - 4000 - 4000
Version D - 4000 3900 3750 3600 - 4000
Version E - 4000 3800 3650 3500 - 4000
NW DC PV
NW20 Version D 2000 2000 2000 2000
NW40 Version D - 4000 3900 3750 3600 - 4000
Power dissipation and input/output resistance

Total power dissipation is the value measured atIN, for a 3 pole (version C, D (1))
or 4 pole (version E) breaker (values above the powerP=3RI).
(1) DC PV version D only.

Power dissipation (Watt) Power dissipation (Watt)
Version C D E C D E
NW10 DC 45 75 105 25 40 60
NW20 DC 135 230 330 90 160 235
NW40 DC 460 800 1150 360 580 850

Power dissipation (Watt) Power dissipation (Watt)
Version D D
NW20 HADCD-PV 230 160
NW40 HADCD-PV 800 580
B-21
TOOLS

pprange data sheets
ppa download area
ppproduct selectors
pp...
country support.
Compact NSX DC - DC PV Dimensions and connection
Compact (fixed version) 1P-2P NSX100-NSX160 DC

Dimensions, mounting, cutout C-2
Dimensions and mounting
Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC fixed version C-4
Compact NSX100 to 630 DC plug-in version C-6
Compact NSX100 to 630 DC withdrawable version C-8
Motor mechanism module for Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC C-10
Direct rotary handle for Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC C-11
MCC and CNOMO type direct rotary handles
for Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC fixed version C-12
Extended rotary handle for Compact NSX100 to1200 DC C-13
Front-panel accessories
Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC C-14
Power connections
Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC fixed version C-16
Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs
to Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC C-20
Connection of bare cables to Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC C-21
Compact (fixed version) 2P-3P-4P
Parallel and series connection ofpoles
Compact NSX100 to NSX250 DC C-22
Compact (fixed version) 4P
Parallel and series connection of poles
Compact (withdraw. version) 3P-4P
Parallel and series connection ofpoles
Compact (fixed version) 4P connection ofpoles,
dimensions and mounting
Compact NSX100 to NSX630 DC PV C-27
Compact (fixed version) 4P connection ofpoles,
dimensions
Compact NSX630b to 1600 DC PV C-28
Compact (fixed version) 4P front connection ofpoles,
mounting
Compact (fixed version) 4P rear connection ofpoles,
mounting
Masterpact (fixed device)
NW10 to 40 DC version C/D (3P), version E (4P)
NW10 to 40 DC PV version D (3P) C-31
NW10 to 40 DC Version C C-32
NW10 to 40 DC - DC PV Version D C-33
NW10 to 40 DC Version E C-34
Masterpact (drawout device)
NW10 to 40 DC version C/D (3P) version E (4P)
NW10 to 40 DC PV version D (3P) C-35
Presentation
>2 NW10 to 40 DC Version C C-36
Functions and characteristics NW10 to 40 DC - DC PV Version D C-37
> A-1 NW10 to 40 DC Version E C-38
Installation recommendations
> B-1 Masterpact NW10 to 40 DC - DC PV
Electrical diagrams Accessories C-39
> D-1
Additional characteristics
> E-1 External modules for Compact and Masterpact C-41
Catalogue numbers andorderform FDM121 switchboard display C-42
> F-1 FDM128 switchboard display C-43
C-1
Dimensions Compact (fixed version) 1P-2P
andconnection
NSX100-NSX160 DC
Dimensions, mounting, cutout
Dimensions
1 pole 2 poles
DB402532.eps
DB402533.eps
DB402534.eps
X X X
Y Y
(a) Short terminal shields.

Z (b) Interphase barriers.
Mounting
On backplate
1 pole 2 poles
DB416364.eps
DB416365.eps
X X
Y Y
(c) For rear connection only.
On rails
1 pole 2 poles
DB402537.eps
DB402538.eps
X X
Y Y
C-2
Front-panel cutout
On backplate
DB402539.eps
DB416366.eps
DB416367.eps
DB416368.eps
X X X X
Y Y
Y
With escutcheon
DB416369.eps
DB402543.eps
X X
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C2 C3 C6 C7 G G1 G4 G5 H
NSX100/160 DC 29 76 54 108 43 104 62.5 125 70 140 80.5
Type H1 H2 H3 H4 H6 H7 K K1 L3 L4 L5
NSX100/160 DC 161 94 188 160.5 178.5 357 17.5 35 17.5 70 35
Type P1 P2 P4 P5 P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6
NSX100/160 DC 81 86 111 83 88 14.5 29 19 38 73 29
Type R7 T T4 U
NSX100/160 DC 58 6 22 y 32
C-3
Dimensions and Dimensions and mounting
connection Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC
fixed version
Dimensions 3P 4P, 2P (4P circuit

breaker platform)
DB112061.eps
DB112062.eps
DB112063.eps
DB112064.eps
A4
A3
A A2
A1
X X X
A A2
A3
A4
C1 B B
C2 B1 B2
C3
Z Y Y
Interphase barriers. Long terminal shields (also available for NSX400/630 DC spreaders with 52.5 mm pitch:
Short terminal shields. B1 = 157.5 mm, B2 = 210 mm).
Mounting NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC NSX100 to 1200 DC

On backplate 3P 3P 4P, 2P (4P circuit breaker
platform)
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112065.eps
DB111411.eps
DB112067.eps
DB112066.eps
F2 F2 F2
F1 F1 F3
E4
X X X
E2
E1 E3
2 6 Y T(1) Y 4 6 Y 4 6
(1) The T holes are required for rear connection only.
On rails 3P 3P 4P, 2P (4P circuit breaker

platform)
F1 F1 F3
DB112068.eps
DB111412.eps
DB112069.eps
DB112070.eps
F2 F2 F2
X X X
E2
E1
2 6 Y Y 4 6 Y 4 6
C-4
On DIN rail with adapter plate (NSX100 to 250 DC)
G4
DB112071.eps
DB112072.eps
G5
G3 X
G2
G1
Dimensions (mm)
Type A A1 A2 A3 A4 B B1 B2 C1 C2 C3
NSX100/160/250 DC 80.5 161 94 145 178.5 52.5 105 140 81 86 126
NSX400/630 DC 127.5 255 142.5 200 237 70 140 185 95.5 110 168
NSX1200 DC - - - 240 - 70 - 185 95.5 110 168
Type E1 E2 F1 F2 F3 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5
NSX100/160/250 DC 62.5 125 35 17.5 70 95 75 13.5 23 17.5
NSX400/630 DC 100 200 45 22.5 90 - - - - -
NSX1200 DC 100 200 - 22.5 90 - - - - -
C-5
Dimensions Dimensions and mounting
andconnection Compact NSX100 to 630 DC
plug-in version
Dimensions 3P 4P
M
DB112640.eps
DB112641.eps
DB112642.eps
DB112643.eps
N
A11
M A10
A A2
N A1
X X X
A A2
A10
A11
B B
27 B1 B2
45
D1 C3
Z Y Y
Interphase barriers for base. Long terminal shields (also available for NSX400/630 DC spreaders with 52.5 mm pitch:
Short terminal shields on circuit breaker. B1 = 157.5 mm, B2 = 210 mm)
Adapter for base, required to mount long terminal shields or interphase barriers.
Mounting
Through front panel (N) 3P 3P 4P
NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC NSX100 to 630 DC
F1 F1 F3
DB112648.eps
DB112649.eps
DB115637.eps
DB112650.eps
N F2 F2 F2
E10 E12 X X Y
X
E9 E11
F4 F4 F4 4 6
2 6 4 6
F5 F5 F6
Y Y Y
C-6
On backplate (M) 3P 4P
Front connection (an insulating screen is supplied with the base and must be fitted between the base and the backplate)
F1 F3
DB112654.eps
DB112655.eps
DB112656.eps
F2 F2
E14 X X
E13
2 6 4 6
Y Y
Connection by exterior-mounted rear connectors
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112657.eps
DB112658.eps
DB112659.eps
F1 F2
F2 F3
E14 E16 X X
E13 E15
2 6 T1(1) 4 6
Y Y
(1) The T1 holes are required for rear connection only.
Connection by interior-mounted rear connectors
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112660.eps
DB112661.eps
DB112662.eps
F1 F2
F2 F3
E14
E18 X
X
E13 E17
2 6 T1(1) 4 6
Y Y
On rails 3P 4P
F7 F8
DB112663.eps
DB112664.eps
DB112665.eps
F9 F9
U
X X
E20
E19
2 6 4 6
Y Y
Type A A1 A2 A10 A11 B B1 B2 C3 D1 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15

NSX100/160/250 DC 80.5 161 94 175 210 52.5 105 140 126 75 95 190 87 174 77.5 155 79
NSX400/630 DC 127.5 255 142.5 244 281 70 140 185 168 100 150 300 137 274 125 250 126
Type E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 T1 U
NSX100/160/250 DC 158 61 122 37.5 75 35 17.5 70 54.5 109 144 70 105 35 24 y 32
NSX400/630 DC 252 101 202 75 150 45 22.5 90 71.5 143 188 100 145 50 33 y 35
C-7
withdrawable version
Dimensions 3P 4P
M
DB112644.eps
DB112645.eps
DB112646.eps
DB112647.eps
N
A10
M A12 A11
N
X X X
A13 A11
A10
B3 B3
27 B4 B6
45 B5 B7
D1 C3 Y Y
Z
M
DB112681.eps
C3 32
Z
Interphase barriers for base. Long terminal shields.
Short terminal shields on circuit breaker. Adapter for base, required to mount long terminal shields or interphase barriers.
Mounting
Through front panel (N) 3P 3P 4P
NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC NSX100 to 630 DC
N F1 F1 F3
DB112651.eps
DB112652.eps
DB115638.eps
DB112653.eps
F2 F2 F2
3 E10 E12 X X X
E9 E11
F10 F10 4 6 F10 4 6

2 6
F11 F11 F12
Y Y Y
C-8
On backplate (M) 3P 4P
Front connection (an insulating screen is supplied with the base and must be fitted between the base and the backplate)
F1 F3
DB112682.eps
DB112655.eps
DB112656.eps
F2 F2
E14 X X
E13
2 6 4 6
Y Y
Connection by exterior-mounted rear connectors
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112683.eps
DB112658.eps
DB112659.eps
F1 F2
F2 F3
E14 E16 X X
E13 E15
2 6 T1(1) 4 6
Y Y
Connection by interior-mounted rear connectors
F1 F1 F1 F1 F1
DB112684.eps
DB112661.eps
DB112662.eps
F1 F2
F2 F3
E14
E18 X
X
E13 E17
2 6 T1(1) 4 6
Y Y
On rails 3P 4P
F7 F8
DB112685.eps
DB112664.eps
DB112665.eps
F9 F9
U
X X
E20
E19
2 6 4 6
Y Y
Type A10 A11 A12 A13 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 C3 D1 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14
NSX100/160/250 DC 175 210 106.5 103.5 92.5 185 216 220 251 126 75 95 190 87 174 77.5 155
NSX400/630 DC 244 281 140 140 110 220 250 265 295 168 100 150 300 137 274 125 250
Type E15 E16 E17 E18 E19 E20 F1 F2 F3 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 T1 U
NSX100/160/250 DC 79 158 61 122 37.5 75 35 17.5 70 70 105 35 74 148 183 24 y 32
NSX400/630 DC 126 252 101 202 75 150 45 22.5 90 100 145 50 91.5 183 228 33 y 35
C-9
connection Motor mechanism module
for Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC
Dimensions 3P 4P, 2P(4P circuit

breaker platform)
Fixed circuit breaker
DB112693.eps
DB112694.eps
DB112695.eps
DB112696.eps
A17
A15 X X X
A14 A16
5...8
B8 B8
C4
B9 B9
C5/C6
B B
B1 B2
Y Y
Z
C5: without keylock
C6: with keylock
Plug-in circuit breaker
M M
DB112697.eps
DB112698.eps
N N
5...8
27
45
D1 C5
Z
Withdrawable circuit breaker
M M
DB112699.eps
DB112700.eps
N N
X
5...8
27
45
D1 C5 32
Z
Type A14 A15 A16 A17 B B1 B2 B8 B9 C4 C5 C6 D1

NSX100/160/250 DC 27.5 73 34.5 62.5 52.5 105 140 45.5 91 143 182 209.5 75
NSX400/630 DC 40 123 52 100 70 140 185 61.5 123 215 256 258 100
NSX1200 DC 40 123 52 100 70 140 185 61.5 123 215 - 258 -
C-10
Direct rotary handle
for Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC
Dimensions 3P 4P, 2P (4P circuit

breaker platform)
Fixed circuit breaker
B10
DB112701.eps
DB112702.eps
DB112703.eps
DB112704.eps
I
60
A15 X X X
60
A14 O
A18
B8 B8
B9 B9
C7
B B
C8/C9 B1 B2
Z Y Y
C8: without keylock

C9: with keylock
Plug-in circuit breaker
M M
DB112705.eps
DB112706.eps
N N
27
45
D1 C8
Z

M M
DB112708.eps
DB112707.eps
N N
27
45
D1 C8 32
Type A14 A15 A18 B B1 B2 B8 B9 B10 C7 C8 C9 D1

NSX100/160/250 DC 27.5 73 9 52.5 105 140 45.5 91 9.25 121 155 164 75
NSX400/630 DC 40 123 24.6 70 140 185 61.5 123 5 145 179 188 100
NSX1200 DC 40 123 24.6 70 140 185 61.5 123 5 145 - 188 -
C-11
connection MCC and CNOMO type direct rotary
handles for Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC
fixed version
Dimensions
MCC type direct rotary handle
DB112712.eps
DB112713.eps
DB112714.eps
A18
A20
5...
8
X X
A19
1...3 max.
P1 B10
B11
Z B12
Y
CNOMO type direct rotary handle
DB112715.eps
DB112716.eps
DB112717.eps
LIN GERI
MER t NS
compac
N
A18 A22
X X
8
5...
push
to
trip
A21
1...3 max.
P2 B10
B13
B14
Z Y
Front-panel cutout NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630/1200 DC

MCC type direct rotary handle
DB112712.eps
DB111413.eps
DB111414.eps
100 145
5...
8
X X
41 51
50
75
100
145
Y
Y
CNOMO type direct rotary handle
DB112715.eps
DB111415.eps
DB111416.eps
N
LIN GERI
MER t NS
compac
150
119
8
5...
push
to
trip
X X
50.5 50.4
Type A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 B10

NSX100/160/250 DC 9 60 120 65 130 9.25
NSX400/630/1200 DC 24.6 83 160 82 164 5 68.75
80
Type B11 B12 B13 B14 P1 P2 119
150
NSX100/160/250 DC 69 120 65 130 125 135 Y
Y
NSX400/630/1200 DC 85 160 82 164 149 158
C-12
for Compact NSX100 to1200 DC
Dimensions
Fixed and plug-in circuit breakers
M M
DB112709.eps
DB112710.eps
N N
10
X
Cutout for shaft (mm)

Type R1
27 NSX100/160/250 DC min. 171

45 max. 600
D1 R1 47 NSX400/630/1200 DC min. 195
Z max. 600

M M
DB111417.eps
DB112711.eps
N N
Cutout for shaft (mm)

Type R2
27 NSX100/160/250 DC min. 248
45 max. 600
D1 R2 47
NSX400/630 DC min. 272
Z max. 600
Dimensions and front-panel cutout

DB111418.eps
DB111419.eps
60 45 50
A18 A18
75 X X
37.5
60 2 4.2
36
72
B10
Type A18 B10 D1 B10
37.5
Y
NSX100/160/250 DC 9 9.25 75 75
NSX400/630/1200 DC 24.6 5 100 Y
C-13
Dimensions and Front-panel accessories
IP30 front-panel escutcheons

For toggle, rotary handle or motor mechanism module
DB114998.eps
DB114999.eps
DB115000.eps
DB416370.eps
X X
A
B 4
Y
For toggle or rotary handle with access to trip unit

DB115001.eps
DB115002.eps
DB115003.eps
DB115004.eps
X X
A1
B 4
Y
IP40 front-panel escutcheons

For toggle, rotary handle or motor mechanism module and protection collar
DB115064.eps
DB115010.eps
DB115011.eps
DB115012.eps
X A3 X
A2
B1 3.5 6.5
Y
Protection collars for IP40 front-panel escutcheons

For toggle
DB115021.eps
DB115022.eps
DB115024.eps
DB115023.eps
X X
A4
B2 35
Y
C-14
IP43 toggle cover
DB115030.eps
DB115031.eps
DB115032.eps
DB115120.eps
X
A5
B3 C
Y
Type A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 B B1 B2 B3 C
NSX100/160/250 DC 113 138 114 101 73 85 113 157 91 103 40
NSX400/630/1200 DC 163 211 164 151 122.5 138 163 189 122.5 138 60
C-15
Dimensions and Power connections
fixed version
Front connection without accessories

NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC NSX1200 DC
Z Z
DB115444.eps
DB115445.eps
DB115446.eps
DB417705.eps
10.5 14
14
Z
70 113.5
X X
Cables with lugs/bars Bars/cables with lugs
159.5
Connection with accessories

Long and short rear connectors
NSX100 to 250 DC
Z
DB115447.eps
DB416576.eps
43 for short RC
88 for long RC
10 8.6
13
18
70
6 20
X
NSX400/630 DC
Z
DB416577.eps
50 for short RC
115 for long RC
15 13 23.2
14
30
113.5
8
X
Bare-cable connectors
NSX100 to 250 DC
DB115450.eps
DB416579.eps
Z
DB416578.eps
Z 63
22
70
X
70
C-16
Connection with accessories (cont.)
Bare-cable connectors
NSX400/1200 DC
DB115453.eps
DB416581.eps
Z Z
DB416580.eps
46.5
14
113.5 113.5
X X
DB417704.eps
DB417703.eps
46.5
Z
159.5
Distribution connectors (for NSX100 to 250 DC only)

X
DB115456.eps
DB416582.eps
70
41
64.5
66.5 (a)
(a) NSX250 DC. Z
Right-angle terminal extensions (upstream only)
NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC
Z
DB115458.eps
DB403551.eps
DB403552.eps
Z
37.5 61 8
39.5 (b) 4
20.5 34
70 113.5
X X
(b) NSX250 DC.
C-17
fixed version

Straight terminal extensions (for NSX100 to 250 DC only)
4
DB115461.eps
DB403553.eps
Z
41
30
70
Edgewise terminal extensions NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC

Z
DB115463.eps
DB115464.eps
DB115465.eps
30
Z
23.5
58
53
42 8 42
70 113.5
4
X X
45 terminal extensions NSX100 to 250 DC NSX400/630 DC

Z
DB115466.eps
DB115467.eps
DB115468.eps
Z 10
13.5
61.5
40 48
31 8
4
70 113.5
X X
Double-L terminal extensions NSX100 to 250 DC

Z
DB115469.eps
DB115470.eps
45
4
46
35
70
C-18
Spreaders 3P 4P
NSX100 to 250 DC
E1 E3
DB115471.eps
DB115472.eps
DB115473.eps
DB115474.eps
E2 E2 F2 E2 E2 E2 C3
F1
X X X
NSX400/630 DC
Y Y
C4
Type C3 C4 E1 E2 E3 F1 F2
NSX100/160 DC 23.5 - 114 45 159 100 11
NSX250 DC 25.5 - 114 45 159 100 11
NSX400/630 DC - 44 135 52.5 187.5 152.5 15
170 70 240 166 15
One-piece spreader (for NSX100 to 250 only)

98
DB115475.eps
DB115477.eps
180.5
DB115476.eps
26
140
45 45 45
130
113.5
X
X
Y
Z
C-19
connection Connection of insulated bars or cables
with lugs to Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC
Direct connection to NSX100 to 1200 DC

DB417865.eps
DB115653.eps
Dimensions NSX100 DC NSX160/250 DC NSX400/630/1200 DC

400 Bars L (mm) y 25 y 25 y 32
d I (mm) d + 10 d + 10 d + 15
I
d (mm) y 10 y 10 y 15
L
e (mm) y6 y6 3 y e y 10
e
(mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5
Bar. Lugs L (mm) y 25 y 25 y 32
DB417866.eps
(mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5

DB115654.eps
Torque (Nm) (1) 10 15 50

Torque (Nm) (2) 5/5 5/5 20/11
Torque (Nm) (3) 8 8 20
(1) Tightening torque on the circuit breaker for lugs or bars.
L (2) Tightening torque on fixed devices for rear connectors//tightening torque on plug-in or
withdrawable devices for power connectors.
Lug. (3) Tightening torque on the plug-in base for terminal extensions.
Connection with accessories to NSX100 to 250 DC (IEC 228)

Pole pitch
Without spreaders 35 mm
With spreaders 45 mm
Accessories for NSX100 to 250 DC Dimensions With spreaders or terminal extensions
Straight terminal Double-L terminal NSX100 DC NSX160/250 DC
extensions extensions Bars L (mm) y 25 y 25
DB115656.eps
l (mm) 20 y I y 25 20 y I y 25
DB112172.eps
DB112176.eps
d (mm) y 10 y 10
400
e (mm) y6 y6
Tinned copper Tinned copper d (mm) 6.5 8.5
I
Spreaders: L Lugs L (mm) y 25 y 25
L
separate parts One-piece spreader (mm) 6.5 8.5
e Torque (Nm) (1) 10 15
DB112177.eps
DB416402.eps
Torque (Nm) (2) 5 5

(1) Tightening torque on the circuit breaker for spreaders or terminal extensions.
(2) Tightening torque on the plug-in base for spreaders or terminal extensions.
Tinned copper
Spreaders and straight, right-angle, 45, double-L and edgewise terminal extensions
are supplied with flexible interphase barriers.
For U > 600 V, the mandatory insulation kit is not
compatible with spreaders made up of separate parts.
Connection with accessories to NSX400 DC and 630 DC
Accessories for NSX400 and 630 DC (IEC 228)
Spreaders made up of separate parts for 52.5 and Pole pitch
70 mm pitch Without spreaders 45 mm
With spreaders 52.5 or 70 mm
DB115657.eps
Dimensions With spreaders With terminal extensions

Bars L (mm) y 40 y 32
DB115656.eps
l (mm) d + 15 30 y I y 34
Tinned copper d (mm) y 20 y 15
400
For U > 600 V, use of the 52.5 mm pitch spreaders e (mm) 3 y e y 10 3 y e y 10
requires a specific insulation kit. d (mm) 12.5 10.5
I
The 70 mm pitch spreaders may not be used. L Lugs L (mm) y 40 y 32
L
(mm) 12.5 10.5
Accessories for NSX100 to 630 DC e Torque (Nm) (1) 50 50
Right-angle terminal Edgewise terminal
Torque (Nm) (2) 20 20
extensions extensions
(1) Tightening torque on the circuit breaker for spreaders or terminal extensions.
(2) Tightening torque on the plug-in base for spreaders or terminal extensions.
DB112175.eps
DB112173.eps
Spreaders and right-angle, 45 and edgewise terminal extensions are supplied with
flexible interphase barriers.
Tinned copper Tinned copper
DB115658.eps
To be mounted on upstream
side.
45 terminal extensions
DB112174.eps
Mounting detail: 2 cables with lugs.

Tinned copper
C-20
Connection of bare cables
to Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC
Connection for NSX100 to 250 DC

DB115659.eps
DB115660.eps
DB112315.eps
DB112317.eps
DB111327.eps
1-cable 2-cable Distribution connector
connector connector
1-cable connector Steel Aluminium

y 160 A y 250 A
L (mm) 25 25
DB115663.eps
S (mm) Cu / Al 1.5 to 95 (1) 25 to 50 70 to 95 120 to 185
150 max. flex.
L Torque (Nm) 12 20 26 26
2-cable connector
S
L (mm) 25 or 50
S (mm) Cu / Al 2 x 50 to 2 x 120
Torque (Nm) 22
6-cable distribution connector (copper or aluminium)
L (mm) 15 or 30
S (mm) Cu / Al 1.5 to 6 (1) 8 to 35
Torque (Nm) 4 6
(1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrules.
Connection for NSX400 and 630 DC

DB112316.eps
DB111326.eps
1-cable connector 2-cable connector
1-cable connector 2-cable connector

L (mm) 30 30 or 60
DB115663.eps
S (mm) Cu / Al 35 to 300 rigid 2 x 35 to 2 x 240 rigid

240 max. flex. 240 max. flex.
L Torque (Nm) 31 31
Connection for NSX630 and 1200 DC

DB111326.eps
2-cable connector
2-cable connector
L (mm) 30 or 60
DB115663.eps
S (mm) Cu / Al 2 x 35 to 2 x 240 rigid

240 max. flex.
L Torque (Nm) 31
Conductor materials and electrodynamic stresses

Compact NSX DC circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare-copper,
tinned-copper and tinned-aluminium conductors (flexible or rigid bars, cables).
In the event of a short-circuit, thermal and electrodynamic stresses will be exerted on
the conductors. They must therefore be correctly sized and held in place by
supports.
Electrical connection points on switchgear devices (switch-disconnectors,
contactors, circuit breakers, etc.) should not be used for mechanical support.
Any partition between upstream and downstream connections of the device must be
made of non-magnetic material.
C-21
Dimensions Compact (fixed version)
andconnection
2P-3P-4P Parallel and series
connection ofpoles
2P fixed version (Compact NSX100-160 N/H DC) - 3P fixed version (Compact NSX100-250 DC)
With series connections
2 poles 3 poles
DB402545.eps
X X X X X X X X X
Y Y Y
Z Y Y Y Y Y
With parallel connections

2 poles 3 poles
DB402546.eps
DB402547.eps
X X X
Z
Y Y
4P fixed version (Compact NSX100-250 DC)

DB402548.eps
X X X X X
Y
Y
Z Y Y

2 x 2 poles 4 poles
Connection to be made by customer
DB402546.eps
DB402549.eps
DB402550.eps
DB402551.eps
X X
X
Y
Y
Z
C-22
3P fixed version (Compact NSX400-630 DC)
DB402552.eps
X X X X X X X
Y Y
Z Y Y Y Y

DB402553.eps
DB402554.eps
DB402555.eps
X X
Y
Z
4P fixed version (Compact NSX400 to NSX630 DC)

DB402556.eps
X
X X X X
Y
Z Y Y

2 x 2 poles 4 poles
DB402557.eps
DB402558.eps

DB402559.eps
DB402560.eps
X X X
Y Y
Z
C-23
andconnection
4P Parallel and series connection
of poles
4P fixed version (Compact NSX630 to NSX1200DC)
45
DB417867.eps
DB417868.eps
45 45
347
X
X 319
173.5 159.5
17
Y
Z
C-24
Compact (withdraw. version)
3P-4P Parallel and series
connection ofpoles
3P withdrawable version
Connections mounted with heat sink directed outwards
DB402561.eps
DB402562.eps
DB402563.eps
Z
Y
X X
X X
Z
Y
Connections mounted with heat sink directed inwards

DB402564.eps
DB402565.eps
DB402566.eps
Y Z
X X
X X
Y Z
DB402568.eps
DB402569.eps
DB402567.eps
Y Z
X X
X X
Z
Y

DB402570.eps
DB402571.eps
DB402572.eps
Y Z
X X
X X
Y Z
C-25
Dimensions Compact (withdraw. version) 3P-
andconnection
4P Parallel and series connection
ofpoles
DB402573.eps
DB402574.eps
DB402575.eps
Y Z
X X
X X
Z
Y

DB402576.eps
DB402577.eps
DB402578.eps
Y Z
X X
X X
Y Z
DB402579.eps
DB402580.eps
DB402581.eps
Y Z
X X
X X
Y Z

DB402582.eps
DB402583.eps
DB402584.eps
Y Z
X X
X X
Y
Z
C-26
andconnection
4P connection ofpoles,
dimensions and mounting
Compact NSX100 to NSX630 DC PV
4P fixed version (Compact NSX100-250 DC PV)
12.5 47.5
DB413515.eps
DB416371.eps
55 60
DB415913.eps
6
190.5
X X 125 X
70 625
Y
22
17.5
Z 70
35 35 35
Y
4P fixed version (Compact NSX400-630 DC PV)

15 60
DB413516.eps
67
DB416372.eps
75
DB415914.eps
356 6
X X X
200
113.5
100
32 22.5
Y
90
45 45 45
Z Y
Dimensions
DB112061R.eps
DB416373.eps
DB112064R.eps
A4
A3
A
A1
X X
A A2
A3
A4
C1 B
C2
B2
C3
Z Y
Interphase barriers. Long terminal shields (also available for NSX400/630 DC spreaders with 52.5 mm
Long terminal shields. pitch: B2 = 210 mm).
Type A A1 A2 A3 A4 B B2 C1 C2 C3
NSX100/160/250 DC PV 80.5 161 94 145 178.5 52.5 140 81 86 126
NSX400/630 DC PV 127.5 255 142.5 240 237 70 185 95.5 110 168
C-27
and connection
4P connection ofpoles,
dimensions
Compact NSX630b to 1600 DC PV
Electrical control
Front connection
DB415915.eps
DB415753.eps
(1)
(2)
254
248.5
163.5 240
X 210 327
200
X
100
254
Z
107.5 169.5 99.5
175.5 Y
182
(1) With terminal shield.
(2) With phase separator.
Rear connection
DB417789.eps
X X
DB415754.eps
100
123
107.5 35
175.5 70
182 169.5 99.5
F
Z
Front-panel cutouts
Door cutout
A
DB415756.eps
150 mini
DB415916.eps
(A)
(1) (2)
Y
264 mini 194 mini
X X 216 (1)
266 (2)
108 (1)
133 (2)
194 (1) 97 (1)

F
244 (2) 122 (2)
Z
F : Datum.
(1) Without escutcheon.
(2) With escutcheon.
C-28
Compact (fixed version)
4P front connection ofpoles,
mounting
On backplate
Y
DB415758.eps
4 6.5
X
200
100
169.5 99.5
On rails
DB415759.eps
4 6.5
X
200
100
169.5 99.5
Note: mounting parameters for electrically operated devices are identical to those for manually
operated devices.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 4-pole device.
Z is the back plane of the device.
C-29
and connection
4P rear connection ofpoles,
mounting
On backplate
Y
DB415760.eps
4 6.5
X
200
75
60 100
4 R30
169.5 99.5
270
On rails
DB415761.eps
169.5 99.5
2 6.5
100
107
117
3 6.5
35
Y
70 70
Note: mounting parameters for electrically operated devices are identical to those for manually
operated devices.
Z is the back plane of the device.
C-30
Dimensions Masterpact (fixed device)
andconnection
NW10 to 40 DC version C/D (3P),
version E (4P)
NW10 to 40 DC PV version D (3P)
Device
DB402242.eps
DB402241.eps
X X
Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail
Y
DB402244.eps
X
DB402243.eps
Safety clearances Door cutout

DB402245.eps
DB402246.eps
DB402247.eps
Insulated Metal parts Energised

parts parts
A 0 0 100 Note:
B 0 0 60 (1) Without escutcheon.
(2) With escutcheon.
A(*) An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove the arc chutes.
F : Datum. An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.
C-31
Dimensions Masterpact
DB104832.eps
andconnection
(fixed device)
NW10 to 40 DC
Version C
Connections
Horizontal rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC) Detail
DB104808.eps
DB416092.eps
DB416093.eps
Y
X
Db101278.eps
Vertical rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC) Detail
DB402252_55.eps
DB416094.eps
DB416095.eps
X DB101282.eps
Y
View A detail.
Vertical rear connection (NW40 DC) Detail

DB104816.eps
DB416096.eps
DB416097.eps
X Y
Db101314.eps
Note: View A detail.

Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
C-32
Masterpact
DB104833.eps
(fixed device)
NW10 to 40 DC - DC PV
Version D
Connections
Horizontal rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC - DC PV) Detail
DB104818.eps
DB416098.eps
DB416099.eps
X
Db101278.eps
Vertical rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC - DC PV) Detail
DB402264_55.eps
DB416100.eps
DB416101.eps
X
DB101282.eps
Y
View A detail.
Vertical rear connection (NW40 DC - DC PV) Detail
DB402268_55.eps
DB416102.eps
DB416103.eps
Y
Db101314.eps
Note:
View A detail.
C-33
DB104835.eps
andconnection
(fixed device)
NW10 to 40 DC
Version E
Connections
DB416105.eps
DB402272_55.eps
DB416104.eps
X Y
Db101278.eps
DB402276_55.eps
DB416107.eps
DB416106.eps
X Y
DB101282.eps
View A detail.

DB402280_55.eps
DB416108.eps
DB416109.eps
Y
Db101314.eps
Note:
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer. View A detail.
C-34
Masterpact (drawout device)
NW10 to 40 DC version C/D (3P)
version E (4P)
NW10 to 40 DC PV version D (3P)
Device
DB416110.eps
DB416111.eps
Y
X X
(*) Drawout position.
Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail
X Y
DB416112.eps
DB416113.eps
Safety clearances Door cutout

Db101293.eps
Db101294.eps
DB416114.eps
Insulated Metal parts Energised

parts parts
A 0 0 0
Note:
B 0 0 60 (1) Without escutcheon
(2) With escutcheon
F : Datum. X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.
C-35
DB104879.eps
andconnection
(drawout device)
NW10 to 40 DC
Version C
Connections
DB402291_55.eps
DB416115.eps
DB416116.eps
Y
Db101278.eps
X

DB402295_55.eps
DB416117.eps
DB416118.eps
Y
X
DB101282.eps
View A detail.

DB104852.eps
DB416119.eps
DB416120.eps
Y
X
Db101314.eps
Note:
C-36
Masterpact
DB104880.eps
(drawout device)
NW10 to 40 DC - DC PV
Version D
Connections
Horizontal rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC - DC PV) Detail
DB402303_55.eps
DB416121.eps
DB416122.eps
Y
Db101278.eps
Vertical rear connection (NW10 - NW20 DC - DC PV) Detail
DB104859.eps
DB416123.eps
DB416124.eps
X
Y
DB101282.eps
View A detail.
Vertical rear connection (NW40 DC - DC PV) Detail
DB402311_55.eps
DB416125.eps
DB416126.eps
Y
Db101314.eps
Note:
C-37
DB104881.eps
andconnection
(drawout device)
NW10 to 40 DC
Version E
Connections
DB402315_55.eps
DB416127.eps
DB416128.eps
X Y
Db101278.eps
DB104871.eps
DB416129.eps
DB416130.eps
X Y
DB101282.eps
View A detail.
DB416131.eps
DB402323_55.eps
DB416132.eps
Y
Db101314.eps
Note:
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8. View A detail.
C-38
Masterpact NW10 to 40
DC - DC PV
Accessories
Rear panel cutout (drawout device)

NW10 to NW40 DC - DC PV
DB416133.eps
DB416134.eps
Y
X
X
F : Datum.
Escutcheon
Fixed device Drawout device
Y Y
DB416135.eps
DB416136.eps
X X
Connection of auxiliary wiring to terminal block

DB101367.eps
Db101368.eps
One conductor only per connection point.
C-39
Dimensions Masterpact NW10 to 40
and connections
DC - DC PV
Accessories
Delay unit for MN release

Db101375.eps
DB115891.eps
6
3 4 5
S
3 6
MN
UVR
30 V
100/1C
AC/D
Chassis communication module

Modbus
Db101377.eps
C-40
External modules for Compact and
Masterpact
I/O (Input/Output) application module

DB416699.eps
DB416700.eps
24VDC I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6
I1 A1
I2
I3 O1
I4 O2
I5 O3 45 92
I6
84.8 115
IO LV434063
O1 O2 O3 A1
13 14 23 24 33 34 T1 T2
72 63.6
71
IFM - Modbus-SL interface
DB416701.eps
DB416702.eps
45 92
85 105
18 66
73
IFE - Ethernet interface

DB416697.eps
DB416698.eps
ETH1 ETH2
IFE
IFE-XX.YY.ZZ (factory set)
ETH1 LK/10-100/ACT
45 92
ETH2 LK/10-100/ACT
Module Status
84.8 105
Modbus-SL
Network Status
T LV434011
72 63.6
71
ComX 200
DB417076.eps
DB417077.eps
90 45 85 106
144 63
69
C-41
connection FDM121 switchboard display
Dimensions
DB114991.eps
DB114992.eps
96
X
96
Y
Mounting
Through panel
DB114993.eps
DB416963.eps
DB118545.eps
+ 0.8
X 92 0
X
+ 0.8
10.6 92 0
20.7 23
Y
Z
On panel
DB114996.eps
DB115121.eps
DB115122.eps
DB115270.eps
2 22.5
16.5
X 99.3
+ X
- 0.5
32
19
+0.3
15 37 20 13 2 22.5
-
+
- 1.5
33
Z
17
99.3
Y
Connector (optional).
C-42
FDM128 switchboard display
Dimensions
DB416703.eps
DB416736.eps
129
X
163
Mounting
On panel
1.5...6
DB416704.eps
DB416737.eps
DB416738.eps
100
X
30.6
17.5
39
+0
DB416739.eps
DB416740.eps
22,5 -0,30
100
100 100
100
+0
30 -0,20
C-43
TOOLS
Ecodial
Ecodial software is dedicated to LV electrical installation

calculation in accordance with the IEC60364
international standard or national standards.
This 4th generation, "Ecodial Advance Calculation 4",

offers a new ergonomic and new features:
ppoperating mode that allows easy calculation in case
of installation with different type of sources
(parallel transformers, back-up generators)
ppdiscrimination analysis associating curves checking
and discrimination tables
ppdirect access to protection settings including residual
current protections
ppeasy selection of alternate solutions or manual
selection of a product.
Compact NSX DC - DC PV Electrical diagrams
Presentation 2

Fixed circuit breakers D-2

Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers D-4
Compact NSX100 to 630 DC - DC PV

Motor mechanism D-6
Communication D-8
Compact NSX630b to NSX1600 DC PV

Fixed switch-disconnectors D-10
Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC - DC PV

Fixed and drawout devices D-12
Communication D-14
Fixed, electrically operated Masterpact NW DC - DC PV

Connection to the communication interface module D-15
Withdrawable Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Connection to the I/O and communication interface module D-16

D-1
Wiring diagrams Compact NSX100 to 1200 DC
Fixed circuit breakers
Remote operation Remote operation

MN: undervoltage release
a (+) a (+) or
MX: shunt release
DB413346.eps
SDE 81 Motor mechanism (MT)

BPO BPF A4: opening order
A2: closing order
B4, A1: power supply to motor mechanism
82 84
L1: manual position (manu)
B2: SDE interlocking (mandatory for correct operation)
D2
C2
A4
A2
B4
B2
BPO: opening pushbutton

BPF: closing pushbutton
MN MX Communicating motor mechanism (MTc) (1)

B4, A1: motor mechanism power supply
auto
0 I BSCM: breaker status and control module
or manu
A1
L1
D1
C1
a (-)
manu SDE
a (-)
Motor mechanism (MT)
NSX cord
a (220/240 V)
+ -
BSCM
HL
B4
auto 0 I
manu
A1
Communicating motor
mechanism (MTc) (1)
(1) NSX100-250 DC only.
D-2
Fixed circuit breakers
Indication contacts
DB403696.eps
Open Closed Fault Fault Closed Open
102
104
134
124
42
32
22
12
82
84
92
94
44
34
24
14
WH
RD
YE
VT
OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD CAF2 CAF1 CAO1
WH
RD
GY
131
41
31
21
121
101
81
91
11
The diagram is shown with circuits Indication contacts

de-energised, all devices open, connected and OF2 / OF1: device ON/OFF indication contacts
charged and relays in normal position. OF4 / OF3: device ON/OFF indication contacts (NSX400/630)
SDE: fault-trip indication contact (short-circuit, overload, ground fault,
Terminals shown in red O must be connected by the customer. earth leakage)
SD: trip-indication contact
CAF2/CAF1: early-make contact (rotary handle only)
CAO1: early-break contact (rotary handle only)
Colour code for auxiliary wiring

RD: red VT: violet
WH: white GY: grey
YE: yellow OR: orange
BK: black BL: blue
GN: green
D-3
Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers
Remote operation
a (+)
a (+)
DB413077.eps
SDE 81
BPO BPF
82 84
C2
D2
B4
A4
A2
84
RD
A2 WH
BL
C2 OR
A4 OR
BL
D2
B4
B2
MN MX
auto
0 I
or manu
A1
L1
D1
C1
GN
WH
BK
A1
D1/C1
L1
a (-) manu a (-) SDE
NSX cord
a (220/240 V)
+ -
HL
BSCM
B4
B4 GN
auto
0 I
manu
OR A1
A4
Communicating motor
mechanism (MTc) (1)
(1) NSX100-250 DC only.
D-4
Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers
Indication contacts Carriage switches

DB403698.eps
Open Closed Fault Fault Closed Open Connected Disconnected

42
32
22
12
82
84
92
94
44
34
24
14
42 GN
82 GN
92 GN
44 RD
84 RD
94 RD
32 YE
22 YE
12 YE
34 VT
24 VT
14 VT
314
312
352
354
102
104
134
124
WH
GY
GY
RD
VT
VT
YE
VT
OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 SDE SD CAF2 CAF1 WH CAO1 CE CD
YE
YE
GY
RD
131
121
101
BK 41
GY 31
GY 21
311
351
BK 81
BK 91
GY 11
41
31
21
81
91
11
Remote operation Indication contacts

MN: undervoltage release OF2 / OF1: device ON/OFF indication contacts
or OF4 / OF3: device ON/OFF indication contacts (NSX400/630)
MX: shunt release SDE: fault-trip indication contact
(short-circuit, overload, ground fault, earth leakage)
SD: trip-indication contact
A4: opening order
CAF2/CAF1: early-make contact
A2: closing order
(rotary handle only)
CAO1: early-break contact
L1: manual position (manu) (rotary handle only)
B2: SDE interlocking (mandatory for automatic or remote
recharging)
BPF: closing pushbutton
Communicating motor mechanism (MTc)

BSCM: breaker status and control module
D-5
Wiring diagrams Compact NSX100 to 630
DC - DC PV
Motor mechanism
The diagram is shown with circuits Motor mechanism (MT) with automatic reset
de-energised, all devices open, connected and a (+)
charged and relays in normal position.
DB114666.eps
SDE 81
BPO BPF
After tripping initiated by the "Push to trip" button or
by the undervoltage (MN) release or the shunt (MX)
release, device reset can be automatic, remote or 82 84
manual.
A4
A2
B4
B2
Following tripping due to an electrical fault (with an
SDE contact), reset must be carried out manually.
Q
auto
0 I
manu
A1
L1
manu SDE
a (-)
Motor mechanism (MT) with remote reset

a (+)
DB114667.eps
SDE 81
BPO BPF Reset
82 84
A4
A2
B4
B2
Q
auto
0 I
manu
A1
L1
manu SDE
a (-)
Motor mechanism (MT) with manual reset

a (+)
DB114668.eps
SDE 81
BPO BPF
82 84
A4
A2
Symbols
B4
B2
Q: circuit breaker
A4 : opening order
A2: closing order
B4, A1: motor mechanism power supply Q
L1: manual position (manu) auto
0 I
manu
B2: SDE interlocking (mandatory for correct
operation)
A1
L1

BPF: closing pushbutton manu SDE
SDE: fault-trip indication contact (short-circuit, a (-)
overload, ground fault, earth leakage)
D-6
DC - DC PV
Motor mechanism
Communicating motor mechanism (MTc) (1)
NSX cord
DB114669.eps
a (220/240 V)
+ -
BSCM
HL
B4
Q
auto 0 I
manu
A1
a
Schematic representation of the communicating motor mechanism (MT).
RSU screen for the communicating motor mechanism (MTc)

DB115436R.eps
DB114670R.eps
RSU utility setup screen for the communicating

motor mechanism.
Single-line diagram of communicating motor mechanism

Opening, closing and reset orders are transmitted via the communication network.
The "Enable automatic reset" and "Enable reset even if SDE" parameters must be
set using the RSU software via the screen by clicking the blue text.
"Auto/manu" is a switch on the front of the motor mechanism.
Symbols
Q: circuit breaker
BSCM: breaker status and control module
Terminals shown in red O must be connected by the customer.
(1) NSX100-250 only.
D-7
DC - DC PV
Communication
Connection of circuit breakers to the Modbus communication network

DB417986.eps
Ethernet
I
24 V DC
Modbus
A M A
24 V DC B
+24V
0V
H H
Eth2
Eth1
C
D
J +24V
0V
Eth2
Eth1
-100/A
ct/Eth1
H
H
LK/10
ct/Eth2
-100/A
H
LK/10
atus
atus
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
DC
24V
A1
O1
J
O2
O3
J dule
IO Mo
E
E
A1
T2
O3 T1
34
I6 O2 33
C
I
I5 24
I4 O1 23
C 14
I3 13
I2
C
I1
I6
C
I5
I3
I2
C
I1
+
DC
24V
A1
T2
T1
L
O2
24
O1 23
14
13
F
K L
G G
A FDM121 (TRV00121) E I/O application module (LV434063) I FDM128 (LV434128) J ULP cable
M Modbus Termination
(1)
B IFE master (LV434011) F Masterpact NW K Breaker ULP cord
(VW3A8306DRC)
C IFE (LV434010) G Compact NSX L NSX cord
D IFM (TRV00210) H ULP termination (TRV00880) Ethernet
Modbus
(1) Modbus termination is mandatory, see ULP system user guide TRV99101.
D-8
DC - DC PV
Communication
121
FDM
DB417667.eps
24VDC
I/O
application
module
ULP cable
NSX cord
Modbus-SL Ethernet
24 V DC 24 V DC
24VDC
ETH1 ETH2
IFM IFE
ULP Termination ULP Termination

OR
D-9
Electrical diagrams Compact NSX630b
to NSX1600 DC PV
Fixed switch-disconnectors
The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised,

all devices open, connected and charged and relays
in the normal position.
Remote operation
MN : undervoltage release
DB128373.eps
or
MX : shunt release
AT BPO BPF
Motor-mechanism module (1)
A4 : electrical opening order
A2 : electrical closing order
D2
C2
B4
A4
A2
B4, A1 : power supply for control devices and gear motor

(1) Spring-charging motor 440/480 V AC (380 V motor + additional resistor).
CN1 a - 440/480 V
DB128380.eps
9 11
MN MX Motor-mechanism R
module A4 A2 B4
or
Motor-mechanism
module
D1
A1
C1
A1
CN2 a - 440/480 V
D-10
Indication contacts Terminal-block marking (electrical operation)
OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : indication contacts
DB128377R.eps
MN/MX
D1/C1
D2/C2
OF3 OF2 OF1
31 21 11
32 22 12
34 24 14
B4 A4 A2 A1
D-11
Electrical diagrams Masterpact NW10 to NW40
DC - DC PV
Fixed and drawout devices
Diagrams are shown with circuits de-energised,

all devices open, connected and charged and relays in
the normal position.
Version C - DC Version D - DC Remote operation

DB404306.eps
DB404307.eps
DB105058.eps
Micrologic DC Micrologic DC
Version E - DC Version D - DC PV
DB416406.eps
DB404308.eps
Micrologic DC
Control unit Remote operation

Terminal block marking Com : E1-E6 communication SDE2 / Res SDE1 MN / MX2 MX1 XF PF MCH
E5 E6 184 / K2 84 D2 / C12 C2 A2 254 B2
E3 E4 182 82 C3 A3 252 B3
E1 E2 181 / K1 81 D1 / C11 C1 A1 251 B1
SDE2: fault-trip indication contact

or
Res: remote reset
SDE1: fault-trip indication contact (supplied as standard)
MN: undervoltage release

or
MX2: shunt release
MX1: shunt release (standard or communicating)
XF: closing release (standard or communicating)
PF: ready-to-close contact
MCH: electric motor

Note:
When communicating MX or XF releases are used, the third wire (C3,A3) must
be connected even if the communication module is not installed.
D-12
Electrical diagrams Masterpact NW10 to NW40
DC - DC PV
Fixed and drawout devices
Indication contacts Chassis contacts

Db101409.eps

OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 OF24 OF23 OF22 OF21 OF14 OF13 OF12 OF11 CD3 CD2 CD1 CE3 CE2 CE1 CT3 CT2 CT1
44 34 24 14 244 234 224 214 144 134 124 114 834 824 814 334 324 314 934 924 914
42 32 22 12 242 232 222 212 142 132 122 112 832 822 812 332 322 312 932 922 912
41 31 21 11 241 231 221 211 141 131 121 111 831 821 811 331 321 311 931 921 911
or or or or or or or or or or
EF24 EF23 EF22 EF21 EF14 EF13 EF12 EF11 CE6 CE5 CE4 CE9 CE8 CE7
248 238 228 218 148 138 128 118 364 354 344 394 384 374
246 236 226 216 146 136 126 116 362 352 342 392 382 372
245 235 225 215 145 135 125 115 361 351 341 391 381 371

OF4 ON/OFF OF24 ON/OFF indication contacts CD3 Disconnected CE3 Connected CT3 Test position
OF3 indication contacts or Combined connected-closed indication CD2 position CE2 position CT2 contacts
OF2 EF24 contacts CD1 contacts CE1 contacts CT1
OF1
OF22 or or or
EF22
CE6 Connected CE9 Connected
OF21 or CE5 position CE8 position
EF21 CE4 contacts CE7 contacts
OF14 or or
EF14
CD6 Disconnected
OF13 or CD5 position
EF13 CD4 contacts
OF12 or
EF12
OF11 or
EF11
Legend:
Drawout device only.
XXX SDE1, OF1, OF2, OF3, OF4 supplied as standard.
Interconnected connections
(only one wire per connection point).
D-13
Electrical diagrams Masterpact NW DC - DC PV
Communication
Communication architecture
DB417944.eps
Ethernet
I
24 V DC
Modbus
A M A
24 V DC B
+24V
0V
H H
Eth2
Eth1
C
-100/A
ct/Eth1
D
LK/10
ct/Eth2
-100/A
LK/10
tus
J
s Sta
Modbu
+24V tus
0V rk Sta
s Netwo
Modbu
Com
Eth2
Eth1
R
-100/A
ct/Eth1
H
H
LK/10
ct/Eth2
-100/A
H
LK/10
tus
s Sta
Modbu
tus
rk Sta
s Netwo
Modbu I6
Com I5
C
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
R I1
C
+
DC
24V
A1
O1
J
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP I4
J
I5
I6
dule
IO Mo
E
C
I6
E O2 33
O3
34
T1
A1
T2
I
I5 24
I4 O1 23
C 14
I3 13
I2
C
I1
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
DC
24V
A1
O1
1
I1
O2
2
I2
O3
3
I3
APP 4
I4
5
I5
6
I6
dule
IO Mo
A1
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
L
24
O1 23
14
13
F
K L
G G
A FDM121 (TRV00121) E I/O application module (LV434063) I FDM128 (LV434128) J ULP cable
M Modbus Termination
(1)
B IFE master (LV434011) F Masterpact NW K Breaker ULP cord
(VW3A8306DRC)
C IFE (LV434010) G Compact NSX L NSX cord
D IFM (TRV00210) H ULP termination (TRV00880) Ethernet
Modbus
(1) Modbus termination is mandatory, see ULP system user guide TRV99101.
D-14
Electrical diagrams Fixed, electrically operated
Connection to the communication
interface module
DB416707.eps
121
FDM
Color
Red E1 24 V
Black E2 0V
White E5 H
Blue E6 L
Breaker ULP
cord
Red Black White Blue
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A / Rx- D0
B / Rx+ D1
24 V
0V
Customer terminal block
External power supply External power supply

24 V DC 24 V DC
- + - +
Ethernet Modbus-SL
D0 = A / Rx-, A / Tx-
ULP cable D1 = B / Rx+, B / Tx+
24VDC
ETH1 ETH2
IFE IFM
OR
D-15
Electrical diagrams Withdrawable Masterpact NW
DC - DC PV
Connection to the I/O and communication
interface module
DB416708.eps
121
FDM
24VDC
I/O
application
Color module
Red E1 24 V
Black E2 0V
White E5 H
Blue E6 L
Breaker ULP ULP cable
cord
Red Black White Blue
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
A / Tx- D0
B / Tx+ D1
A / Rx- D0
B / Rx+ D1
24 V
0V
Customer terminal block
Modbus-SL Ethernet
24 V DC 24 V DC
24VDC
ETH1 ETH2
IFM IFE

OR
D-16
Compact NSX DC - DC PV Additional characteristics
Presentation 2

TMD magnetic trip units, tripping curves E-2
TMG magnetic trip units, tripping curves E-5

TM-DC trip units, tripping curves E-8

TM-DC trip units, tripping curves E-10
Current and energy limiting curves E-11

Compact NSX DC E-12
Compact NSX80 to 500 DC PV

TMD magnetic trip units, tripping curves E-14

Tripping curves U = 500 V DC, L/R = 5 ms E-16
Tripping curves U = 750/900 V DC, L/R = 5 ms E-17
E-1
Additional Compact NSX100 to 250 DC
characteristics TMD magnetic trip units, tripping curves
TM16D TM25D
DB413316.eps
DB413317.eps
Reflex tripping.
TM30D/TM32D TM40D
DB417919.eps
DB413319.eps
Reflex tripping.
E-2
characteristics TMD magnetic trip units, tripping curves
TM50D TM63D
DB413320.eps
DB413321.eps
TM63D : Im = 11 x In
TM80D TM100D
DB416611.eps
DB416610.eps
E-3
characteristics
TMD magnetic trip units, tripping curves
TM125D TM160D
DB416310.eps
DB416311.eps
TM200D TM250D
DB416312.eps
DB416313.eps
E-4
characteristics
TMG magnetic trip units, tripping curves
TM16G TM25G
DB416352.eps
DB416353.eps
TM25G DC : Im 4.3 x In
TM40G TM63G
DB416354.eps
DB416355.eps
E-5
characteristics TMG magnetic trip units, tripping curves
TM80G TM100G
DB416583.eps
DB416584.eps
TM80G TM100G
Im = 3.1 x In Im = 4 x In
t < 10 ms t < 10 ms
TM125G TM160G
DB416586.eps
DB416585.eps
TM160G
TM125G
Im = 3.3 x In
Im = 2.7 x In
t < 10 ms t < 10 ms
E-6
characteristics
TMG magnetic trip units, tripping curves
TM200G TM250G
DB416587.eps
DB416588.eps
TM200G TM250G
Im = 2.6 x In Im = 2.5 x In
t < 10 ms t < 10 ms
E-7
characteristics
TM-DC trip units, tripping curves
TM-DC 250 TM-DC 320

DB417746 .eps
DB417747 .eps
TM250D UPS : TM320D UPS :
Im = 625 A ... 1000 A/DC Im = 800 A ... 1600 A/DC
TM-DC 400 TM-DC 500

DB417748.eps
DB417706.eps

Im = 1000 A ... 2000 A/DC Im = 1250 A ... 2500 A/DC
E-8
characteristics
TM-DC 600
DB417707.eps
TM600D UPS :
Im = 1500 A ... 3000 A/DC
E-9
characteristics
TM-DC 630 TM-DC 800

DB417708.eps
DB417709.eps
Im = 1600 A ... 3200 A/DC Im = 2000 A ... 4000 A/DC
TM-DC 1000 TM-DC 1200

DB417710.eps
DB417711.eps

Im = 2500 A ... 5000 A/DC Im = 3000 A ... 6000 A/DC
E-10
Additional Current and energy limiting
characteristics
curves
The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is its aptitude Ics = 100 % Icu
to let through a current, during a short-circuit, that is The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NSX DC range greatly reduces the
less than the prospective short-circuit current. forces created by fault currents in devices.
The result is a major increase in breaking performance.
In particular, the service breaking capacity Ics is equal to 100 % of Icu.
The Ics value, defined by IEC standard 60947-2, is guaranteed by tests comprising
(Isc) the following steps:
DB416363.eps
Prospective b break three times consecutively a fault current equal to 100 % of Icu
Isc peak
b check that the device continues to function normally, that is:
v it conducts the rated current without abnormal temperature rise
v protection functions perform within the limits specified by the standard
Prospective v suitability for isolation is not impaired.
current
Longer service life of electrical installations
Limited Isc Current-limiting circuit breakers greatly reduce the negative effects of short-circuits
peak on installations.
Actual
current Thermal effects
Limited Less temperature rise in conductors, therefore longer service life for cables.
Isc
Mechanical effects
(t) Reduced electrodynamic forces, therefore less risk of electrical contacts or busbars
The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NSX DC being deformed or broken.
range is due to the rotating double-break technique (very rapid Electromagnetic effects
natural repulsion of contacts and the appearance of two arc Fewer disturbances for measuring devices located near electrical circuits.
voltages in-series with a very steep wave front).
Current and energy limiting curves
The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is expressed by two curves which are a
function of the prospective short-circuit current (the current which would flow if no
protection devices were installed):
b the actual peak current (limited current)
b thermal stress (A2s), i.e. the energy dissipated by the short-circuit in a conductor
with a resistance of 1 .
Example
What is the real value of a 150 kA rms prospective short-circuit (i.e. 330 kA peak)
limited by an NSX250L DC upstream ?
The answer is 30 kA peak (curve page E-12).
Maximum permissible cable stresses

The table below indicates the maximum permissible thermal stresses for cables
depending on their insulation, conductor (Cu or Al) and their cross-sectional area
(CSA). CSA values are given in mm and thermal stresses in A2s.
CSA 1.5 mm 2.5 mm 4 mm 6 mm 10 mm
PVC Cu 2.97 x 104 8.26 x 104 2.12 x 105 4.76 x 105 1.32 x 106
Al 5.41 x 105
PRC Cu 4.10 x 10 4
1.39 x 105
2.92 x 105
6.56 x 10 5
1.82 x 106
Al 7.52 x 105
CSA 16 mm 25 mm 35 mm 50 mm
PVC Cu 3.4 x 106 8.26 x 106 1.62 x 107 3.31 x 107
Al 1.39 x 106 3.38 x 106 6.64 x 106 1.35 x 107
PRC Cu 4.69 x 106 1.39 x 107 2.23 x 107 4.56 x 107
Al 1.93 x 10 6
4.70 x 106
9.23 x 106
1.88 x 107
Example
Is a Cu/PVC cable with a CSA of 10 mm adequately protected by an NSX160F?
The table above indicates that the permissible stress is 1.32x106 A2s.
All short-circuit currents at the point where an NSX160F (Icu = 35 kA) is installed are
limited with a thermal stress less than 6x105 A2s (curve page E-12).
Cable protection is therefore ensured up to the limit of the breaking capacity of the
circuit breaker.
E-11
characteristics
curves
Compact NSX DC
Current-limiting curves and thermal stress for L/R = 5 ms

Peak current U < 250 V DC: 1P Thermal stress U < 250 V DC: 1P
250 V < U < 500 V DC: 2P 250 V < U < 500 V DC: 2P
500 V < U < 750 V DC: 3P
DB417921.eps
DB417920.eps
NSX400 DC
DC NSX250 DC
DC NSX160 DC
DC NSX100 DC

Peak current U < 250 V DC: 1P Thermal stress U < 250 V DC: 1P
250 V < U < 500 V DC: 2P 250 V < U < 500 V DC: 2P
500 V < U < 750 V DC: 3P
DB417923.eps
DB417922.eps
NSX400 DC
DC
NSX250 DC DC
NSX100 DC
NSX160 DC
E-12
characteristics
curves
Compact NSX DC

Peak current U y 250 V DC: 1P Thermal stress U y 250 V DC: 1P
250 V < U < 600 V DC: 2P 250 V < U < 600 V DC: 2P
600 V < U < 750 V DC: 3P
DB418137.eps
DB418139.eps
NSX1200 DC
NSX1200 DC
NSX630 DC
5000
I peak i2t NSX630 DC
(k) (kAs)
500
I prospective kA (rms) I prospective kA (rms)

Peak current U y 250 V DC: 1P Thermal stress U y 250 V DC: 1P
250 V < U < 600 V DC: 2P 250 V < U < 600 V DC: 2P
600 V < U < 750 V DC: 3P
DB418138.eps
DB418140.eps
NSX1200 DC
NSX1200 DC
NSX630 DC 5000
I peak i2t
(k) (kAs)
NSX630 DC
500
I prospective kA (rms) I prospective kA (rms)
E-13
Additional Compact NSX80 to 500 DC PV
characteristics
TM80D TM125D
DB416348.eps
DB416349.eps
TM160D TM200D
DB416350.eps
DB416351.eps
E-14
Additional Compact NSX80 to 500 DC PV
characteristics
TM250D TM320D/400D
DB415723.eps
DB415724.eps
IEC PV TM250D IEC PV TM320D/400D
Im = 5... 10 x In Im = 5... 10 x In
TM500D
DB415725.eps
IEC PV TM500D
Im = 5... 10 x In
E-15
Additional Masterpact NW10 to NW40 DC
characteristics Tripping curves
U = 500 V DC, L/R = 5 ms
Micrologic DC 1.0 instantaneous protection

With 1250 - 2500 A sensors With 2500 - 5400 A sensors
DB104940.eps
DB104941.eps
With 5000 - 11000 A sensors

DB104942.eps
E-16
U = 750/900 V DC, L/R = 5 ms

DB104943.eps
DB104944.eps

DB104945.eps
E-17
U = 500 V DC, L/R = 15 ms

DB104946.eps
DB104947.eps

DB104948.eps
E-18
U = 750/900 V DC, L/R = 15 ms

DB104949.eps
DB104950.eps

DB104951.eps
E-19
U = 500/750 V DC, L/R = 30 ms

DB104952.eps
DB104953.eps

DB104954.eps
E-20
U = 900 V DC, L/R = 30 ms

DB104955.eps
DB104956.eps

DB104957.eps
E-21
TOOLS

pprange data sheets
ppa download area
ppproduct selectors
pp...
country support.
Compact NSX DC - DC PV Catalogue numbers
andorderform
Presentation 2
Compact NSX100 DC to NSX630DC

Choice of device F-4
Compact NSX100 DC to 1200 DC,

NSX400 NA DC to NSX630 NA DC
Choice of device F-5
Connection accessories F-6
Electrical auxiliaries F-8
Operation and locking/Interlocking F-10
Installation F-11
Compact NSX100 DC to NSX630DC

Plug-in/withdrawable accessories F-12
Spare parts:
NSX400 NA DC to NSX630 NA DC F-13
Compact INS DC PV
Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV to NSX100/500 NA DC PV
Connection accessories F-15
Electrical auxiliaries F-17
Operation and locking/Interlocking F-19
Installation F-20
Compact NSX630b to 1600 NA DCPV fixed

electricallyoperated
Complete device without motor mechanism module F-21
Device based on separate components
with or without motor mechanism module F-22
F-1
Compact NSX DC - DC PV Catalogue numbers
andorderform

Complete fixed/FC device and accessories F-23
Accessories F-24


Complete fixed/FC device and specific accessories F-27

and Compact INV100 to 250 DC
Accessories F-28
Compact INS320 to 630 DC and Compact INV320 to 630 DC

Accessories F-31

Complete fixed/FC device and specific accessories F-34

and Compact INV630b to 2500 DC
Accessories F-35
F-2
Spare parts: Masterpact NW DC - DCPV
Connection F-37
Remote operation F-38
Chassis locking and accessories F-39
Clusters F-40
Circuit breaker locking and accessories F-41
Mechanical interlocking for source changeover F-42
Indication contacts F-43
Instructions F-44
Spare parts: Masterpact NW DC - DCPV

Monitoring and control converter F-45
Order form
Compact NSX100DC to NSX250DC circuit breakers F-46
Compact NSX400DC to NSX630DC

Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors F-47
Compact NSX1200DC circuit breakers F-48
Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV to NSX100/500 NA DC PV

Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors F-49
Compact NSX630/1600 NA DCPV 4P, fixed version

Upside: front connection, 2 kit heatsink, phase separator are included F-50
Masterpact NW DC F-51
F-3
Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 DC to
NSX630DC
Choice of device
Compact NSX100/160 F/N/M/S 1P/2P

With thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
Compact NSX100F AC/DC Compact NSX100F AC/DC
DB404343.eps
Rating 1P 1d (Icu = 36 kA 250 V DC) 2P 2d (Icu = 36 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/2P)

TM16D LV438562 LV438592
TM20D LV438563 LV438593
TM25D LV438564 LV438594
TM30D LV438565 LV438595
TM40D LV438566 LV438596
TM50D LV438567 LV438597
TM63D LV438568 LV438598
TM80D LV438569 LV438599
TM100D LV438570 LV438600
Compact NSX160F AC/DC Compact NSX160F AC/DC
TM125D LV438669 LV438699
TM160D LV438670 LV438700
Compact NSX100N AC/DC Compact NSX100M AC/DC
DB404344.eps

TM16D LV438572 LV438602
TM20D LV438573 LV438603
TM25D LV438574 LV438604
TM30D LV438575 LV438605
TM40D LV438576 LV438606
TM50D LV438577 LV438607
TM63D LV438578 LV438608
TM80D LV438579 LV438609
TM100D LV438580 LV438610
Compact NSX160N AC/DC Compact NSX160M AC/DC
TM125D LV438679 LV438709
TM160D LV438680 LV438710
Compact NSX100M AC/DC Compact NSX100S AC/DC
TM16D LV438582 LV438612
TM20D LV438583 LV438613
TM25D LV438584 LV438614
TM30D LV438585 LV438615
TM40D LV438586 LV438616
TM50D LV438587 LV438617
TM63D LV438588 LV438618
TM80D LV438589 LV438619
TM100D LV438590 LV438620
Compact NSX160M AC/DC Compact NSX160S AC/DC
TM125D LV438689 LV438719
TM160D LV438690 LV438720
F-4
Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 DC to 1200 DC,
Choice of device
Compact NSX100/160/250 DC
Basic frame
3P 4P
DB115910.eps
Rating (Icu = 36 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/ 2P - 750 V DC/3P)

NSX100F DC LV438003 LV438008
NSX160F DC LV438103 LV438108
NSX250F DC LV438203 LV438208
(Icu = 100 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/ 2P - 750 V DC/3P)
push
NSX100S DC LV438018 LV438019
NSX160S DC LV438118 LV438119
to
trip
NSX250S DC LV438218 LV438219
+ Trip unit
Standard protection: trip unit TM-D/DC
DB404345.eps
Rating 3P 3d 4P 4d
TM16D LV429037 LV429057
TM25D LV429036 LV429056
TM32D LV429035 LV429055
TM40D LV429034 LV429054
TM50D LV429033 LV429053
TM63D LV429032 LV429052
TM80DC LV438029 LV438049
TM100DC LV438028 LV438048
TM125DC LV438136 LV438146
TM160DC LV438135 LV438145
TM200DC LV438246 LV438256
TM250DC LV438245 LV438255
Type G protection: trip unit TM-G
Rating 3P 3d 4P 4d
TM16G LV429155 LV429165
TM25G LV429154 LV429164
TM40G LV429153 LV429163
TM63G LV429152 LV429162
TM80G LV430080 LV430092
TM100G LV430081 LV430093
TM125G LV430082 LV430094
TM160G LV430083 LV430095
TM200G LV430084 LV430096
TM250G LV430085 LV430097
Compact NSX400/630 DC
3P 4P
DB404342.eps
Rating (Icu = 36 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/ 2P - 750 V DC/3P)

NSX250F TM-DC LV438265 LV438260
NSX320F TM-DC LV438266 LV438261
NSX400F TM-DC LV438267 LV438262
NSX500F TM-DC LV438268 LV438263
(Icu = 36 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/ 2P)
NSX600F TM-DC LV438269 LV438264
(Icu = 100 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/ 2P - 750 V DC/3P)
NSX250S TM-DC LV438275 LV438270
NSX320S TM-DC LV438276 LV438271
NSX400S TM-DC LV438277 LV438272
NSX500S TM-DC LV438278 LV438273
(Icu = 100 kA 250 V DC/1P - 500 V DC/ 2P)
NSX600S TM-DC LV438279 LV438274
Compact NSX1200 DC
Rating 2P (Icu = 50 kA 300 V DC/ 1P - 600 V DC/2P)
NSX630N TM-DC LV438361
Compact NSX100/160/250 NA (1)
With NA switch-disconnector unit
Compact NSX100NA
DB416964.eps
Rating 2P 3P 4P
100 LV429619 LV429629 LV429639
Compact NSX160NA
Rating 2P 3P 4P
160 LV430619 LV430629 LV430639
Compact NSX250NA
Rating 2P 3P 4P
250 LV431619 LV431629 LV431639
Compact NSX400/630 NA DC
3P 4P
Compact NSX400 NA DC LV438153 LV438151
Compact NSX630 NA DC LV438154 LV438152
(1) See catalogue Compact NSX LVPED208001EN for order form and configurated product.
F-5
Special connection accessories for parallel or series connection NSX100- NSX400- NSX1200
250 DC 630 DC DC
DB104731.eps
Connection accessories for parallel or series 1 connection plate LV438328 LV438338

connection of 2 poles (1) equipped with heat sink
+ 1 interphase barrier (2)
Connection plates
Connection plates for parallel connection of 3 poles 1 set of 2 connection LV438329 (3)
plates
Connection plates for parallel connection of 4 poles (3) (3)
1P short terminal shields 1 pair LV438320

2P short terminal shields 2 pairs 2x LV438320
3P terminal shields for series connection of poles 1 set LV438325 LV438291 (5)
LV438292 (5)
4P terminal shields for series connection of poles 1 set LV438326 LV438294 (5)
LV438295 (5)
4P terminal shields for parallel connection of poles 1 set LV438327 LV438293 (5) LV438293 (5)
(2P/4P)
1 long terminal shield for breaker or plug-in base 3P LV429517
DB112240.eps
4P LV429518
Connection accessories (Cu or Al) NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC

Rear connections
2 short LV429235 LV432475
DB112225.eps
2 long LV429236 LV432476

Steel connectors 1.5 to 95 mm2 ; y 160 A Set of 2 LV429246
DB112226.eps
Set of 3 LV429242
Set of 4 LV429243
Aluminium connectors 25 to 95 mm2 ; y 250 A Set of 2 LV429255
Set of 3 LV429227
DB112725.eps
Set of 4 LV429228
120 to 185 mm2 ; y 250 A Set of 2 LV429247
Set of 3 LV429259
Set of 4 LV429260
Clips for connectors Set of 10 LV429241
DB112726.eps
DB112227.eps
Aluminium connectors for 2 cables (4) 2 x (50 to 120 mm) ; y 250 A Set of 3 LV429218
(3P)
Set of 4 LV429219
(4P)
Aluminium connectors 1x (35 to 300 mm) Set of 3 LV432479
(3P)
Set of 4 LV432480
(4P)
DB112228.eps
Aluminium connectors (4) for 6 cables 6 x (1.5 to 35 mm) ; y 250 A Set of 3 LV429248
(3P)
Set of 4 LV429249
(4P)
Aluminium connectors for 2 cables 2 x (35 to 300 mm) Set of 3 LV432481
(3P)
Set of 4 LV432482
(4P)
6.35 mm voltage tap for steel or aluminium connectors Set of 10 LV429348
DB112724.eps
(1) Series connection: 2 poles = 1 connection plate.

3 poles = 2 connection plates.
4 poles = 3 connection plates.
Parallel connection: 2 poles = 2 connection plates.
3 poles = 1 set of 2 connection plates (29499).
2 x 2 poles = 4 connection plates.
(2) These connection accessories come with an interphase barrier.
(3) To be made by the customer.
(4) Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers.
(5) Refer to page B-5 for details.
F-6
Connection accessories (cont.)
Connection accessories (Cu or Al) NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC NSX1200 DC

Terminal extensions
Right-angle terminal extensions Set of 2 LV429250
DB104885.eps
Set of 3 LV429261 LV432484

Set of 4 LV429262 LV432485
Straight terminal extensions Set of 2 LV429251

DB104884.eps
Set of 3 LV429263
Set of 4 LV429264
45 terminal extension (1) Set of 3 LV429223

DB112230.eps
Set of 4 LV429224
Edgewise terminal extensions (1) Set of 3 LV429308 LV432486

DB112231.eps
Set of 4 LV429309 LV432487
Double-L terminal extensions (1) Set of 3 LV429221

DB112234.eps
Set of 4 LV429222
Spreaders from 35 to 45 mm pitch (1) 3P LV431563

DB112235.eps
4P LV431564
One-piece spreader from 35 to 45 mm pitch 3P LV431060

DB112236.eps
4P LV431061
Front alignment base (for one-piece spreader) 3P/4P LV431064
Crimp lugs for copper cable (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)

For cable 120 mm2 Set of 3 LV429252
DB404350.eps
Set of 4 LV429256
Set of 4 LV429257
For cable 185 mm2 Set of 3 LV429254 LV429254 LV429254
Set of 4 LV429258 LV429258 LV429258
For cable 240 mm 2
Set of 3 LV432500 LV432500
Set of 4 LV432501 LV432501
For cable 300 mm2 Set of 3 LV432502 LV432502
Set of 4 LV432503 LV432503
Crimp lugs for aluminium cable (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)
DB404351.eps
Set of 4 LV429505
For cable 185 mm2 Set of 3 LV429506 LV429506 LV429506
Set of 4 LV429507 LV429507 LV429507
Set of 4 LV432505 LV432505
Set of 4 LV432507 LV432507
Barriers
Interphase barriers Set of 6 LV429329 LV432570
DB115920.eps
Insulation screen
2 insulating screens for breaker (45 mm pitch) 3P LV429330
DB112242.eps
4P LV429331
push
to
trip
4P LV432579
F-7
Electrical auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts (changeover)
OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
DB404352.eps
OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452

SDE adapter, mandatory for trip unit LV429451
Voltage releases MX MN
AC 24 V 50/60 Hz LV429384 LV429404
DB404353.eps
48 V 50/60 Hz LV429385 LV429405

110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429386 LV429406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 208-277 V 60 Hz LV429387 LV429407
380-415 V 50 Hz 440-480 V 60 Hz LV429388 LV429408
525 V 50 Hz - 600 V 60 Hz LV429389 LV429409
DC 12 V LV429382 LV429402
24 V LV429390 LV429410
30 V LV429391 LV429411
48 V LV429392 LV429412
60 V LV429383 LV429403
125 V LV429393 LV429413
250 V LV429394 LV429414
MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
DB115631.eps
Composed of: MN 48 V DC LV429412

Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz LV429426
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
Delay unit of 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429427
MN 48 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Delay unit 48 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz 33680
MN110-130 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Delay unit 100-130 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz 33681
MN 220-250 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Motor mechanism
Motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter
Voltage MT100/160 MT250 MT400-630
DB112265.eps
AC 48-60 V 50/60 Hz LV429440 LV431548 LV432639

110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429433 LV431540 LV432640
220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429434 LV431541 LV432641
208-277 V 60 Hz
380-415 V 50/60 Hz LV429435 LV431542 LV432642
440-480 V 60 Hz LV432647
DC 24-30 V LV429436 LV431543 LV432643
48-60 V LV429437 LV431544 LV432644
110-130 V LV429438 LV431545 LV432645
250 V LV429439 LV431546 LV432646
Operations counter LV432648
Communicating motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter (1)
Motor mechanism module MTc 100/160 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429441
DB112265.eps
MTc 250 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV431549

+
Breaker and Status BSCM LV434205
Communication Module
+
NSX cord Wire length L = 0.35 m LV434200
Wire length L = 1.3 m LV434201
Wire length L = 3 m LV434202
U > 480 V AC wire length L = 0.35 m LV434204
(1) NSX100-250 DC only.
F-8
Electrical auxiliaries (cont.)
Communication option
IFE Ethernet interface for LV breaker LV434010
DB417415.eps
Ethernet interface for LV breakers and gateway LV434011
IFM Modbus-SL interface module TRV00210

DB111441.eps
I/O application module LV434063

DB417414.eps
User guide IFE DOCA0084EN

User guide I/O application module DOCA0055EN
ULP wiring accessories

NSX cord L = 0.35 m LV434200
DB111442.eps
NSX cord L = 1.3 m LV434201

NSX cord L = 3 m LV434202
NSX cord for U > 480 V AC L = 1.3 m LV434204
10 stacking connectors for communication interface modules TRV00217

DB115621.eps
2 Modbus line terminators VW3A8306DRC (1)

DB111443.eps
RS 485 roll cable (4 wires, length 60 m) 50965

DB115622.eps
5 RJ45 connectors female/female TRV00870

DB115623.eps
10 ULP line terminators TRV00880

DB111444.eps
10 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 0.3 m TRV00803

DB111445.eps

5 RJ45/RJ45 male cord L = 1 m TRV00810
2 wires RS 485 insulated repeated TRV00211
Power supply modules
External power supply module 100-240 V AC 110-230 V DC / 24 V DC-3 A class 2 ABL8RPS24030 (2)
DB112278.eps
External power supply module 24 V DC-1 A OVC IV

DB112736.eps
24-30 V DC 54440
48-60 V DC 54441
100-125 V AC 54442
110-130 V AC 54443
200-240 V AC 54444
380-415 V AC 54445
(1) SDE adapter mandatory for trip unit TM,TMG.
(2) See Telemecanique catalogue.
F-9
Operation and locking/Interlocking
Rotary handles NSX100-250 DC NSX400-1200 DC

Direct rotary handles
With black handle LV429337 LV432597
DB115918.eps
ON
I
With red handle on yellow front LV429339 LV432599
MCC conversion accessory LV429341 LV432606
CNOMO conversion accessory LV429342 LV432602
O
OFF

DB115917.eps

ON
I
O
OFF ON
I
With telescopic handle for withdrawable device LV429343 LV432603
OFF
Accessories
Indication auxiliary 1 early-break contact LV429345 LV432605
2 early-break contacts LV429346 LV429346
Locks NSX100-250 DC NSX400-1200 DC
Toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks
By removable device 29370 29370
DB115913.eps
push
to
trip
By fixed device for 3P/4P (open or close position) LV429371 LV432631

DB115916.eps
By fixed device for 3P/4P (open position only) LV429370 LV432630

push
to
trip
Locking of the rotary handle

Keylock adapter (keylock not included) LV429344 LV432604
DB115914.eps
ON
I
Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Ronis 1351B.500 41940 41940
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888 42888
O
OFF
Locking of the motor mechanism modules

Keylock adapter + Ronis keylock (special) LV429449 LV432649
DB115919.eps
2
Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Ronis 1351B.500 41940
/auto
I
1
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
manu O push
ON
OFF
push
Interlocking NSX100-250 DC NSX400-1200 DC

Mechanical interlocking for circuit breakers
With toggles LV429354 LV432614
DB417299.eps
With rotary handles LV429369 LV432621

DB417300.eps
ON
I
ON
I
O
OFF
O
OFF
Interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handles

Keylock kit (keylock not included) (1) LV429344 LV432604
DB112268.eps
1 set of 2 keylocks Ronis 1351B.500 41950 41950

(1 key only, keylock kit not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878 42878
(1) NSX100-250 DC only.
F-10
Installation
Installation accessories NSX100-250 DC NSX400-1200 DC

Front-panel escutcheons
IP30 escutcheon for all control types LV429525 LV432557
DB112269.eps
IP30 trip unit access escutcheon for toggle LV429526 LV432559
IP30

DB112737.eps
IP40
IP43 rubber toggle cover
1 toggle cover LV429319 LV432560
DB112738.eps
Lead-sealing accessories
Bag of accessories LV429375 LV429375
DB115615.eps
Din rail adapter

1 adapter LV429305
DB112739.eps
60 mm plate busbar adapter NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC

3P 60 mm busbar adapter LV429372 LV432623
DB111428.eps
4P 60 mm busbar adapter LV429373 LV432624
F-11
Catalogue numbers Compact NSX100 DC to
NSX630DC
Plug-in/withdrawable accessories
Plug-in/withdrawable version accessories NSX100-250 DC NSX400-630 DC

1 connection adapter for plug-in base 3P LV429306 LV432584
DB117159.eps
4P LV429307 LV432585
Auxiliary connections
1 9-wire fixed connector (for base) LV429273 LV429273
DB117160.eps
1 9-wire moving connector (for circuit breaker) LV429274 LV432523

DB117161.eps
1 support for 2 moving connectors LV429275 LV432525

DB116368.eps
9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving) LV429272 LV429272

DB115885.eps
Plug-in base accessories

2 long insulated right angle terminal extensions Set of 2 LV429276 LV432526
DB117164.eps
2 IP40 shutters for base LV429271 LV432521

DB117165.eps
Base 2P LV429265
DB117180.eps
3P LV429266 LV432516
Base 4P LV429267 LV432517

DB117181.eps
2 power connections 2/3/4P LV429268 LV432518

DB117182.eps
1 short terminal shields 2/3P LV429515 LV432591

DB117183.eps
1 short terminal shields 4P LV429516 LV432592

DB117184.eps
1 safety trip interlock 2/3/4P LV429270 LV432520

DB117171.eps
Installation and connection

Kit for Compact 3P LV429289 + LV432538 +
LV429282 + LV432532 +
LV429283 LV432533
4P LV429290 + LV432539 +
LV429282 + LV432532 +
LV429283 LV432533
F-12
Catalogue numbers: Spare parts:
spare parts
Spare parts NSX100-250 DC NSX400-1200 DC

Additional toggle extension 32595
DB115633.eps
10 spare toggle extensions (only for Compact NSX250) LV429313

DB111430.eps
5 spare toggle extensions LV432553
Bag of screws LV429312 LV432552

DB115620.eps
12 snap-in nuts (fixed/FC) M6 for NSX100N/H/L LV429234

DB111431.eps
M8 for NSX160/250N/H/L LV430554
NS retrofit escutcheon Small cut-out LV429528 LV432571

DB111432.eps
IP40 toggle escutcheon Compact NS type/small cut-out 29315 32556

DB111433.eps
1 set of 10 identification labels LV429226 LV429226

DB111438.eps
1 base for extended rotary handle LV429502 LV432498

DB111429.eps
Torque limiting screws (set of 12) 3P/4P Compact NSX100-630 LV429513 LV432513
DB111434.eps
DB111436.eps
5 transparent covers for trip unit TM, MA, NA LV429481
F-13
Catalogue numbers Compact INS DC PV
Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV
to NSX100/500 NA DC PV
Compact INS DC PV - 1 (1)

Compact INS 4P 28907
DB417876.eps
.1
.2
.4
PV - 1
Compact NSX TM DC PV 4P Connection and insulation accessories mandatory

circuit breaker
Upstream connection (x2) Upstream terminal shields Downstream terminal shields
NSX80 LV438081 connection plate LV438328 LV438327 LV429518
DB415726.eps
NSX125 LV438126 with heatsink LV438328 LV438327 LV429518

NSX160 LV438161 LV438328 LV438327 LV429518
NSX200 LV438201 LV438328 LV438327 LV429518
NSX250 LV438451 LV438338 LV438293 LV432594
NSX320 LV438452 LV438338 LV438293 LV432594
NSX400 LV438453 LV438338 LV438293 LV432594
NSX500 LV438454 LV438338 LV438293 LV432594
Compact NSX NA DC PV 4P Connection and insulation accessories mandatory
switch disconnector
Upstream connection (x2) Upstream or interphase Downstream or interphase
terminal shields barrier terminal shields barrier
NSX100 LV438100 connection plate LV438328 LV438327 LV429329 LV429518 LV429329
DB415727.eps
NSX160 LV438160 with heatsink LV438328 LV438327 LV429329 LV429518 LV429329

NSX200 LV438250 LV438328 LV438327 LV429329 LV429518 LV429329
(y 200 A at 40 C)
NSX200 LV438250 connection plate LV438339 not available LV429329 LV429518 LV429329
(= 200 A at 55 C) with heatsink (long)
NSX400 LV438300 connection plate LV438338 LV438337 LV432570 LV432594 LV432570
NSX500 LV438500 with heatsink LV438338 LV438337 LV432570 LV432594 LV432570
(1) For accessories, see catalogue INS/INV page dedicated to INS40 to 160 A.
F-14
Catalogue numbers Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV
Connection accessories (Cu or Al) NSX100-250 NSX400-630

DCPV DCPV
Rear connections
2 short LV429235 LV432475
DB112225.eps
2 long LV429236 LV432476
Terminal shield
1 short terminal shield for breaker or plug-in base 4P LV429516 LV432592
DB416407.eps

Steel connectors 1.5 to 95 mm2 ; y 160 A Set of 2 LV429246
DB112226.eps
Set of 3 LV429242
Set of 4 LV429243
Aluminium connectors 25 to 95 mm2 ; y 250 A Set of 2 LV429255
Set of 3 LV429227
DB112725.eps
Set of 4 LV429228
120 to 185 mm2 ; y 250 A Set of 2 LV429247
Set of 3 LV429259
Set of 4 LV429260
Clips for connectors Set of 10 LV429241
DB112726.eps
DB112227.eps
Aluminium connectors for 2 cables (1) 2 x (50 to 120 mm) ; y 250 A Set of 3 LV429218
(3P)
Set of 4 LV429219
(4P)
Aluminium connectors 1 x (35 to 300 mm) Set of 3 LV432479
(3P)
Set of 4 LV432480
(4P)
DB112228.eps
Aluminium connectors (1) for 6 cables 6 x (1.5 to 35 mm) ; y 250 A Set of 3 LV429248
(3P)
Set of 4 LV429249
(4P)
Aluminium connectors for 2 cables 2 x (35 to 300 mm) Set of 3 LV432481
(3P)
Set of 4 LV432482
(4P)
6.35 mm voltage tap for steel or aluminium connectors Set of 10 LV429348
DB112724.eps
F-15
Connection accessories (Cu or Al) NSX100-250 NSX400-630

DCPV DCPV
Terminal extensions
DB104885.eps
Set of 3 LV429261 LV432484

Set of 4 LV429262 LV432485
Straight terminal extensions Set of 2 LV429251

DB104884.eps
Set of 3 LV429263
Set of 4 LV429264
45 terminal extension (1) Set of 3 LV429223

DB112230.eps
Set of 4 LV429224
Edgewise terminal extensions (1) Set of 3 LV429308 LV432486

DB112231.eps
Set of 4 LV429309 LV432487
Double-L terminal extensions (1) Set of 3 LV429221

DB112234.eps
Set of 4 LV429222
Spreaders from 35 to 45 mm pitch (1) 3P LV431563

DB112235.eps
4P LV431564
Crimp lugs for copper cable (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)

DB404350.eps
Set of 4 LV429256
Set of 4 LV429257
Set of 4 LV429258
Set of 4 LV432501
Set of 4 LV432503
Crimp lugs for aluminium cable (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)
DB404351.eps
Set of 4 LV429505
Set of 4 LV429507
Set of 4 LV432505
For cable 300 mm 2
Set of 3 LV432506
Set of 4 LV432507
Barriers
Interphase barriers Set of 6 LV429329 LV432570
DB115920.eps
Insulation screen
DB112242.eps
4P LV429331
push
to
trip
4P LV432579
Note: circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors must be in "off" position when fitting the mechanical or electrical accessories.
F-16
Auxiliary contacts (changeover)
OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
DB404352.eps
OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452

SDE adapter, mandatory for trip unit LV429451
Voltage releases MX MN
AC 24 V 50/60 Hz LV429384 LV429404
DB404353.eps
48 V 50/60 Hz LV429385 LV429405

110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429386 LV429406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 208-277 V 60 Hz LV429387 LV429407
380-415 V 50 Hz 440-480 V 60 Hz LV429388 LV429408
525 V 50 Hz - 600 V 60 Hz LV429389 LV429409
DC 12 V LV429382 LV429402
24 V LV429390 LV429410
30 V LV429391 LV429411
48 V LV429392 LV429412
60 V LV429383 LV429403
125 V LV429393 LV429413
250 V LV429394 LV429414
MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
DB115631.eps

Delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz LV429426
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with fixed time delay
Delay unit of 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429427
MN 48 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Delay unit 48 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz 33680
MN110-130 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
MN 220-250 V DC/AC 50/60 Hz with adjustable time delay
Motor mechanism
Motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter
Voltage MT100/160 MT250 MT400-630
DB112265.eps
AC 48-60 V 50/60 Hz LV429440 LV431548 LV432639

110-130 V 50/60 Hz LV429433 LV431540 LV432640
220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429434 LV431541 LV432641
208-277 V 60 Hz
380-415 V 50/60 Hz LV429435 LV431542 LV432642
440-480 V 60 Hz LV432647
DC 24-30 V LV429436 LV431543 LV432643
48-60 V LV429437 LV431544 LV432644
110-130 V LV429438 LV431545 LV432645
250 V LV429439 LV431546 LV432646
Operations counter LV432648
Communicating motor mechanism module supplied with SDE adapter
Motor mechanism module MTc 100/160 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV429441
DB112265.eps
MTc 250 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV431549

MTc 400/630 220-240 V 50/60 Hz LV432652
+
Breaker and Status BSCM LV434205
Communication Module
+
NSX cord Wire length L = 0.35 m LV434200
Wire length L = 1.3 m LV434201
Wire length L = 3 m LV434202
U > 480 V AC wire length L = 0.35 m LV434204
F-17
Electrical auxiliaries (cont.)
Communication option (1)

ULP communication module
IFE Ethernet interface for LV breaker LV434010
DB417415.eps
Ethernet interface for LV breakers and gateway LV434011
IFM Modbus-SL interface module TRV00210

DB111441.eps
I/O application module LV434063

DB417414.eps
User guide IFE DOCA0084EN

User guide I/O application module DOCA0055EN
NSX cord L = 0.35 m LV434200
DB111442.eps
NSX cord L = 1.3 m LV434201

NSX cord L = 3 m LV434202
NSX cord for U > 480 V AC L = 1.3 m LV434204
10 stacking connectors for communication interface modules TRV00217

DB115621.eps

DB111443.eps
RS 485 roll cable (4 wires, length 60 m) 50965

DB115622.eps

DB115623.eps

DB111444.eps

DB111445.eps

2 wires RS 485 insulated repeated TRV00211
Power supply modules
External power supply module 100-240 V AC 110-230 V DC / 24 V DC-3 A class 2 ABL8RPS24030
DB112278.eps
External power supply module 24 V DC-1 A OVC IV

DB112736.eps
24-30 V DC 54440
48-60 V DC 54441
100-125 V AC 54442
110-130 V AC 54443
200-240 V AC 54444
380-415 V AC 54445
(1) NSX80-250 DC PV TM/NA only.
(2) SDE adapter mandatory for trip unit TM,TMG.
F-18
Operation and locking/Interlocking
Rotary handles NSX100-250 NSX400-630

DCPV DCPV
Direct rotary handles
DB115918.eps
ON
I
MCC conversion accessory LV429341 LV432606
CNOMO conversion accessory LV429342 LV432602
O
OFF

DB115917.eps

ON
I
O
OFF ON
I
With telescopic handle for withdrawable device LV429343 LV432603
OFF
Accessories
Indication auxiliary 1 early-break contact LV429345 LV432605
2 early-break contacts LV429346 LV429346
Locks NSX100-250 NSX400-630
DCPV DCPV
Toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks
By removable device 29370 29370
DB115913.eps
push
to
trip
By fixed device (open or close position) LV429371 LV432631

DB115916.eps
By fixed device (open position only) LV429370 (1) LV432630 (1)

push
to
trip
Locking of the rotary handle

Keylock adapter (keylock not included) LV429344 LV432604
DB115914.eps
ON
I
Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Ronis 1351B.500 41940 41940
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888 42888
O
OFF
Locking of the motor mechanism modules

Keylock adapter + Ronis keylock (special) LV429449 LV432649
DB115919.eps
2
Keylock (keylock adapter not included) Ronis 1351B.500 41940
/auto
I
1
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
manu O push
ON
OFF
push
Interlocking NSX100-250 NSX400-630

DCPV DCPV
Interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handles
Keylock kit (keylock not included) (2) LV429344 LV432604
DB112268.eps
1 set of 2 keylocks Ronis 1351B.500 41950 41950

(1 key only, keylock kit not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878 42878
(1) Available February 2014.

(2) NSX100-250 DC PV only.
F-19
Catalogue numbers Compact NSX80/500 TM DCPV
Installation
Installation accessories NSX100-250 NSX400-630

DCPV DCPV
Front-panel escutcheons
DB112269.eps
IP30 trip unit access escutcheon for toggle LV429526 LV432559
IP30

DB112737.eps
IP40
IP43 rubber toggle cover
1 toggle cover LV429319 LV432560
DB112738.eps
Lead-sealing accessories
Bag of accessories LV429375 LV429375
DB115615.eps
Din rail adapter

1 adapter LV429305
DB112739.eps
F-20
Catalogue numbers Compact NSX630b to 1600 NA
DCPV fixed electricallyoperated
Complete device without motor
mechanism module
Complete molded case switch-disconnector (without motor mechanism module)
Molded case switch disconnector Compact NSX630b NA DC PV 630 A 4P LV438969
DB416408.eps
Molded case switch disconnector Compact NSX800 NA DC PV 800 A 4P LV438970

Note: all references above include:

DB415193.eps
Basic frame
Heatsink Kit of 2 (LV438966)
Front connection : Top (33612)

DB416415.eps
Bottom (33613)
Interphase barriers Kit of 3 (33646)

DB128425.eps
Electrical auxiliaries for complete device

Indication contacts
6 A - 240 V Low level
DB128428.eps
OF, ON/OFF indication contacts 33108 33109

Up to 3 OF can be connected.
Instantaneous voltage releases
MX MN
DB128429.eps
Delay unit R (non-adjustable) Rr (adjustable)

12 V DC 33658
24/30 V DC 33659 33668
48/60 V DC 33660 33669 48/60 V DC 33680
100/130 V DC 33661 33670 100/130 V DC 33684 33681
200/250 V DC 33662 33671 200/250 V DC 33685 33682
380/480 V DC 33683
F-21
Catalogue numbers Compact NSX630b to 1600 NA
DCPV fixed electricallyoperated
Device based on separate components
with or without motor mechanism module
Basic frame molded case switch-disconnector
Compact NSX type NA
DB416414.eps
4P
NSX630b NA DC PV LV453421
NSX800 NA DC PV LV453423
I ON
push
OOFF
push
Note: the characteristics of the motor mechanism module for electrical operation are specified
d
discharge
O OFF
separately by selecting a part number from the table at the bottom of this page.
Connections for basic frame molded case switch-disconnectors

Front connection
DB416415.eps
DB415193.eps
4P
Top 630-1000 A - NA 33612
Heatsink mandatory Kit of 2 LV438966
Bottom interphase barriers* Kit of 3 33646
DB416413.eps
or Terminal shield* LV438968

DB128425.eps
* interphase barriers or terminal shield is mandatory

Front connection 630-1000 A - NA Bottom 33609
630-1000 A - L Bottom 33611
1600 A - NA Bottom 33613
DB416416.eps
Rear connection Vertical NA Bottom 33615

Horizontal NA Bottom 33617
Indication contacts
6 A - 240 V Low level
DB128428.eps
OF, ON/OFF indication contacts 33108 33109

Up to 3 OF can be connected.
Instantaneous voltage releases
MX MN
DB128429.eps
Delay unit R (non-adjustable) Rr (adjustable)

12 V DC 33658
24/30 V DC 33659 33668
48/60 V DC 33660 33669 48/60 V DC 33680
100/130 V DC 33661 33670 100/130 V DC 33684 33681
200/250 V DC 33662 33671 200/250 V DC 33685 33682
380/480 V DC 33683
Communication options
For fixed devices Electrically operated
DB416589.eps
Modbus COM 33708
Motor mechanism module

DC 50/60 Hz
U Standard Communicating
DB401828.eps
24/30 V 33690 33697

48/60 V 33691 33698
100/130 V 33692 33699
200/250 V 33693 33700
Note: to order a complete device, order:
b a basic frame switch disconnector
b connections
b electrical auxiliaries.
b communication option as required.
b motor mechanism as required.
F-22
Catalogue numbers Compact INS40 to 160 DC
Complete fixed/FC device and
accessories
Compact INS40 to 160 standard version with black handle

3P 4P
DB125621.eps
.1
.2
.4
Compact INS40 28900 28901

Compact INS80PV - Photovoltaic - 28907
3P 4P
DB125622.eps
Compact INS100 28908 28909

Compact INS125 28910 28911
Compact INS160 28912 28913
Compact INS40 to 160 with red handle and yellow front

3P 4P
DB125621.eps
.1
.2
.4

3P 4P
DB125622.eps
Compact INS100 28924 28925

Compact INS125 28926 28927
Compact INS160 28928 28929
F-23
Accessories

Connectors for bare Cu or Al cables
Snap-in INS100 to 160 S y 95 mm Set of 3 28947
DB117559.eps
Set of 4 28948
Distribution connector for INS40 to 80 Set of 3 19096

DB117560.eps
3 rigid cables up to 16 mm or Set of 4 19091

3 flexible cables up to 10 mm
Distribution connector for INS100 to 160 Set of 3 28949

DB117561.eps
4 rigid cables up to 25 mm or Set of 4 28950

4 flexible cables up to 16 mm
Crimp lugs for copper cables

For 95 mm cables with INS100 to 160 Set of 3 28951
DB117562.eps
interphase barriers Set of 4 28952
Terminal shrouds
INS40 to 80 3P/4P Set of 2 28955
DB117592.eps
INS100 to 160 3P/4P Set of 2 28956
Terminal shields
INS40 to 80 3P/4P Set of 2 28957
DB117593.eps
INS100 to 160 3P/4P Set of 2 28958
Interphase barriers
INS100 to 160 3P/4P Set of 6 28959
DB404166.eps
Auxiliary contacts
1 CAF / CAO standard (early make or break) INS40 to 160 29450
DB117563.eps
1 CAF / CAO low level (early make or break) INS40 to 160 29452
Rotary handles
Direct front control or lateral control Built-in
Accessories for conversion to extended rotary handles
Front control Black handle INS40 to 160 LV428941
DB414127.eps
Red handle on yellow front INS40 to 160 LV428942
Lateral control Black handle INS40 to 160 28943

DB125623.eps
Red handle on yellow front INS40 to 160 (1) 28944

Lateral control on PRAGMA F Black handle INS40 to 160 28945 (2)
functional enclosure Red handle on yellow front INS40 to 160 (1) 28946
(1) For red/yellow switch versions only.

(2) Not available with Prisma.
F-24
Accessories
Locking and interlocking

Handle locking
.1
By 1 to 3 padlocks (OFF position), hasp dia. 5 to 8 mm, or by lead seals Built-in

DB117564.eps
.2
.4
Interlocking for extended rotary handles

Mechanical 28953
DB414126.eps
F-25
Catalogue numbers Compact INS250-100 to 630 DC
accessories
Compact INS250 to 630 standard version with black handle

3P 4P
DB404168.eps
Compact INS250-100A 31100 31101

Compact INS250-160A 31104 31105
Compact INS250-200A 31102 31103
Compact INS250 31106 31107
3P 4P
DB404169.eps
Compact INS320 31108 31109

Compact INS400 31110 31111
Compact INS500 31112 31113
Compact INS630 31114 31115

3P 4P
DB404168.eps
Compact INS250-100A 31120 31121

Compact INS250-160A 31124 31125
Compact INS250-200A 31122 31123
Compact INS250 31126 31127
3P 4P
DB404169.eps
Compact INS320 31128 31129

Compact INS400 31130 31131
Compact INS500 31132 31133
Compact INS630 31134 31135
F-26
Catalogue numbers Compact INV100 to 630 DC
Complete fixed/FC device and specific
accessories
Compact INV100 to 630 standard version with black handle

3P 4P
DB125629.eps
Compact INV100 31160 31161

Compact INV160 31164 31165
Compact INV200 31162 31163
Compact INV250 31166 31167
3P 4P
DB413546.eps
Compact INV320 31168 31169

Compact INV400 31170 31171
Compact INV500 31172 31173
Compact INV630 31174 31175
Compact INV100 to 630 with red handle and yellow front

3P 4P
DB125629.eps
Compact INV100 31180 31181

Compact INV160 31184 31185
Compact INV200 31182 31183
Compact INV250 31186 31187
3P 4P
DB413546.eps
Compact INV320 31188 31189

Compact INV400 31190 31191
Compact INV500 31192 31193
Compact INV630 31194 31195
F-27
Accessories
Rear connections
Short (1 pair) LV429235
DB117567.eps
Long (1 pair) LV429236
Cable connectors
Snap-on, for cables: Steel: 1.5 to 95 mm ; y 160 A Set of 3 LV429242
DB112226.eps
Set of 4 LV429243
Aluminium: 25 to 95 mm ; y 250 A Set of 3 LV429227

DB112725.eps
Set of 4 LV429228
Aluminium: 120 to 185 mm ; y 250 A Set of 3 LV429259
Set of 4 LV429260
Tab connector for voltage tap on 185 mm cable connector Set of 10 LV429348
Clip for cable connector Set of 10 LV429241
Distribution connector for six 1.5 to 35 mm cables with interphase barriers Set of 3 LV429248
DB112228.eps
Set of 4 LV429249
Aluminium connectors for 2 cables: 2 x (50 to 120 mm2); y 250 A Set of 3 LV429218
DB112227.eps
Set of 4 LV429219
Linergy DX and DP distribution block

Linergy DX 160 A For 6 cables (16 mm) per pole (1) 1P 04031
DB107442.eps
DB107443.eps
Linergy DP 250 A For 9 cables (6 x 10 mm + 3 x 16 mm) 3P 04033

per pole (1) 4P 04034
Additional blocks of 2 x 35 mm per pole (1) 3P 04155
4P 04156
Linergy DS distribution block
Linergy DS 250 A For 14 holes (1 x 15.3 mm + 1 x 10 mm 1P LGY125014
DB414999.eps
+ 4 x 6 mm + 8 x 7.5 mm)
Terminal extensions (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)

Right-angle terminal extensions (1) Set of 3 LV429261
Set of 4 LV429262
Straight terminal extensions (1) Set of 3 LV429263

Set of 4 LV429264
Spreaders (for upstream or downstream connection)

Separate for each pole 3P LV431563
DB117572.eps
4P LV431564
One-piece 3/4P LV431061

DB404191.eps
Front alignment base for one-piece spreader 3/4P LV431064

(when mounting with LV432594 and LV432596, refer chapter dimensions
and connection in catalogue Compact INS/INV "LVPED213024EN")
Crimp lugs for copper cables (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)
For 120 mm cables Set of 3 LV429252
DB417619_1.eps
Set of 4 LV429256
Set of 4 LV429257
For cable 185 mm cables Set of 3 LV429254
Set of 4 LV429258
Crimp lugs for aluminium cables (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)
DB417620.eps
Set of 4 LV429505
Set of 4 LV429507
F-28
Accessories
Terminal shields
1 Short 3/4 P LV429516
DB414360.eps
1 Long 3/4 P LV429518
Interphase barriers
Set of 6 LV429329
DB101942.eps
Special connection accessories for INS250-100 to 250DC and INV100 to 250DC

Terminal extensions for series or parallel connection of two poles (*) 1 terminal ext. LV438328
DB108556.eps
(*) Series connection of: 2 poles = 1 terminal extension

3 poles = 2 terminal extensions
Parallel connection of: 2 poles = 2 terminal extensions
Terminal extensions for parallel connection of three poles:
DB108557.eps
Parallel connection of: 3 poles = set of 2 terminal extensions LV438329
4P terminal shields for series connection of poles Set of 1 LV438326

DB414360.eps
4P terminal shields for parallel connection of poles (2P/4P) Set of 1 LV438327
Auxiliary contacts (changeover type)
CAM (early make or break) 29450
DB117563.eps
Low level CAM (early make or break) 29452
Rotary handles
Front control
Direct for INS/INV250 Built-in
Extended
For INS/INV250 with standard rotary handle LV431050
DB414127.eps
For INS/INV250 with red handle on yellow front (1)

LV431051
For complete source changeover assembly 31055
Lateral control
Direct lateral control for INS/INV250
DB125624.eps
Lateral support 31054

+ standard lateral control assembly 31057
or + red and yellow lateral control assembly (1)
31058
Extended lateral control for INS/INV250
Standard lateral control assembly 31057
Red and yellow lateral control assembly (1)
31058
F-29
Accessories
Locking and interlocking for INS/INV and source changeover systems

Locking for INS/INV
Handle locking by 1 to 3 padlocks (in OFF position) Built-in
DB125625.eps

By keylock Keylocking device 2 x 31087

+ Ronis 1351B.500 keylock 41940
or + Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z keylock 42888
Locking for INS complete source changeover assembly

DB107711.eps
By keylock Keylocking device 31097

Interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key)

By 2 keylocks INS250 keylocking device 2x 31087
Db101549.eps
INS320-630 keylocking device 2x 31088

+ Ronis 1351B.500 keylock 2x 41950
or + Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z keylock 2x 42878
Interlocking for INS/INV with direct or extended rotary handle

Mechanical interlocking for INS250 31073
DB414128.eps
F-30
Accessories
Rear connections
Short (1 pair) LV432475
DB117567.eps
Long (1 pair) LV432476
Cable connectors
For 1 cable, 35 mm to 300 mm Set of 3 LV432479 (1)
DB117587.eps
Set of 4 LV432480 (2)
For 2 cables, 35 mm to 240 mm Set of 3 LV432481 (1)

DB117588.eps
Set of 4 LV432482 (2)
Tab connector for voltage tap on cable connector Set of 10 LV429348

DB112724.eps
(1) Kit comprising 2 interphase barriers. (2) Kit comprising 3 interphase barriers.
Terminal extensions (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)

DB117570.eps
Set of 4 LV432485
Edgewise terminal extensions Set of 3 LV432486

DB117589.eps
Set of 4 LV432487
Spreaders (for upstream or downstream connection)

One-piece 52.5 mm 3P LV432490
DB117572.eps
4P LV432491
70 mm 3P LV432492
4P LV432493
Crimp lugs for copper cables (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)
DB417619.eps
Set of 4 LV432501
Set of 4 LV432503
Crimp lugs for aluminium cables (supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers)
DB417620.eps
Set of 4 LV432505
Set of 4 LV432507
Terminal shields
1 Short 3/4P LV432592
DB414359.eps
1 Long 3/4P LV432594

1 Long for 52.5 mm spreader (supplied with insulating plate) 3/4P LV432596
Interphase barriers
Set of 6 LV432570
DB404182.eps
Special connection accessories for INS/INV320 to 630DC

Terminal extensions for series or parallel connection of two poles (*) 1 connection LV438338
DB108566.eps
plate equipped
with heat sink +
1 interphase
barrier
(*) Series connection of: 2 poles = 1 terminal extension Parallel connection of: 2 poles = 2 terminal extensions
3 poles = 2 terminal extensions 4 poles = 4 terminal extensions
DB416824.eps

4P terminal shields for series connection of poles Set of 1 LV438346
4P terminal shields for parallel connection of poles Set of 1 LV438337
F-31
Accessories
Auxiliary contacts (changeover type)
1 OF/CAF/CAO (early make or break) 29450
DB117563.eps
1 OF/CAF/CAO low level (early make or break) 29452
Rotary handles
Extended front control
For INS320/400/630 with standard rotary handle 31052
DB404185.eps
For INS320/400/630 with red handle on yellow front (1)

31053
For complete source changeover assembly 31055
Locking and interlocking for INS/INV and source changeover systems

Locking for INS/INV
DB404186.eps

Locking for INS complete source changeover assembly

DB107711.eps

Interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key)

By 2 keylocks INS250 keylocking device 2x 31087
Db101549.eps
INS320-630 keylocking device 2x 31088

+ Ronis 1351B.500 keylock 2x 41950
or + Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z keylock 2x 42878
Interlocking for INS/INV with direct or extended rotary handle

Mechanical interlocking for INS320/400/630 31074
DB404187.eps
5...8
F-32
Catalogue numbers Compact INS630b to 2500 DC
accessories
Compact INS630b to 2500 standard version with black handle

3P 4P
DB404189.eps
Compact INS630b 31342 31343

Compact INS800 31330 31331
Compact INS1000 31332 31333
Compact INS1250 31334 31335
Compact INS1600 31336 31337
Compact INS2000 31338 31339

DB125631.eps
Compact INS2500 31340 31341

3P 4P
DB404189.eps
Compact INS800 31344 31345

Compact INS1000 31346 31347
Compact INS1250 31348 31349
Compact INS1600 31350 31351
F-33
Catalogue numbers Compact INV630b to 2500 DC
Complete fixed/FC device and specific
accessories
Compact INV630b to 2500 standard version with black handle

3P 4P
DB404190.eps
Compact INV630b 31370 31371

Compact INV800 31358 31359
Compact INV1000 31360 31361
Compact INV1250 31362 31363
Compact INV1600 31364 31365
Compact INV2000 31366 31367

DB125632.eps
Compact INV2500 31368 31369
Compact INV800 to 1600 with red handle and yellow front

3P 4P
DB404190.eps
Compact INV800 31372 31373

Compact INV1000 31374 31375
Compact INV1250 31376 31377
Compact INV1600 31378 31379
F-34
Accessories
Vertical connection adapters
INS/INV630b-1600 3P Set of 3 31301
DB404192.eps
4P Set of 4 31302
Cable lug adapters

INS/INV630b-1600 3P Set of 3 33644
DB404193.eps
4P Set of 4 33645
Busbar connection (not compatible with terminal shield)

INS/INV630b-1600 3P Set of 3 31305
DB404194.eps
4P Set of 4 31306
Right angle connector for busbar (edgewise) to INS2000/2500 31310

DB108558.eps
Base for terminal shield (not compatible with interphase barriers)
INS/INV630b-1600 3P 31307
DB404195.eps
4P 31308
Terminal shield
INS/INV630b-1600 3P LV433638
DB404196.eps
4P LV433639
Interphase barriers (not compatible with terminal shield and base)

INS/INV630b-1600 4P Set of 6 31315
DB404197.eps
INS/INV2000/2500 4P Set of 6 31319
Auxiliary contacts (changeover type) INS/INV630b-2500
1 OF/CAF/CAO standard (early make or break) 29450
DB117563.eps
1 OF/CAF/CAO low level (early make or break) 29452
Extended front control

INS/INV630b-2500 For standard rotary handle 31288
DB404198.eps
INS/INV630b-1600 For red handle on yellow front (1)

31289
F-35
Accessories
Locking and interlocking

Locking for INS/INV630b to 2500
DB404199.eps

Interlocking for INS/INV630b to 2500

By keylock Keylocking device 2 x 31291
DB415909.eps
+ Ronis 1351B.500 keylock (1 key) 2 x 41950

or + Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z keylock (1 key) 2 x 42878
F-36
spare parts
Masterpact NW DC - DCPV
Connection
Connection
C or D type E type
Fixed or drawout circuit breakers or switches
Rear connection (vertical or horizontal mounting) / Replacement kit (3 or 4 parts)
1000/2000 A Vertical or horizontal 47966 47967
DB404366.eps
Top or bottom
4000 A Vertical or horizontal 47968 47969

Top or bottom
DB413008.eps
Vertical mounting
Additional support brackets for mounting on a backplate
For fixed rear-connected circuit breaker (2 parts) 47829
DB404369.eps
F-37
spare parts
Remote operation
Remote operation
Gear motor
MCH (1 part)
DB404410.eps
AC 50/60 Hz 48 V 47889
100/130 V 47893
200/240 V 47894
250/277 V 47895
380/415 V 47896
440/480 V 47897
DC 24/30 V 47888
48/60 V 47889
100/125 V 47890
DB404322.eps
200/250 V 47891
Terminal block (1 part) For fixed circuit breaker 47074
For drawout circuit breaker 47849
DB416231.eps
Fixed. Drawout. Installation manual 47951

Closing and opening release (XF or MX)
Standard coil (1 part)
DB416240.eps
AC 50/60 Hz 12 V DC 33658
DC 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 33659
48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 33660
100/130 V AC/DC 33661
200/250 V AC/DC 33662
277 V AC 33663
380/480 V AC 33664
Communicating coil (1 part)
AC 50/60 Hz 12 V DC 33032
DC 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 33033
48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 33034
100/130 V AC/DC 33035
200/250 V AC/DC 33036
277 V AC 33037
DB404322.eps
380/480 V AC 33038
DB416231.eps

Undervoltage release MN
Undervoltage release (1 part)
DB416240.eps
AC 50/60 Hz 24/30 V DC, 24 V AC 33668

DC 48/60 V DC, 48 V AC 33669
100/130 V AC/DC 33670
200/250 V AC/DC 33671
380/480 V AC 33673
DB404322.eps
DB416231.eps

MN delay unit
MN delay unit (1 part)
DB404320.eps
R (non-adjustable) Rr (adjustable)
AC 50/60 Hz 48/60 V AC/DC 33680
DC 100/130 V AC/DC 33684 33681
200/250 V AC/DC 33685 33682
380/480 V AC/DC 33683
Installation manual 47951
F-38
spare parts
Chassis locking and accessories
Chassis locking
Disconnected position locking / 1 part
By padlocks
DB404325.eps
VCPO Standard
By Profalux keylocks
Profalux 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 64934
2 locks 1 key + adaptation kit 64935
2 locks 2 different keys + adaptation kit 64936
1 keylock Profalux identical key not identified combination 33173
(without adaptation kit): identical key identified 215470 combination 33174
identical key identified 215471 combination 33175
By Ronis keylocks
Ronis 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 64937
1 keylock Ronis identical key not identified combination 33189
(without adaptation kit): identical key identified EL24135 combination 33190
identical key identified EL24153 combination 33191
Adaptation kit adaptation kit Profalux / Ronis 48564
(without keylock): adaptation kit Kirk 48565
adaptation kit Castell 48566
Door interlock / 1 part
Right and left-hand side of chassis (VPECD or VPECG) 47914
DB404326.eps

Racking interlock
5 parts 64940
DB404327.eps

Breaker mismatch protection / 1 part
Breaker mismatch protection (VDC) 33767
DB404329.eps

Chassis accessories
Auxiliary terminal shield (CB) / 1 part
800/4000 A 3P 64942
DB404331.eps
4P 48596
4000b/6300 A 3P 48597
4P 48598
Safety shutters + locking block / 1 part

800/4000 A 3P 48721
DB404332.eps
4P 48723
4000b/6300 A 3P 48722
4P 48724
Shutter locking block (for replacement) / 1 part
2 parts for 800/4000 A 48591
DB404333.eps

Earthing kit for chassis
3P 4P
Types for N1/H1/NA/HA
48433 48434
Note: the installation manual is enclosed.
F-39
spare parts
Clusters
Clusters
1 disconnecting contact cluster for chassis (see table below) (part 1) 64906
DB403280.eps
Table : number of clusters required for the different chassis models

Chassis rating (A) Masterpact NW 3P Masterpact NW 4P
N1 H1/H2 H3 L1 N1 H1/H2 H3 L1
250 12 (H1)
630 6 12 24 8 16 32
800 6 12 24 8 16 32
1000 6 12 24 8 16 32
1250 6 12 24 8 16 32
1600 12 12 24 16 16 32
2000 24 24 42 32 32 56
2500 24 24 32 32
3200 36 36 48 48
4000 42 42 56 56
4000b 72 96
5000 72 96
6300 72 96
Note: the minimum order is 6 parts.
Racking handle
Racking handle 47944
DB403281.eps
DC rear connection
Serial connection kit
For NW10/20 DC 48642
DB416603.eps
For NW40 DC 48643

DB105110.eps
F-40
spare parts
Circuit breaker locking and accessories
Circuit breaker locking

Pushbutton locking device / 1 part
By padlocks 48536
DB404337.eps

OFF position locking / 1 part
By padlocks
DB404411.eps
48539
By Profalux keylocks
Profalux 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 64928
1 keylock Profalux identical key not identified combination 33173
(without adaptation kit): identical key identified 215470 combination 33174
identical key identified 215471 combination 33175
By Ronis keylocks
Ronis 1 lock with 1 key + adaptation kit 64931
1 keylock Ronis identical key not identified combination 33189
(without adaptation kit): identical key identified EL24135 combination 33190
Adaptation kit adaptation kit Profalux / Ronis 64925
(without keylock): adaptation kit Kirk 64927
adaptation kit Castell 64926
Other circuit breaker accessories
Mechanical operation counter / 1 part
Operation counter CDM 48535
DB125617.eps

Escutcheon and accessories / 1 part
Fixed Drawout
DB403097.eps
DB403098.eps
DB403099.eps
Escutcheon 48601 48603

Transparent cover (IP 54) 48604
Escutcheon blanking plate 48605 48605
Escutcheon Cover
Blanking plate Installation manual 47951
Spring charging handle / 1 part
Spring charging handle 47940
DB404413.eps
Arc chute for Masterpact NW / 1 part

C type D type E type
DB404414.eps
Type NW DC 2 x 47934 3 x 47934 4 x 47934
F-41
spare parts
Mechanical interlocking
for source changeover
Cable-type door interlock
1 complete assembly for Masterpact NW fixed or drawout device 48614
Note: the installation manual is enclosed.
F-42
spare parts
Indication contacts
Indication contacts
ON/OFF indication contacts (OF) / 12 parts
1 additional block of 4 contacts 64922
DB404321.eps
Wiring For fixed circuit breaker 47074


Fault trip indication contacts (SDE) / 1 part
Changeover contact (SDE) 6 A - 240 V 47915
DB404323.eps
Low-level 47916

Ready to close contact (1 max.) / 1 part
PF
DB404415.eps
1 changeover contact (5 A - 240 V) 47080

1 low-level changeover contact 47081
Connected, disconnected, test position indication contact (carriage switches) / 1 part
Changeover contacts 6 A - 240 V 33170
DB404324.eps
CE, CD, CT Low-level 33171

Set of additional actuaters for carriage switches / 1 set
1 set 48560
Combined closed / connected contacts for use with 1 auxiliary contact / 1 part
1 contact (5 A - 240 V) 48477
DB404322.eps
or 1 low-level contact 48478

Electrical closing pushbutton / 1 part
BPFE
DB404319.eps
1 pushbutton 48534

Auxiliary terminals for chassis alone
3 wire terminal (1 part) 47849
6 wire terminal (1 part) 47850
Jumpers (10 parts) 47900
F-43
spare parts
Instructions
Instructions
Chassis accessories 47952
Circuit breaker accessories 47951
Fixed and drawout circuit breaker 47950
User manual NW DC (French) 64923
NW DC (English) 64924
Modbus communication notice for manual 33088
F-44
spare parts
Monitoring and control converter
Monitoring and control

ULP display module
Switchboard front display module FDM121 TRV00121
DB111440.eps
FDM mounting accessory (diameter 22 mm) TRV00128

Breaker ULP cord L = 0.35 m LV434195
DB127985.eps
Breaker ULP cord L = 1.3 m LV434196

Breaker ULP cord L = 3 m LV434197

DB111443.eps

DB111444 DB115623.eps

DB111445.eps

(1) See Telemecanique catalogue.
F-45
Order form Compact NSX100DC
to NSX250DC circuit breakers
Check the applicable and enter the appropriate Indication and measurements
square boxes information in the rectangles Auxiliary contact OF SD SDE Standard Low level
Circuit breaker Quantity SDE adapter (TM trip unit)
Compact type NSX100/160/250 Remote operation
Electrical operation Motor mechanism AC DC V
Voltage releases Instantaneous MX AC DC V
Rating A
MN AC DC V
Circuit breaker F, N, M, S
Fixed time delay MN AC DC V
Number of poles 1 or 2
Adjust. time delay MN AC DC V
Circuit breaker DC
Rotary handles
Number of poles 3 or 4
Direct Black Red on yellow front
Number of poles tripped 3d or 4d MCC conversion access. CNOMO conversion access.
Fixed device Front conn. Long rear conn. Extended Black Red on yellow front
Short rear conn. Telescopic handle for withdrawable device
Plug-in/withdr. Plug-in Withdrawable Indication auxiliary 1 early-break switch 2 early-break switches
Thermal-magnetic trip unit Wiring accessory for early-make switches
Thermal-magnetic TMD rating (1663 A)
NSX100 to 250 Locking
TMG rating (16250 A)
Toggle (1 to 3 padlocks) Removable Fixed Open/Close
TMDC rating (80250 A)
Fixed Open
Special connection accessories for parallel or Rotary handle Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
series connection
Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Series 2 poles (1 connection plate)
connection Motor mechanism Keylock adapter + Keylock Ronis (special) NSX100/250
3 poles (2 connection plates)
4 poles (3 connection plates)
Interlocking
Parallel 2 poles (2 connection plates)
Mechanical Toggle Rotary handle
connection 3 poles (NSX100 to 250,
By key (2 Keylocks, 1 key) Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
1 set of 2 connection plates)
For rotary handle Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
2 x 2 poles (4 connection plates)
Installation accessories
Special terminal shields for parallel or series Front-panel escutcheon Toggle
connection Rotary handle, motor mechanism, escutcheon collar; IP40
1P short 1 pair
Toggle cover
2P short 2 x 1 pair (1P)
Sealing accessories
3P short for series connection of poles 1 set
DIN rail adapter NSX100/250
4P short for series connection of poles 1 set
Plug-in / Drawout configuration accessories
4P short for parallel connection 1 set Auxiliary connections 1 automatic connector fixed part with 9 wires (for base)
of poles (2P/4P)
1 auto. conn. moving part with 9 wires (for circuit breaker )
Connection 1 support for 3 automatic connector moving parts
NSX100/250 Steel 1.5v to 95v (< 160 A)
connectors 9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving)
Aluminium 25v to 95v (< 250 A)
Plug-in base accessories Long insulated terminals Set of 3 Set of 4
2 IP4 shutters for base
Voltage measurement For bare cable NSX100/250
input connector y 185v Chassis accessories Escutcheon collar Toggle
Right-angle terminal extensions Locking kit (keylock not included)
Straight extensions NSX100/250 2 carriage switches (conn./disconnected position indication)
Double L terminal extension 3P 4P Parts of plug-in Plug-in base FC/RC 2P 3P 4P
Spreader from 35 to 45 mm 3P 4P Set of 2 power connections Standard
One piece spreader Safety trip for advanced opening
Front alignment For 3P/4P chassis Moving part
Cu cable lugs NSX100/250 120v 150v 185v Fixed part
240v 300v Communication
NSX Cord L = 0.35 m NSX Cord L = 1.3 m
Al cable lugs NSX100/250 150v 185v
NSX Cord U > 480 V AC L = 0.35 m NSX Cord L = 3 m
240v 300v
BSCM
Insulation screen 45 mm 3P 4P
Communicating motor mechanism 220-240 V
70 mm 3P 4P
Switchboard front display module FDM121
Interphase barriers Set of 6
FDM mounting accessory
Ethernet interface + gateway
Ethernet interface
Modbus interface
I/O application module Qty 1 Qty 2
Stacking accessory
ULP line termination
RJ45 connectors female/female Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
L = 0.3 m L = 0.6 m
Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
L=1m L=2m
L=3m L=5m
F-46
to NSX630DC
Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
Check the applicable and enter the appropriate Indication and measurements
Circuit breaker / Quantity SDE adapter (TM trip unit)
Switch-disconnector Remote operation
Compact type NSX400/630 Electrical operation Motor mechanism AC DC V
switch-disconnector circuit breaker Voltage releases Instantaneous MX AC DC V
Rating A MN AC DC V
Circuit breaker F, S Fixed time delay MN AC DC V
DC Adjust. time delay MN AC DC V
Number of poles 3 or 4 Rotary handles
Fixed device Front conn. Long rear conn. Direct Black Red on yellow front
MCC conversion access. CNOMO conversion access.
Short rear conn.
Extended Black Red on yellow front
Plug-in/withdr. Plug-in Withdrawable
Telescopic handle for withdrawable device
Circuit breaker thermal-magnetic trip unit
Thermal-magnetic TM-DC rating (250600 A) Indication auxiliary 1 early-break switch 2 early-break switches
Wiring accessory for early-make switches
Special connection accessories for parallel or Locking
series connection Toggle (1 to 3 padlocks) Removable Fixed Open/Close
Series 2 poles (1 connection plate) Fixed Open
connection 3 poles (2 connection plates) Rotary handle Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
4 poles (3 connection plates) Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Parallel 2 poles (2 connection plates) Motor mechanism Keylock adapter (keylock not included) NSX400/630
connection 2 x 2 poles (4 connection plates) Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Special terminal shields for parallel or series Interlocking
connection Mechanical Toggle Rotary handle
Terminal shield for front connection By key (2 Keylocks, 1 key) Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
Terminal shield for rear connection For rotary handle Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Standard Short Installation accessories
Connection Front-panel escutcheon Toggle
NSX400/630 1 cable 35v to 300v Rotary handle, motor mechanism, escutcheon collar; IP40
connectors 2 cables 35v to 240v Toggle cover
Voltage measurement input For bare cable connector Sealing accessories
Right-angle terminal extensions Plug-in / Drawout configuration accessories
Edgewise extensions Auxiliary connections 1 automatic connector fixed part with 9 wires (for base)
Double L terminal extension 3P 4P 1 auto. conn. moving part with 9 wires (for circuit breaker )
Spreader from 35 to 45 mm 3P 4P 1 support for 3 automatic connector moving parts
One piece spreader 9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving)
Front alignment Plug-in base accessories Long insulated terminals Set of 3 Set of 4
Cu cable lugs NSX400/630 120v 150v 185v 2 IP4 shutters for base
240v 300v Chassis accessories Escutcheon collar Toggle
Al cable lugs NSX400/630 150v 185v Locking kit (keylock not included)
240v 300v 2 carriage switches (conn./disconnected position indication)
Insulation screen 45 mm 3P 4P Parts of plug-in Plug-in base FC/RC 2P 3P 4P
70 mm 3P 4P Set of 2 power connections Standard
Interphase barriers Set of 6 Safety trip for advanced opening
For 3P/4P chassis Moving part
Fixed part
Communication
BSCM
Ethernet interface
Modbus interface
Stacking accessory
L = 0.3 m L = 0.6 m
L=1m L=2m
L=3m L=5m
F-47
circuit breakers
Check the applicable and enter the appropriate Indication auxiliaries

Rating 630A, 800 A, 1000 A, 1200 A Remote operation
Electrical operation Motor mechanism AC DC V
Fixed device Without bare cable connector
Voltage releases Instantaneous MX AC DC V
With bare cable connector
MN AC DC V
Connection
Voltage For bare cable Fixed time delay MN AC DC V
measurement input connector Adjust. time delay MN AC DC V
Rotary handles
Direct Black Red on yellow front
MCC conversion access. CNOMO conversion access.
Extended Black Red on yellow front
Telescopic handle for withdrawable device
Indication auxiliary 1 early-break switch 2 early-break switches
Wiring accessory for early-make switches
Locking
Toggle (1 to 3 padlocks) Removable Fixed Open/Close
Fixed Open
Rotary handle Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
Motor mechanism Keylock adapter (keylock not included) NSX400/630
Interlocking
Mechanical Toggle Rotary handle
By key (2 Keylocks, 1 key) Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
For rotary handle Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Front-panel escutcheon Toggle
Rotary handle, motor mechanism, escutcheon collar; IP40
Toggle cover
Sealing accessories
Communication
BSCM
Ethernet interface
Modbus interface
Stacking accessory
L = 0.3 m L = 0.6 m
L=1m L=2m
L=3m L=5m
F-48
Order form Compact NSX80/500 TM DC PV
Circuit breakers and
Check the applicable and enter the appropriate Indication auxiliaries
Compact type NSX80 TM DC PV Remote operation
NSX125 TM DC PV Electrical operation Motor mechanism AC DC V
NSX160 TM DC PV Voltage releases Instantaneous MX AC DC V
NSX200 TM DC PV MN AC DC V
NSX250 TM DC PV Fixed time delay MN AC DC V
NSX320 TM DC PV Adjust. time delay MN AC DC V
NSX400 TM DC PV Rotary handles
NSX500 TM DC PV Direct Black Red on yellow front
Special connection and insulation accessories MCC conversion access. CNOMO conversion access.
for circuit breakers (mandatory) Extended Black Red on yellow front
Upstream connection plates with heatsink (x2) Telescopic handle for withdrawable device
special terminal shields Indication auxiliary 1 early-break switch 2 early-break switches
Downstream standard long terminal shields Wiring accessory for early-make switches
or rear connections short Locking
long Toggle (1 to 3 padlocks) Removable Fixed Open/Close
+ short terminal shields
Fixed Open
Switch-disconnector Quantity
Rotary handle Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
Compact type NSX100 NA DC PV
NSX160 NA DC PV Motor mechanism Keylock adapter + Keylock Ronis (special) NSX100/250
NSX200 NA DC PV (160 A) Keylock adapter (keylock not included) NSX400/630
NSX200 NA DC PV (200 A) Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
NSX400 NA DC PV
Interlocking
NSX500 NA DC PV Mechanical Toggle Rotary handle
Special connection and insulation accessories By key (2 keylocks, 1 key) Keylock adapter (keylock not included)
for switch-disconnectors (mandatory) For rotary handle Keylock Ronis 1351B.500 Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z
Upstream connection plates with heatsink (x2)
y 200 A at 40 C special terminal shields
Front-panel escutcheon Toggle
or interphase barriers Rotary handle, motor mechanism, escutcheon collar; IP40
Upstream connection plates with heatsink (x2) Toggle cover
= 200 A at 55 C (long)
Sealing accessories
interphase barriers
DIN rail adapter NSX100/250
Upstream connection plates with heatsink (x2)
u 400 A Communication
special terminal shields
or interphase barriers NSX Cord U > 480 V AC L = 0.35 m NSX Cord L = 3 m
Downstream standard long terminal shields BSCM
or rear connections short Communicating motor mechanism 220-240 V
long Switchboard front display module FDM121
+ short terminal shields FDM mounting accessory
or interphase barriers Ethernet interface + gateway
Ethernet interface
Connection
Modbus interface
NSX100/250 Steel 1.5v to 95v (< 160 A)
connectors I/O application module Qty 1 Qty 2
Stacking accessory
NSX400/630 1 cable 35v to 300v
connectors RJ45 connectors female/female Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
2 cables 35v to 240v
L = 0.3 m L = 0.6 m
Voltage measurement For bare cable NSX100/250
input connector y 185v Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
L=1m L=2m
For bare cable NSX400/630
connector Wire length RJ45 Wire length RJ45
L=3m L=5m
Right-angle terminal extensions
Straight extensions NSX100/250
Edgewise extensions NSX400/630
Double L terminal extension 3P 4P
Spreader from 35 to 45 mm 3P 4P
Cu cable lugs NSX100/250 120v 150v 185v
NSX400/630 240v 300v
Al cable lugs NSX100/250 150v 185v
NSX400/630 240v 300v
Insulation screen 45 mm 3P 4P
70 mm 3P 4P
Interphase barriers Set of 6
F-49
Order form Compact NSX630/1600 NA
DCPV 4P, fixed version
Upside: front connection, 2 kit heatsink,
phase separator are included
Name of customer: ................................................................... Indication contacts
Adress for delivery: .................................................................. OF - ON/OFF indication contacts (maixmum 3)
Requested delivery date: ......................................................... 6 A-240 V AC qty Low level qty
Customer order no: .................................................................. Remote operation
To indicate your choices, Electrical operation Standard Communicating
Check the and enter the appropriate (NSX 630b/1600 DC PV) Power supply AC DC V
applicable square information in the Voltage releases MX AC DC V
boxes rectangles
MN AC DC V
Switch-disconnector Quantity
Rating A MN delay unit Adjustable Non-adjustable
Communication Locking
COM module Device with Ethernet For electrically VBP - ON/OFF pushbutton locking
(BCM-ULP) interface operated devices (by transparent cover + padlocks)
(NSX630b/1600 DC PV)
with Ethernet OFF position locking:
interface + gateway
VCPO - by padlocks
with Modbus VSPO - by keylocks:
interface
Keylock kit (w/o keylock) Profalux Ronis
Front Display Module (FDM121) Mounting accessory
1 keylock Profalux Ronis
Breaker ULP Cord L = 0.35 m
2 identical keylocks, 1 key Profalux Ronis
L = 1.3 m
Accessories
L=3m
CDM - mechanical operation counter
AD - external power-supply module V
CDP - escutcheon
NSX630b/1600 DC PV connection
CP - transparent cover for escutcheon
Horizontal rear connections Bottom
OP - blanking plate for escutcheon
Vertical rear connections Bottom
Front connections Bottom
4 x 240 + bare cable connectors + shields Bottom
Vertical-connection adapters Bottom
Cable-lug adapters Bottom
Long connection shields (1) Top Bottom
or interphase barriers Bottom
(1) B
ottom long connection shield or Bottom interphase
barriers kit is mandatory.
F-50
Order form Masterpact NW DC
Name of customer: .................................................................... Indication contacts

Address for delivery: ................................................................. OF - ON/OFF indication contacts
.................................................................................................. Standard 4 OF 10 A/240 V AC and low level
Requested delivery date: .......................................................... Additional 1 block of 4 OF Max. 2 Qty
Customer order no.: .................................................................. EF - combined connected/closed contacts
To indicate your choices, check the applicable square boxes 1 EF 6 A/240 V AC Max. 8 Qty
and enter the appropriate information in the rectangles 1 EF low level Max. 8 Qty
SDE - fault-trip indication contact
Circuit breaker or switch-disconnector Qty Standard 1 SDE 6 A/240 V AC
Masterpact type NW10 Additional 1 SDE 6 A/240 V AC 1 SDE low level
NW20 Carriage switches Low level 6 A/240 V AC
NW40 CE - connected position Max. 3 Qty
Circuit breaker N, H CD - disconnected position Max. 3 Qty
Special PV switch- HADCD-PV (NW20 or CT - test position Max. 3 Qty

disconnectors NW40) AC - NW actuator for 6 CE - 3 CD - 0 CT additional carriage switches Qty
Switch-disconnector HA Remote operation
Sensor version 1250 to 2500 A Electrical operation MCH - gear motor V
2500 to 5400 A XF - closing voltage release V
5000 to 11000 A MX - opening voltage release V
Version C, D, E
PF - ready to close contact Low level
Type of equipment Fixed
6 A/240 V AC
Drawout chassis BPFE - electrical closing pushbutton
Communication Res - electrical reset option V
COM module RAR - automatic reset option
Device with Ethernet Cradle Remote tripping MN - undervoltage release V
(BCM-ULP) interface management
R - delay unit (non-adjustable)
with I/O
with Ethernet application Rr - adjustable delay unit
interface + module 2e MX - shunt release V
gateway (Chassis)
Locking
with Modbus
interface VBP - ON/OFF pushbutton locking (by transparent cover + padlocks)
OFF position locking:
Front Display Module FDM121 Mounting
accessory VCPO - by padlocks
Breaker ULP Cord L = 0.35
VSPO - by keylocks Keylock kit (w/o keylock) Profalux Ronis
L = 1.3
1 keylock Profalux Ronis
L=3m
Connection
2 keylocks, different keys Profalux Ronis
Vertical Standard version Top Bottom
Chassis locking in disconnected position:
Horizontal Vertical connection is standard however
the connectors can be rotated on-site VSPD - by keylocks Keylock kit (w/o keylock) Profalux Ronis
conversion to horizontal connection Kirk Castell
(except on the NW40) 1 keylock Profalux Ronis
2 keylocks, different keys Profalux Ronis
Optional connected/disconnected/test position locking
VPEC - door interlock On right-hand side of chassis
On left-hand side of chassis
VPOC - racking interlock
IPA - cable-type door interlock
VDC - mismatch protection
VIVC - shutter position indication and locking
IBPO - racking interlock between crank and OFF pushbutton for NW
DAE - automatic spring discharge before breaker removal for NW
Accessories
VO - safety shutters on chassis
CDM - mechanical operation counter
CB - auxiliary terminal shield for chassis
CDP - escutcheon
CP - transparent cover for escutcheon
OP - blanking plate for escutcheon
KMT - Grounding kit
F-51
Notes
F-52
Notes
F-53
Notes
F-54
ART960272 2015 - Schneider Electric - All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric Industries SAS

35, rue Joseph Monier As standards, specifications and designs change from
CS 30323 time to time, please ask for confirmation of the
92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex information given in this publication.
10-31-1247
France
Publication: Schneider Electric Industries SAS
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439 Photos: Schneider Electric
Capital social 896 313 776 Publishing: Altavia St Etienne
www.schneider-electric.com
LVPED208006EN 06-2015

Compact NSX, Compact Ins Inv and Masterpact NW - DC - DC PV Catalogue

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Compact NSX, Compact Ins Inv and Masterpact NW - DC - DC PV Catalogue

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Compact NSX, Compact Ins Inv and Masterpact NW - DC - DC PV Catalogue

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Low Voltage

Direct Current Network

They are installed in main low-voltage switchboards (MLVS) and in distribution

NW10 DC - C/D Version. NW10 DC - E Version.

Ensuring the reliability and

With heatsinks supplied as standard, the circuit breaker or

Ethernet (TPC / IP/ Internet

Module BCM ULP

Compact NSX630b Compact NSX100 to 630

Power Monitoring Expert (PME)

No matter the size or scale of the project, Schneider Electric, has a

The INS PV-1 is a direct current switch disconnector dedicated

Safer photovoltaic energy generation

Smart Panels connect you to energy savings

On-site real time

Ecodial software is dedicated to LV electrical installation

This 4th generation, "Ecodial Advance Calculation 4",

Functions and characteristics A-1

Installation recommendations B-1

Dimensions and connection C-1

Electrical diagrams D-1

Additional characteristics E-1

Catalogue numbers and order form F-1

Compact NSX and Masterpact NW DC - DC PV A wide, complete and high-performance range

under 1000 V for photovoltaic application.

Ie 40C 1250A INS 250 of Shipping, Det Norske Veritas, etc.)

Compact NSX DC and Masterpact NW DC Designed for direct current

Optimised solutions for the many types of DC systems

Optimised and dependable series or parallel

Parallel connection - optimisation

at reduced voltages, most often y 250 V.

Masterpact NW DC - supplied ready for installation

One type of connection per framesize, two Three-pole devices

b Indifferent connection of polarities, from left to

Upstream/downstream connections to top or Series connection of poles is possible by upstream/

b Indifferent connection of polarities, from left to right

cables to top or bottom terminals.

Indifferent connection of polarities. Upstream/downstream connections to top or

Series connection of poles is possible by

Front view: three-pole case - two poles in Rear view.

The safe prefabricated series connections are Version D

The exceptional performance levels Examples of parallel connection

Parallel pole connection accessories are identical to

Specific connections are required for parallel

It is possible to mix series and parallel connections

Parallel pole connection accessories are identical to

Customer connections are made directly

Specific connections are required for parallel

It is possible to mix series and parallel connections

Great flexibility for connections

This international site allows you

Selection guide forDC circuit breakers

Connection accessories A-9

Calculation of DC distribution-system characteristics

General characteristics of Compact NSX DC and DC PV

Circuit breaker characteristics

Accessories and auxiliaries

Accessories and auxiliaries